286
REPUBLIC OF SINGAPORE MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS 140 HILL STREET SINGAPORE 179369 C/O CPG FACILITIES MANAGEMENT PTE LTD 238B THOMSON ROAD #17-00 NOVENA SQUARE TOWER B SINGAPORE 307685 TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING EE/ITT/10/022 MAY 2010

Tender Documents

  • Upload
    kokuei

  • View
    505

  • Download
    8

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Tender Documents

REPUBLIC OF SINGAPORE

MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS 140 HILL STREET

SINGAPORE 179369

C/O

CPG FACILITIES MANAGEMENT PTE LTD

238B THOMSON ROAD #17-00 NOVENA SQUARE

TOWER B SINGAPORE 307685

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA)

BUILDING

EE/ITT/10/022 MAY 2010

Page 2: Tender Documents

I/1

EE/ITT/10/022 21st

May 2010

Dear Sir / Madam INVITATION TO TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING 1 The Government of the Republic of Singapore c/o the Ministry of Information,

Communications and The Arts (“the Employer”) hereby invites tenders for the proposed renovation to level five at MICA building

2 The list of documents enclosed with this Invitation to Tender can be found at Clause 3

of the Instructions to Tenders. Please ensure that the set of documents enclosed herein is complete.

3. A site showround (excluding VIP areas) has been arranged. Attendance to the site

show round is COMPULSORY. No subsequent requests for site visits will be entertained by the Employer.

Date: 26 May 2010 (Wednesday) Time: 10.30 am Venue: MICA Building Level 1 Security Counter Contact Person: Ms. Joanne Koh

4. Your tender prices together with all other relevant documents of the tender must be

submitted electronically through GeBIZ by 1600 hours 14 June 2010 (Monday).

Any tender submitted after the stipulated closing date and time, for whatever reason, will not be considered.

5. Please indicate on the Appendix A – Declaration and Undertaking whether your company is GST-registered. All rates and prices quoted in your tender shall be exclusive of GST.

6. Upon notification of your firm being awarded the tender, a copy of your GST

Certificate of Registration with IRA must be forwarded to the Employer for our records. Your GST Registration Number and Tax Invoice must also be submitted to enable reimbursement of GST.

7. The Employer is not bound to accept the lowest, the whole or any tenders. 8. All requests for clarification regarding this Invitation to Tender shall be made in

writing and directed to:

CPG Facilities Management Pte Ltd 238B Thomson Road, #17-00 Novena Square, Tower B Singapore 307685 Attn : Ms. Joanne Koh

Page 3: Tender Documents

I/2

Fax : 6325 8881

All enquires must reach the Employer no later than seven (7) working days before the closing date for the submission tenders.

9. Any change or amendment to any of the tender documents comprised in this

Invitation to Tender or any response by the Employer to clarifications requested shall be published on the GeBIZ website and shall constitute sufficient notice to all interested tenderers. It is the responsibility of each interested tenderer to check the GeBIZ website for any tender clarification, change, amendment, corrigendum and addendum etc and to take these into account before submitting his tender. No oral representation shall be (a) accepted or construed as modifying anything in the Invitation to Tender, or (b) binding on the Employer.

Yours faithfully ANGELA LOW MANAGER/ PROCUREMENT PERFORMANCE UNIT FOR PERMANENT SECRETARY MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS cc: Ms. Joanne Koh – CPG Facilities Management Pte Ltd

Page 4: Tender Documents

TN/1

TENDER NOTICE TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING Tender No : EE/ITT/10/022 Eligibility : Registered with Building and Construction Authority (BCA) under

workhead classification and description of “CW01 (General Building) with financial grade of C3 ($650,000.00)”

Tender Documents : Available in GeBiz from 21st

May 2010

Site show-round : A tender briefing and site show round will be conducted.

Contact Person: Ms. Joanne Koh Date: 26th

Time: 10.30 am May 2010 (Wednesday)

Venue: MICA Building Level 1 Security Counter Address: Ministry of Information, Communications and the Arts, 140 Hill Street Singapore 179369

Attendance is compulsory.

Closing Date & Time : Tender shall be submitted through GeBIZ before

1600 hours on 14 June 2010 (Monday).

Contract Commencement Date

: The expected commencement date of the Contract shall be in early July 2010.

The Contractor is hereby advised that the above indicated date is subject to change at the Employer’s discretion. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim against any loss and expense or any other compensation, damages or other amount whatsoever resulting from any changes or delays in the commencement date of the Contract.

The Employer does not bind itself to accept the lowest, the whole or any Tender Offer.

Page 5: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING

Pages Contents

Invitation To Tender I/1 – I/2 Tender Notice TN/1 PART I

Instructions To Tenderers ITT/1 – ITT/12

Form of Tender FT/1 – FT/3 Form of Agreement AG/1 – AG/2 Preliminaries For The Whole Project PL/1 – PL/18 Schedule of Breakdown Prices SOP/1 – SOP/13

List of Deviation LOD/1 PART II Public Sector Standard Conditions Of Contract for Construction Works, 2008. (Sixth Edition, Dec 2008.)

COC/1

Appendix to Standard Conditions of Contract APP/1 – APP/2 PART III Particular Specifications PS/1 – PS/18 Technical Specifications (Building Works) TS(BW)/1 – TS(BW)/33

Technical Specifications (Electrical Works) TS(EW)/1 – TS(EW)/31

Technical Specifications (ACMV) TS(ACMV)/1 – TS(ACMV)/46

Technical Specifications (Fire Protection) TS(FP)/1 – TS(FP)/52

PART IV

Appendices

Appendix A Declaration / Undertaking DC/1 – DC/5

Appendix B Contractor’s Declaration – List Of Trade Subcontractors

1 Page

Appendix C Declaration That Prices In Invoices Are Nett – Form D9

1 Page

Appendix D Risk Assessment Form 1 Page

Appendix E MICA House Rules 21 Pages

PART V

List of drawings DWG/1

Page 6: Tender Documents

PART I OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS

Page 7: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/1

1 General

The information and requirements set forth in these Instructions to Tenderers are intended to assist Tenderers in preparing a complete Tender proposal and shall form an integral part of the Contract.

2 Definitions

Throughout this Invitation to Tender and any resultant Contract, unless the context otherwise requires, the following definitions shall apply:

(a) "Invitation to Tender" means the invitation to participate in this Tender

and comprises all tender documents forwarded to the Tenderer inclusive of the Letter of Invitation, Form of Tender, Instructions to Tenderers, Conditions of Contract, Particular Specifications, Technical Specifications, Evaluation Criteria and any other documents and forms enclosed.

(b) "Contract" means any resultant contract and its Annexes between the

Employer and the successful Tenderer.

(c) "Contractor" means the successful Tenderer.

(d) "Tenderer" means a person or his permitted assigns tendering to provide the Goods and/or Services, and shall be deemed to include two or more persons if appropriate.

(e) "Conditions of Contract" also includes such clauses from the Public

Sector Standard Conditions of Contract for Construction Works (PSSCOC), List of Amendments and Particular Conditions to the PSSCOC as will form part of the Contract.

(f) “Employer” means the Government of the Republic of Singapore

(Ministry of Information, Communications and The Arts)

Save as set out above, all other terms referred to in this Invitation to Tender shall have the same meanings as those given in the Conditions of Contract.

3 Tender Documents Issued by Employer

The Tender documents issued by the Employer consist of the following:

Letter of Invitation Tender Notice Part I : Instructions to Tenderers : Form of Tender : Form of Agreement : Preliminaries For The Whole Project : Schedule of Breakdown Prices : List of Deviation Part II : Public Sector Standard Conditions Of Contract for

Construction Works, 2008. (Sixth Edition, Dec 2008.)

Page 8: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/2

: Appendix to Standard Conditions of Contract Part III : Particular Specifications : Technical Specifications (Building Works) : Technical Specifications (Electrical Works) : Technical Specifications (ACMV) : Technical Specifications (Fire Protection) Part IV : Appendix A – Declaration / Undertaking : Appendix B – Contractor’s Declaration (List of

trade subcontractors) : Appendix C – Declaration that Prices in Invoices

are Nett (Form D9) : Appendix D – Risk Assessment Form : Appendix E – MICA House Rules Part V : List of drawings

The Tenderer shall satisfy himself of the contents of all the Tender documents in this Invitation to Tender (including those incorporated by reference). He shall also check that the Tender documents issued to him are complete and that no pages or drawings are missing or duplicated. The Tender sum shall include all incidental and contingent costs and expenses (excluding GST) and no adjustment shall be made to the Tender sum for any error by the Tenderer.

If the Tenderer is in doubt as to the true meaning and intent of any part of the Tender documents, he shall request for clarification in writing and such requests shall reach the Employer no later than seven (7) working days before the closing date for submission of Tenders, failing which the Employer may disregard any such requests. No oral representation shall be (a) accepted or construed as modifying anything in the Invitation to Tender, or (b) binding on the Employer. All requests for clarification shall be addressed to:

CPG Facilities Management Pte Ltd 238B Thomson Road, #17-00 Novena Square, Tower B Singapore 307685 Attn : Ms. Joanne Koh Fax : 6325 8881

Any change or amendment to any of the tender documents comprised in this Invitation to Tender or any response by the Employer to clarifications requested shall be published on the GeBIZ website and shall constitute sufficient notice to all interested Tenderers. It is the responsibility of each interested Tenderer to check the GeBIZ website for any tender clarification, change, amendment, corrigendum and addendum, etc. and to take these into account before submitting his Tender.

4 Amendments to the Tender Documents

At any time prior to the closing date and time for submission of Tenders, the Employer may, for any reason, whether at his own initiative or in response to a clarification requested by a Tenderer, modify the Tender documents in this Invitation to Tender by the issuance of an addendum or a corrigendum. The addendum or corrigendum will be posted on the GeBIZ website and shall constitute sufficient notice to all interested Tenderers. An addendum or

Page 9: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/3

corrigendum may be posted on the GeBIZ website at any time during the Tender Period. Tenderers are strongly encouraged to regularly access the GeBIZ website during the Tender Period to check for any addendum, corrigendum and other documents for download (if any).

The Tenderers shall promptly acknowledge receipt of any addendum or corrigendum to CPG Facilities Management Pte Ltd by sending the acknowledgement slip to the address as indicated in Clause 3 above. A Tenderer who does not acknowledge receipt of any Corrigendum may have his submission rejected.

5 Site showround

5.1 A site showround (excluding VIP areas) has been arranged. All Tenderers must attend the site showround. No subsequent requests for site visits will be entertained by the Employer.

5.2 All Tenderers shall meet the representatives at the designated location, date and time as published in the GeBIZ for the site showround.

5.3 All information transmitted during the show round will be deemed to form part

of the contract. 5.4 No claim for any expenses incurred in attending the site showround will be

entertained by the Employer.

6 Base tender and Alternative tender

6.1 All Tenderers must submit a fully compliant and unqualified base Tender in accordance with the requirements as stated in the Tender documents in this Invitation to Tender. Failure to submit a fully compliant and unqualified base Tender will result in disqualification of the entire Tender.

6.2 The alternative Tender will only be considered if it is accompanied by a fully compliant and unqualified base Tender.

6.3 The Tenderer shall, if he wishes to submit an alternative Tender, clearly mark and identify his alternative Tender on a separate Form of Tender. The Form of Tender for the alternative Tender shall be submitted together with the Form of Tender containing the base Tender. A separate Form of Tender is required for each alternative offer. Tenderers are required to enter all price offers / bids electronically via GeBIZ. This shall include Summary of Tender and Form of Tender.

6.4 The Tenderer shall not alter any of the terms contained in the Conditions of Contract or attach any additional conditions with his Tender. No alteration shall also be made to the text of the Work Specifications. If any alteration, addition or note is made, such alteration, addition or note will not be recognised and the text as originally prepared will be strictly adhered to.

6.5 Any deviation from the base Tender shall be submitted as an alternative Tender. The Tenderer shall list down all deviations from the base Tender in terms of design or specification in the alternative Tender. Any item not listed in the list of deviations shall be deemed to be identical to that in the base Tender.

7 Pricing of Tenders

Page 10: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/4

7.1 The Tenderer shall state the rates and prices of all items of work described in the tender documents. Items against which no rate or price is entered by the Tenderer will not be paid for by the Employer when executed and shall be deemed to be covered by the other rates and prices in the tender documents. The Tenderer shall ensure that the rate and price for each item shall truly represent the full value of the item.

7.2 The amount appearing as the total of the Summary of Tender and marked

“Total Carried to Form of Tender” shall be transferred to the Form of Tender in Dollars and Cents, without any alteration or rounding off. The completed Form of Tender (including Form of Tender for any alternative offer as specified in Clause 6) shall be submitted by the Tenderer as part of his Tender Proposal, failing which his tender would be rejected.

7.3 If there is any discrepancy between the Tender sum submitted through GeBIZ

and the sum stated in the Tenderer’s hard copy submissions, the Tender price in the Form of Tender submitted electronically (reflected on GeBIZ after closing date and time) shall be binding and shall take precedence any other submissions. If there is any discrepancy between the Tender sum stated in the Form of Tender and the sum stated in the Summary of Tender or any other documents submitted by the Tenderer, the Tender sum stated in the Form of Tender submitted electronically shall be deemed to be the correct amount. If there is any discrepancy between the Tender sum stated in words and the Tender sum stated in figures in the Form of Tender, the Tender sum in the Form of Tender which tallies with the sum stated in the Summary of Tender shall take precedence and shall be deemed to be the correct amount. If none of the sums stated tally, the Tender sum in figures stated in the Form of Tender shall take precedence.

8 Submission of Tender 8.1 Tenderers shall submit their Tenders in accordance with the following mode(s)

of submission:

Information or document(s) in Tender

Mode of Submission Closing Date (Singapore

time) The Tenderer must submit the WHOLE Tender document and any relevant documents.

1. Form of Tender 2. Preliminaries for the whole project 3. Schedule of breakdown prices 4. List of Deviation 5. Appendix A to D 6. BCA certificate 7. GST certificate 8.Certified Audited Financial

Statements of the Tenderer in the past 2 years

9. Track Records of similar project (including contract period, contract

This shall be submitted electronically to the Employer via GeBIZ

.

Please refer to instructions in the GeBIZ Tender Notice.

Page 11: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/5

sum, contact persons & contact details)

10. Submission of site organization chart

11. Qualifications and experience of proposed personnel (i.e Curriculum vitae) and their contact numbers

12. Method Statement For Works and Risk Management

13. Any other information necessary for the Tender

14. Resume of proposed team

8.2 Where Tenders are to be submitted using GeBIZ, the Tenderer shall submit his Tender in accordance with the Terms and Conditions for Use of the Government Electronic Business (GeBIZ).

8.3 The Employer reserves the right to reject Tenders not submitted in accordance with the mode(s) of submission specified herein.

8.4 In the event of any inconsistency or conflict arising between the parts of the

Tenders submitted using GeBIZ and the parts of the Tender submitted using the Tender box, the electronic submission will take precedent.

8.5 Tenders received through GeBIZ after the closing date and time deadline for

submission of Tenders, for whatever reason, will not be considered. 9 Copies of Tender

Tenderers shall be required to submit three full set of the document including all supporting documents/brochures/handbooks or other materials. In the case where more than one set is submitted, one set is to be marked "Original" and the other sets are to be marked "Copy”.

10 Language

The Tender and all supporting materials submitted by the Tenderer shall be written in the English language.

11 Alteration, Erasures or Illegibility Except for amendments or corrections to any entry made by the Tenderer

himself which are initialled by the Tenderer, all Tenders bearing any alterations or erasures and all Tenders in which rates and prices are not legibly stated are liable to be rejected.

12 Specifications, Patterns, Samples or Drawings

Any specifications, patterns, samples or drawings specified in the Invitation to Tender will be available for inspection by the Tenderer at the address specified on the invitation during normal working hours up to the stipulated time on the closing date.

Page 12: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/6

13 Evaluation Criteria 13.1 Where the Invitation to Tender specifies evaluation criteria in terms of the

financial category and supply category/head required for registration with any Government Registration Authority (GRA), namely the Expenditure and Procurement Policies Unit of the Ministry of Finance, and the Building and Construction Authority (BCA), as the case may be, the evaluation of such criteria will be delegated to the relevant GRA.

13.2 Where a Tenderer's existing registration with a GRA, which is valid up to the closing date of this Tender, specifies that the Tenderer has met particular criteria in relation to particular financial category and supply category/head, the Employer will regard the Tenderer as having met the criteria specified in the registration for the financial category and supply category/head set out in the registration and in the manner set out in the registration.

13.3 Tenderers who are registered with the relevant GRA, specifying that they have

met the criteria for this Tender, must declare their registration status in the manner set out in the Invitation to Tender.

13.4 Tenderers who do not hold a valid registration from the relevant GRA

specifying that they have met the criteria for this Invitation to Tender are advised to apply for the registration with the relevant GRA at the earliest possible opportunity and declare their registration status in their Tenders. Such Tenderers should apply for registration with EPPU through the Government Electronic Business (GeBIZ). The address for the GeBIZ Homepage is http://www.gebiz.gov.sg.

If their application for registration is still pending by the closing date and time of this Invitation to Tender, Tenderers should enclose a copy of the receipt for registration fee paid issued by the GRA(s) with their Tenders.

13.5 Tenderers shall be evaluated based on the following criteria:

(a) *Registered with Building and Construction Authority (BCA) under workhead classification and description of

“CW01 (General Building) with financial grade of C3 ($650,000.00)”

(b) Compliance with Instructions to Tenderers, Conditions of Contract and Specifications*

(c) Not debarred from any Government Tenders or public sector tenders*

(d) Sign site show round attendance sheet*

(e) Financial status of the company for the past two (2) years

(f) Certification of Tenderer to ISO 9001: 2000 / ISO 9002 with certification bodies accredited by the Singapore Accreditation Council (SAC)

(g) Tender Price

(h) Track records and experience in similar projects

(i) A method statement for risk management with respect to Workplace

Page 13: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/7

Safety and Health which is in line with the Ministry of Manpower’s regulation

(j) No safety demerit points issued from the Ministry of Manpower

*These are Critical Criteria. Tender proposals that do not comply with any of these criteria shall be rejected.

14 Eligibility Any company or business that is currently debarred from participating in Government tenders or public sector tenders is not eligible to participate in this Tender. If a tender is submitted without explicitly mentioning that the Tenderer is currently debarred, the Employer shall treat the submission of the tender as an express continuing declaration by the Tenderer that the Tenderer is in fact eligible to participate in this Tender and, if such a declaration is discovered to be false, the Employer will be entitled to rescind any contracts entered into pursuant to such a tender, without the Employer being liable therefore in damages or compensation.

15 Compliance with Instructions

Tenders will be accepted only if submitted according to the instructions contained and in the form(s) prescribed in the Invitation to Tender. Any tender which attempts to vary the Form of Tender or Conditions of Contract is liable to be rejected. In consideration of the Tenderer agreeing to abide by these instructions in the Invitation to Tender, the Employer shall evaluate the tenders fairly and in accordance with the said instructions.

16 Compliance with Part Numbers

If the Employer has, in this Invitation to Tender, stated the Part Numbers of the Goods required and the Tenderer wishes to offer an item which does not correspond with any of the stated Part Numbers, the offer by the Tenderer shall, for the purposes of Clause 17 hereof be deemed to be non compliant with technical requirements.

17 Compliance with Technical Requirements The Tenderer shall provide explicit responses of compliance or non-compliance with any other technical requirements enclosed in this Invitation to Tender. In the event of any non-compliance with the technical requirements, the Tenderer shall satisfy the Employer (by providing a certification from the manufacturer of the item offered or a copy of the relevant extract from any reputable publication citing clearly its title and edition) that the form, fit and function of the items offered are equivalent to the Goods required and that they are interchangeable. Where the Tenderer fails to satisfy the Employer in the manner above, the tender is liable to be rejected.

18 Ownership Status of Tenderer

The Tenderer shall provide full information on:

Page 14: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/8

i) the name and address of any person, company or corporation which

owns, whether directly or indirectly, at least 50% of the total number of shares in the Tenderer; and

ii) the number, percentage and class of shares held by such person,

company or corporation. The said information shall be stated in the section on “Information on Major

Shareholders” in the Declaration and Undertaking form enclosed in Appendix A. 19 Validity Period All Tenders submitted shall remain valid for acceptance for a period of

ninety (90)

days from the closing date of this Invitation to Tender and during such extension of the period as set out in the Form of Tender or as may subsequently be agreed to in writing by the Tenderer, at the request of the Employer.

20 Withdrawal of Tender No Tenders may be withdrawn after the closing date and time prescribed in the

Invitation to Tender in GeBIZ. Any Tenderer who attempts to do so may, in addition to any remedy which the Employer may have against him, be liable to be debarred from future Government tenders.

21 Employer's Clarifications of the Tenderer's Proposal

In the event that the Employer seeks clarification upon any aspect of the Tenderer's proposal, the Tenderer shall provide full and comprehensive responses in writing within seven (7) days of the date of the Employer’s request for clarification.

22 Shortlisting Tenderers

(a) The Employer reserves the right to shortlist Tenderers in accordance with the criteria set forth in the Invitation to Tender; and give those so shortlisted the opportunity to submit new or amended tenders on the basis of the Employer’s revised requirements, in accordance with a common deadline. (b) The tenders received based on the firm and updated requirements shall form the basis of the final tender evaluation. The tenders received in the final round shall be complete and comprehensive, and shall over-ride all tender proposals previously submitted. The final offer shall not make references to previous offers. All the tender proposals received in the previous rounds shall be treated as lapsed. Such final offers shall be submitted in sealed envelopes and deposited in the tender box as instructed by the Employer.

23 Acceptance of Tender 23.1 The Employer shall be under no obligation to accept the lowest or any tender.

The Employer shall not be obliged to enter into correspondence with any Tenderer regarding the reasons for its non-acceptance of a Tender.

Page 15: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/9

23.2 The Employer reserves the right, unless the Tenderer expressly stipulates to the contrary in his Tender, of accepting such portion of each Tender as the Employer may deem fit.

23.3 The issuance by the Employer of a Letter of Award accepting the Tender or

part of the Tender shall create a binding Contract on the part of the successful Tenderer to supply to the Employer the Goods and Services offered in the successful Tenderer’s Tender. The Contract shall be governed by the Conditions of Contract set out in Part II of this Invitation to Tender. The Employer may at its discretion require the Tenderer to sign a written agreement incorporating the Conditions of Contract as set out in Part II of this Invitation to Tender together with such further terms and conditions (if any) agreed upon between the Employer and the successful Tenderer.

23.4 The Letter of Award may be issued:

(i) through GeBIZ to the successful Tenderer, or

(ii) to the successful Tenderer's address as given in his Tender by hand or

by post. Such issuance of the Letter of Award through GeBIZ, by hand or by post, as the case may be, shall be deemed to be effective communication of acceptance.

24 Notification

Notification will not necessarily be sent to unsuccessful Tenderers by the Employer.

25 Confidentiality

25.1 Except with the consent in writing of the Employer, the Tenderer shall not

disclose this Tender, or any of its provisions, or any specifications, plans, drawings, patterns, samples or information issued by the Employer for the purpose of this Invitation to Tender.

25.2 The Employer may require an unsuccessful Tenderer to return any specifications, plans, drawings, patterns, samples or instructions issued by the Employer.

26 Goods and Services Tax (GST) Registration 26.1 The Tenderer shall not include in the rates and prices proposed in his Tender,

the Singapore Goods and Services Tax (GST) chargeable for the supply of Goods or Services required in the tender. All rates and prices quoted shall be exclusive of the said GST chargeable on the supply of the said Goods and Services.

26.2 If the successful Tenderer is a taxable person under the Goods and Services

Tax Act (“GST Act”), the Employer will pay the successful Tenderer, in addition to the rates and prices proposed, the GST chargeable on the supply of Goods and Services provided pursuant to this Tender.

Page 16: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/10

26.3 For the avoidance of doubt, the Goods and Services Tax (GST) referred to in this clause is that imposed pursuant to the Goods and Services Tax Act (Cap. 117A).

27 Applicable Law

All tenders submitted pursuant to this Invitation to Tender and the formation of any resultant contracts shall be governed by the Applicable Law Clause in the Conditions of Contract.

28 Details of Proposed Sub-contractors 28.1 Where sub-contractors are proposed, the Tenderer shall furnish the following

information on the said sub-contractors as a separate attachment to his Tender submission. (i). Name of sub-contractor(s); (ii). Address, Telephone and Fax Numbers; (iii). Registration with BCA showing the heads and financial category, if any; (iv). Names, Age and Qualification of Directors/Partners (v). Relevant Experience (vi). Number of employees of the sub-contractor(s)

The said information shall be stated in the section on “Contractor declaration – list of trade sub-contractors” enclosed in Appendix B.

28.2 The identities of the sub-contractors are a basic criterion that will be considered

during the tender evaluation process. Tenderers must ensure that the sub-contractors proposed are registered with the Building and Construction Authority (BCA) or SLOTS.

28.3 A Tenderer who submits a Tender without the names of any proposed sub-

contractors shall be deemed to have agreed not to sub-contract the provision of any of the Goods and/or Services to be provided pursuant to this Invitation to Tender.

28.4 The Employer is entitled to request the Tenderer to change the sub-contractors

proposed in the tender without the need to give any reason. 29 Tender Submission Requirement The Tenderer shall complete all schedules and forms in the tender documents

in this Invitation to Tender. All rates and prices must be filled up, and blanks, “N.A”, “-“, “Included”, “To be advised” or any other variant are not acceptable in respect of any pricing sections of the Tender. Subject to Clause 7.3, the Tender price submitted electronically (reflected on GeBIZ after closing date and time) is deemed to be the Tenderer’s offer price for all the Goods and Services to be provided in compliance with the requirements set forth in this Invitation to Tender.

30 Presentation

Short listed Tenderers may be requested to give to the Employer, at the time and place determined by the Employer, a detailed and comprehensive

Page 17: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/11

management presentation of the service package that they are offering, within seven (7) days after the close of the tender. The presentation shall include but not limited to the following:

a) The proposed organization chart for this Contract and its line of

authority, accountability and responsibilities in relation to its Head Office; b) The operational systems including lines of control; and c) The monitoring and control systems to ensure that the response time

could match the User’s expectations. 31 Consortium

31.1 As used in this Invitation to Tender, "Consortium" means an unincorporated

joint venture through the medium of a consortium or a partnership.

31.2 The following shall apply if a tender is submitted by a Consortium: (a) Each member of the Consortium shall be a business organization duly

organized, existing and registered under the laws of its country of domicile.

(b) No Consortium shall include a member who has been debarred from

public sector tenders. (c) After the submission of the tender, any introduction of, or changes to,

Consortium membership must be approved in writing by the Employer. (d) The following documents must be submitted with this tender:

(i) A certified copy of the consortium or partnership agreement,

signed by all members of the Consortium, (ii) The tender is to be submitted by a member of the

Consortium ("Lead Member"). Documentary proof must be provided that the Lead Member is authorised by all members of the Consortium to submit, sign the tender, receive instruction, give any information, accept any contract and act for and on behalf of all the members of the Consortium. The documentary proof could be in the form of:

(1) relevant provision(s) in the certified copy of the

consortium or partnership agreement, or (2) certified copies of powers of attorney from each

members of the Consortium.

(e) Information must be submitted with respect to:

(i) the legal relationship among the members of the Consortium; (ii) the role and responsibility of each member of the Consortium;

and

Page 18: Tender Documents

PART I INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERS

ITT/12

(iii) the address of the Consortium to which the Employer may send any notice, request, clarification or correspondence.

(f) If the Employer awards the Contract to a Consortium:

(i) The Letter of Acceptance may be through GeBIZ or handed to

or posted to the address of the Lead Member of the Consortium given in the tender.

(ii) The issue by the Employer of a Letter of Acceptance shall

create a binding Contract on all the members of the Consortium. (iii) Each member of the Consortium shall be jointly and severally

responsible to the Employer for the due performance of the Contract.

(iv) As and when requested by the Employer, all members of the

Consortium shall be required to sign a formal agreement in the appropriate form with the Employer. Until the said formal agreement is prepared and executed, the Consortium's tender together with the Employer's Letter of Acceptance, shall constitute a binding Contract on all the members of the Consortium.

(v) In the event that any member of the Consortium withdraws from

the Consortium or is adjudicated a bankrupt by a duly constituted judicial tribunal, or goes into liquidation in accordance with the laws of the country of incorporation, then the surviving member(s) of the Consortium shall be obliged to carry out and complete the Contract.

32 Disclaimer This Invitation to Tender may not contain all information which Tenderers may

require. Tenderers should therefore make their own inquiries and seek such clarifications as they think necessary. The Employer shall not be liable to any Tenderer for any information in this Invitation to Tender which may be incomplete or inaccurate. For avoidance of doubt, the "information" mentioned in this paragraph excludes the Conditions of Contract and Work Specifications.

Page 19: Tender Documents

PART I OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

FORM OF TENDER

Page 20: Tender Documents

FT/1

FORM OF TENDER

To : Name of Tenderer1

Government of the Republic of Singapore :

c/o the Ministry of Information, Communications and The Arts

Address :

140 Hill Street Singapore 179369 Tender No. : EE/ITT/10/022 TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING 1. We, __________________________________2

(Name in Block Letters) hereby offer and undertake on the acceptance of this Tender to supply the Goods and Services as specified in the Work Specifications, Instructions to Tenderers, Conditions of Contract and all other documents attached in the tender documents as part of this Invitation to Tender.

2. Our Tender is fully consistent with and does not contradict or derogate from anything or downgrade anything in your tender documents for this Invitation to Tender. You are entitled to reject our Tender if it is inconsistent with or contradicts or derogates from anything or downgrades anything in your tender documents for this Invitation to Tender.

3. We undertake that we shall, as and when required by you, execute a formal

Agreement in the appropriate form incorporating the Conditions of Contract set out in this Invitation to Tender together with such further terms and conditions, if any, agreed upon between the Government of the Republic of Singapore c/o the Ministry of Information, Communications and The Arts and us. Until the said Agreement is prepared and executed, this offer together with your written acceptance thereof shall constitute a binding agreement between us.

4. OUR OFFER IS VALID FOR 90 DAYS

FROM THE CLOSING DATE OF THIS TENDER.

5. We agree that as and when requested by the Government of the Republic of Singapore c/o the Ministry of Information, Communications and The Arts, we shall extend the validity of this offer for one or more periods not exceeding in total 12

calendar weeks.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 If the tender is submitted by a consortium, each member of the consortium shall be named. 2 If the tender is submitted by a consortium, the Lead Member of the consortium shall submit the tender on behalf of the consortium members. Documentary proof must be provided that the Lead Member is authorised by all members of the consortium to submit, sign the tender, receive instruction, give any information, accept any contract and act for and on behalf of all the members of the consortium. For example, paragraph 1 in this Form of Tender should read “We, (Name of Lead Member), acting for and

Page 21: Tender Documents

FORM OF TENDER

FT/2

on behalf of (Name of 1st Member) , (Name of 2nd Member) and (etc – List out Names of remaining Members) …” 6. Our price (hereinafter referred to as “the Contract Price”) for the Goods and

Services to be provided by us: (S$ )

7. A breakdown of the Contract Price for the services is given in the Schedule of

Breakdown Price attached hereto. 8. We are registered / not registered* with ________________________________

(Name of Government Registration Authority) under the following supply category / head (s) as specified in the Invitation to Tender :

Supply Category / Head Financial Category

Expiry

9. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest, the whole or any

tender you may receive and you may disregard the changes (if any) made by us to the Specifications, Conditions of Contract, Schedule of Breakdown Prices specified in the Tender unless such changes are accepted by you in writing later.

10. We undertake, if our Tender is accepted, to commence the Works on the date

or dates specified in the Employer's Letter of Acceptance and if there is no such date or dates then as soon as is reasonably possible after the receipt of an order to that effect from the Employer and to complete the whole of the Works comprised within the Contract by the Time for Completion or Times for Completion stated in the Employer's Letter of Acceptance.

11. We further undertake to give you any further information which you may

require. 12. We warrant, represent and declare that we are duly authorized to submit, sign

this tender, receive instructions, give any information, accept any contract and act for and on behalf of _________________________________3

(Insert name of firm, company or consortium).

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 If the tender is submitted by a consortium, the tender shall be submitted by the Lead Member on behalf of all members of the consortium. Each member of the consortium shall be listed. For example, “… for

Page 22: Tender Documents

FORM OF TENDER

FT/3

and on behalf of (Name of 1st Member), (Name of 2nd Member) and (etc – List out Names of remaining Members) …”

Tenderer's (as *Principal/Agent) Company or Business Registration No4

Tenderer's official Stamp: 4

:

Authorized Signature4

Designation :

Name :

(*Delete whichever is not applicable)

Witness Company or Business Registration No4

Tenderer's official Stamp: 4

:

Authorized Signature4

Designation :

Name :

(*Delete whichever is not applicable)

NOTICE: This Form duly completed MUST accompany every Tender Proposal. Any change to its wordings may render the Tender liable to DISQUALIFICATION

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 The Lead Member’s registration number, official stamp and authorized signature must be provided.

Page 23: Tender Documents

PART I OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

FORM OF AGREEMENT

Page 24: Tender Documents

AG/1

FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS CONTRACT is made on [Date] BETWEEN the Government of Singapore c/o Ministry of Information, Communications and the Arts (“the Employer”) of the one part and ___________1

[name of Contractor] (“the Contractor”) of the other part.

WHEREAS the Employer requires goods and services to be supplied and has accepted a tender by the Contractor for the supply of the same. NOW IT IS AGREED as follows: 1 In this Contract, words and expression shall have the same meanings as are

respectively assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to.

2 The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as

part of this Contract:

(a) Instructions to Tenderers; (b) Particular Specification

(c) Technical Specifications; (d) Contactor’s Tender including Form of Tender, Summary of Breakdown

Prices and subsequent correspondence (if any) amplifying or amending the Contractor’s Tender;

(e) Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract (PSSCOC), its Appendix and Particular Conditions to the PSSCOC

(f) Preliminaries for the whole Project (g) Planned Schedule of Work (h) List of Drawings (i) Tender Clarification

(j) Employer’s Letter of Acceptance, and (k) This Form of Agreement. 3 In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor

as hereinafter mentioned the Contractor agrees to supply the goods and services mentioned in the Contract in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the Contract for the Contract Sum of Singapore Dollars as stated below :-

_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________(S$ ____________________)

1 If the tender is submitted by a consortium, each member of the consortium shall be listed. The tender shall be submitted by the Lead Member on behalf of all members of the consortium, it should read “… one part and (Name of Lead Member), acting for and on behalf of (Name of 1st Member) , (Name of 2nd Member) and (etc – List out Names of remaining Members) (“Contractor”) of the other part.”

Page 25: Tender Documents

AG/2

4 The exercising of optional items is at the sole discretion of the Employer. 5 The Employer agrees to pay to the Contractor in consideration for the supply of

goods and services mentioned in the Contract in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the Contract.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Parties hereto have by their respective duly authorised representatives have hereunto set their respective hands the day, the month and the year first above written. Signed by : ................ (Signature)

[Name] [Designation of Office] [Ministry of Information, Communications and The Arts] for and on behalf of the GOVERNMENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF SINGAPORE

in the presence of : ................ (Signature of Witness)

[Name of Witness] [Designation of Office] [Ministry of Information, Communications and The Arts] Signed by : ..............2

(Signature )

[Name]

[Designation of Office] for and on behalf of [Name of Contractor] in the presence of : .............. (Signature of Witness)

[Name of Witness] [Designation of Office] [Name of Contractor]

2 The tender shall be submitted by the Lead Member on behalf of all members of the consortium. The Lead Member’s authorised signature must be provided.

Page 26: Tender Documents

PART I OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

PRELIMINARIES FOR THE WHOLE PROJECT

Page 27: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/1

PRELIMINARIES FOR THE WHOLE PROJECT

10

SCOPE OF WORKS

The extent of Works included in this Contract shall be as described in the Contract Documents or reasonably inferred there from.

The Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents,

and satisfy himself as to the full extent, character and nature of the Works to be performed under this Contract. The Employer shall not entertain any claim arising from the Contractor's failure to study these Documents.

20

SPECIFICATIONS

The term 'the Specifications' used throughout the Contract shall be deemed to include, but not limited to:-

i) Specifications in this document, inclusive and shall be deemed to form part of the Contract. The specification is to be read in conjunction with the

aforesaid Specification which sets out generally the Employer's requirements as regards quality of materials and workmanship. The Contractor shall familiarise himself with the Specification and refer to clauses appearing under the relevant work sections.

Where specific provision is made in the specification for any

workmanship or materials, such provision shall have precedence over the Specification.

Page 28: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/2

30

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

The Conditions of Contract shall be the Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract for Construction Works 2008 including the Appendix, any Option Modules and Construction Contract and supplementary amendment thereto.

Further details or additional requirements in respect of some

but not all of these Conditions are given herein solely for the guidance of the Contractor; notwithstanding this, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for taking all the implications of the Conditions of Contract into account.

01 Programme for the Works

Preliminary Tender Programme

The Contractor shall submit with his tender a preliminary programme showing how he intends to organise, carry out and complete the Works within the Contract Period. The programme shall identify the sequence of the main operations and the time limit within which the Contractor proposes that each operation shall commence and complete.

The programme shall not form part of the Contract

unless specifically agreed to in writing before award of the Contract.

Programme for the Works

The Contractor shall submit his programme for the Works in accordance with the requirements of the Contract and the programme shall be in the form of a critical path network.

The Contractor shall submit THREE copies of the

programme to the SO. A copy of the approved programme shall be retained on the Site.

Progress Report/ Photographs

The Contractor shall monitor the progress of the work and submit weekly reports/ photographs to the SO

Page 29: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/3

showing the actual progress of the work compared with the scheduled progress in the programme.

The report shall include the progress status for each

trade of work, number and types of workmen employed, materials delivered and construction equipment used, compared with the planned activities and resources.

02 Time for Completion

Contract Period

The period of completion of the Works shall be deemed to include Sundays and Public Holidays.

03 Variations to the Works

Variation Meetings

The Contractor (including Approved Specialist Sub-Contractors unless directed otherwise) shall attend regular variation meetings convened by the SO. The meetings shall be chaired by the SO and held once a month to verify variations issued and to settle variation claims.

The Contractor shall submit to the SO an up-to-date

statement of his variation claims at the variation meetings and he shall ensure that the claims are made in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.

04 Valuation of Variations

Star Rates

Where the Contractor contends that work is not of a similar character or executed under similar conditions as priced in the Schedule of Unit Rates, he shall give to the SO a written notice within seven days from the time of receipt of the instruction from the SO with regard to such work for the SO's consideration. Unit

Page 30: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/4

rates for such items shall be termed 'Star Rates' and will be indicated thus ' * ', if so decided by the SO.

The Contractor shall declare on the prescribed form D9 as attached in this document that the prices quoted in the supporting vouchers / invoices are nett of trade discounts. The SO may request for documentary evidence of the amount paid by the Contractor to his suppliers and / or subcontractors.

Provisional Quantities

Where provisional quantities are provided against any item of works, such works shall be subject to measurement on completion and valued at rates tendered by the Contractor in the Provisional Quantities Bill.

40 Insurance of the Works The Contractor shall take out the following insurances:- (I)

Public Liability Insurance

(a)

Coverage Generally

Any injury to any person fatal or otherwise and any loss of or injury or damage to any property caused or arising out of or in the course of the construction of the Works as spelt out in the policy.

(b)

Table of Limits of Indemnity

Any one Any one Accident

Period

i) Where the amount tendered does not exceed $5 m $2.5 m Unlimited ii) Where the amount tendered exceeds $5 m but does not exceed $50 m $5.0 m Unlimited

Page 31: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/5

iii) Where the amount tendered exceeds $50 m $10.0 m Unlimited (c)

Non-Negligence Clause

Loss or damage to property (including property of the Employer but not the Works) caused by collapse, subsidence, vibration, weakening or removal of support or lowering ground water arising out or in the course of or by reason of the carrying out of the Works which may not be due to any breach of contract, negligence, omission or default of the Contractor or his subcontractors.

(II)

Work Injury Compensation Insurance

Coverage Generally

All liabilities under the Work Injury Compensation Act (Chapter 354) or any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof as spelt out in the policy.

(III)

All Risks on Works Insurance

(a)

Coverage Generally

Loss or damage arising from whatever cause (other than the "excepted risks" as defined in Clause 25.2 of the Conditions of Contract and design for which the Contractor is responsible under the Contract) to all Permanent Works, Temporary Works and all unfixed Plant, materials and goods delivered on or adjacent to the Site for incorporation into the Works (but excluding tools and Construction Equipment owned or hired by the Contractor or any subcontractors) and any structures or other works erected on or adjacent to the Site.

(b)

Sum Insured

Contract Sum plus professional fees to the percentage stated in the Appendix plus Employer's Existing Property (if applicable). Temporary buildings such as workers' quarters, stores, site offices erected

Page 32: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/6

upon the Site are covered up to a maximum sum of $50,000 for the reinstatement of the buildings.

(c) Employer’s Existing Property

Contract Value Value of Existing Properties to be Covered

Up to $100,000 $200,000.00 $100,000 to $250,000 $500,000.00 $250,000 to $500,000 $1,000,000.00 $500,000 to $1,000,000 $2,000,000.00 More than $1,000,000 $2,500,000.00

The insurances taken out for Public Liability and Work

Injury Compensation shall cover from the date of commencement of the Works up to and including any extensions of time (or the latest date of Substantial Completion if more than one), plus the Defects Liability Period. Coverage for All Risks on Works Insurance shall be from commencement of the Works up to and including any extensions of time (or the latest date of Substantial Completion if more than one) plus 14 days after the Date of Substantial Completion and during Defects Liability Period for damage, loss or injury arising from cause(s) as specified in the insurance policies.

Additional Insurances

The Contractor shall also, at his own cost, take out any other additional insurances which he deems necessary to cover any risks not included or not sufficiently included in the Blanket Insurance Scheme.

04 Progress Payments and Final Account

Unfixed Materials on Site

The Contractor shall submit with each progress payment claim, a statement of unfixed materials-on-site on the prescribed form D8 as attached in this document.

Page 33: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/7

Such a statement shall be substantiated with appropriate vouchers and invoices, with quantities adjusted to reflect the actual quantities on Site, and submitted to the SO for his verification and inclusion in the progress payment. Notwithstanding the Contractor's statement, if in the opinion of the SO, the prices and quantities of materials stated in the vouchers and invoices are unreasonably high, the Employer shall be entitled to adjust such prices and quantities.

05 Governing Law & Notices This Contract shall be deemed to be made in

Singapore and shall be subject to, governed by and interpreted in accordance with the Laws of the Republic of Singapore for every purpose. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods 1980 to this Contract is hereby expressly excluded.

50

ALTERNATIVE PROPOSALS

The Contractor may submit alternative proposals using materials, designs or processes different from those specified in this tender. Provided always that the Contractor shall price the base offer (offer based on the original specification) regardless of whether he proposes any alternative or otherwise.

60

USE OF THE SITE

The Contractor shall use the site solely for the purpose of the Works. All activities occurring on the Site must be in connection with and exclusive to the Works. There must be no "spin-off" business activities and the Contractor shall not use the Site for other profit-making activities.

65

PRE-CONSTRUCTION SITE SURVEY PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

Page 34: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/8

The Contractor shall submit a pre-construction survey report to the SO before the commencement of any areas. The report should be furnished with photographs and details outlining the services around the affected area. The Contractor should be familiarised with the all affected services and areas so that there will be minimum disruption to the occupants and users. Before any work commences or during the progress of the work, should the Contractor discover that certain services may obstruct and impedes the progress of the works he shall arrange for the diversion of the services. The Contractor will be reimbursed for the costs of the diversion. However, should the Contractor divert any services without obtaining written permission from the SO, then he shall bear all costs arising there form.

70

TEMPORARY ACCESS

The Contractor shall provide and maintain throughout the duration of the Contract all necessary temporary roads, crossing over drains and/or channels, etc. to gain proper access to and within the Site. On Substantial Completion, he shall clear them away and make good all works disturbed to the satisfaction of the SO and any authority concerned or pay charges for such making good as may be required by such authority.

The Contractor shall provide for all necessary traffic and directional signs, barriers, warning lamps, rubber cones etc. to guide and inform the public that the working area is closed or partially closed to all traffic (vehicular as well as pedestrians) during the contract period and shall replace/ re-site or remove all those signs etc. as directed by the SO or the Traffic Police and other relevant authorities.

80

HOARDINGS

The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain throughout the duration of the Contract temporary hoardings with approved banner painted on it including perspective drawings, letterings and logo of the project to the approval of the SO and at locations approved by the SO, including gates, access doors and fastenings, for the proper execution of the

Page 35: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/9

Works, for the protection of the public and occupants of adjoining premises and for meeting the requirements of the SO and the relevant authorities. On Substantial Completion, he shall clear them away and make good all works disturbed to the satisfaction of the SO.

90

PROTECTIVE BARRIERS, SCREENS, ETC.

The Contractor shall provide all necessary barricades, tarpaulins, screens, etc. for the protection of the workpeople, occupants of adjoining property and the public, and shall alter, adapt and maintain them as necessary.

100

WATER FOR THE WORKS

The Contractor shall provide and maintain a temporary water supply and distribution system sufficient for the execution of the Works (including the works to be executed by Nominated Sub-Contractors, Suppliers and Approved Specialist Sub-Contractors). The temporary water supply installation shall comply with the requirements of the Public Utilities Board. The Contractor shall alter, adapt, maintain as necessary and remove the installation upon completion of the Works, reinstate all works disturbed to the satisfaction of the SO and the Public Utilities Board and pay all costs, charges and fees in connection therewith.

110

TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER

The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary lighting and electrical power including temporary wiring and meters required for the Works including that for Nominated Sub-Contractors, Suppliers and Approved Specialist Sub-Contractors. The Contractor shall alter, adapt and maintain as necessary and shall pay all charges and clear away all on completion.

The Contractor is required to employ a licensed Electrical

Contractor to install and maintain such temporary lighting and electrical power on the Site, and to ensure that they are in accordance with Singapore Standard CP 5 - "Code of Practice for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings" and CP44 - Temporary Electrical Installations for Construction and Building Sites.

Page 36: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/10

All such supplies of 60A and less shall incorporate a current

operated Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (E.L.C.B.) and direct tripping sensitivity of 20/30 mA and tripping time within 0.1 second.

120

REMOVAL OF DEBRIS AND WASTE, ETC.

The Contractor shall not dump construction debris, rubbish and waste at the Site, vacant plot of land, roadside or drains as it may cause obstruction, pollution and chokage to the drains and water courses. All rubbish, construction debris and waste arising from the Contractor's occupation of the Site or Works must be collected and removed off the Site in a manner as described below.

The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for

the collection and removal of debris daily or as often as necessary. The Contractor shall arrange for the disposal of:

a) all non-incinerable debris, rubbish, garbage, waste, etc.

and unwanted earth to:

Tuas Marine Transfer Station 98 Tuas South Avenue 3 Singapore 637821

b) all incinerable debris, rubbish, garbage, waste, etc. to Senoko, Tuas and Ulu Pandan Incineration Plantsand shall pay all disposal fees in connection therewith.

The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to prevent the breeding of mosquitoes in the areas handed over to him during the period of the Contract.

130

HOUSEKEEPING & FIRE SAFETY ON SITE

The Contractor shall maintain a high standard of housekeeping and ensure fire safety on Site for the duration of the Contract. He shall keep the Site of his operations in as clean, neat and safe a condition as possible.

Page 37: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/11

The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to maintain pest control services in the contracted areas during the period of the Contracts, which causes annoyance or nuisance to users of these properties. In event of such, the Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all claims resulting from the above.

Prevention of mosquito/pest breeding, water stagnation, littering and pollution

The Contractor shall ensure that all necessary steps are taken to prevent mosquito/pest breeding, water stagnation, littering or pollution to the drainage system at the surrounding areas of the contract area. The Contractor is responsible for all summonses etc issued by the Ministry of the Environment or any other Government agency for matters relating to mosquito/pest breeding, water stagnation, littering and pollution. The Contractor must submit a weekly inspection report for the measures taken to prevent the mosquito /pest breeding from the work site. During the contract period, if additional fogging need to be carried out based on the regulation by the Ministry of the Environment or any other Government agency, the Contractor must comply to the new regulation at their own cost.

All rubbish, debris, etc (including those left by Nominated

Sub-Contractors, Suppliers or Approved Specialist Sub-Contractors) shall be cleared from time to time. In particular, the Contractor shall, at all times, keep all accesses free of debris and other obstructions.

All materials, particularly timber and other combustible

materials, must be properly stored. Fire extinguishers shall be provided by the Contractor for all temporary buildings and at strategic points on the Site.

140

CLEANING UP AND REINSTATEMENT OF WORKS ON COMPLETION

The Contractor shall leave every part of the Works included in this Contract in a clean, sound and perfect condition free

Page 38: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/12

from all flaws, cracks and settlement whatsoever at completion of the Works.

All locks and hinges and other ironmongery shall be greased and oiled and missing keys supplied, etc. The Contractor shall clean down all glass inside and outside with an approved cleaner, clean and polish all floor surfaces, remove mortar droppings, tar spatters and paint droppings on all exposed surfaces, touch up all paintwork and polished work and make good at his own expense all damages to the structure, fittings or decorations resulting from his operations to the satisfaction of the SO.

150

MATERIALS

All materials and fittings shall be in accordance with the latest revised B.S. or S.S. current at the time of tendering. Should no standard be quoted the materials or fittings shall be to the approval and satisfaction of the SO.

160

ORDERING MATERIALS

The Contractor shall place his orders for specified materials at the earliest possible date after notification of acceptance of his tender or at such times as may be specifically stated elsewhere for any particular material. If, in the opinion of the SO the Contractor by his failure to order any specified material, or by his failure to deliver to the Site any specified material within the time stated for same, causes interruption or delay in the progress of the Works, then in either case, the SO may be at liberty to purchase such specified materials in whatever quantities he deems necessary and at the rates current in local markets at the time of purchase and all charges in connection therewith including delivery charges shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deducted from money due or to become due to him under this Contract and neither profit nor extension of time shall be allowed to the Contractor in respect of such items.

170

SAMPLES

Where materials and fittings are specified to be "approved", samples shall be submitted for approval at the earliest

Page 39: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/13

possible date after notification of acceptance of the Contractor's tender and before any order or bulk delivery to the Site is made. All samples which are approved will indicate the minimum standard to be maintained in the execution of the Works and shall be so marked and retained by the SO.

In the case of rejection, further samples shall be submitted

until they are approved. All samples shall be submitted free of cost. The SO may reject any material or workmanship which, in his opinion, is not up to the approved standard. No claim arising there from shall be entertained.

The SO may send the samples to laboratories for testing.

The cost of all samples and transport for tests shall be borne by the Contractor. The Employer will pay for the laboratory fees only if the test results show that the materials tested meet the specified standards.

180

SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT

After the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall not substitute any material, article, product, or equipment specified (hereinafter called the "specified item") in the Contract without the prior written approval of the SO.

If the Contractor wishes to propose a substitution for a

specified item, he shall make a timely written request to the SO, stating the reasons (as supported by documentary evidence) for the request. He shall also provide such drawings, specifications, samples, manufacturer's literature, performance data and test results, and other information as are necessary for the SO to evaluate the proposed substitution completely. Any deviation from or non-compliance with the contract requirements shall be highlighted and brought to the attention of the SO, failing which the Contractor shall be deemed to warrant that the proposed substitute will comply with the contract requirements.

The Contractor shall also submit details of the comparative

prices for the specified item and the substitute to the SO, and indicate the savings accruing to the Employer.

Page 40: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/14

For the avoidance of doubt, the Contractor is bound to provide the specified item under the Contract. The decision whether or not to consider the request for substitution and to accept or reject it is entirely a matter of discretion for the SO and the Employer whose decision shall be final and binding. Any delay or alleged delay on the part of the SO or the Employer in considering the Contractor's request for substitution or in coming to a decision shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of time or additional payment.

190

LIABILITY FOR NUISANCE, ETC.

The Contractor shall bear all risks and responsibilities in carrying out the Works and shall be responsible during the progress of the Works for any damage or disturbance to existing or adjoining properties, or annoyance or nuisance to residents and users of these properties arising out of the execution of the Works.

The Contractor shall be responsible for restricting his

workmen only to the Site of the Works and shall prevent trespass into adjoining properties and existing buildings.

The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all

claims resulting from the above liabilities. 200

MECHANISATION

The Contractor shall allow for the provision of all necessary plant, tools, hoists, materials, labour etc. for the duration of the Contract and shall allow for all labour and material in installing, operating, moving, adapting, maintaining same as necessary and subsequently removing on completion.

The cost of providing, erecting and maintaining all the plant

and equipment etc., the paying of hire fees and the effecting of all necessary insurances pertaining thereto shall be borne by the Contractor.

The location of all major plant shall be submitted for the

approval of the SO in the form of layout plans clearly

Page 41: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/15

indicating the levels, loads and attachments to structure at least two weeks prior to commencement of erection on Site.

210

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

During construction, the Contractor shall maintain accurate records of the Works. This information shall be entered by the Contractor on prints of drawings and supplied to the SO. The drawings to be updated progressively shall show all deviations and changes due to site conditions, variations and other causes to record the Works as constructed or installed. The drawings shall be the as-built record of the Works as finally constructed.

Upon substantial completion of the Works and within one

months, the Contractor shall submit soft copies of the drawings compatible with computer aided design programs or a format to be approved by the SO. The Contractor should also submit the as-built drawings to the SO for verification. Upon verification by the SO, the Contractor shall within one month thereof submit to the SO 4 (four) sets

of the as-built drawings and CD-ROM(s) depicting all aspects of the Works including position of equipment, fittings, accessories, fuseboards, fitted together with wiring diagrams and distribution diagrams.

The as-built drawings shall include the name and address of the Contractor, date, scale, drawing numbers and titles. In addition, the following particulars (including the appropriate logos) shall be printed above the Contractor’s name:-

i) Owner :Ministry of Information, Communications and The Arts

ii) Consultant :CPG Facilities Management Pte Ltd The as-built drawings for reflected ceiling co-ordination and

services co-ordination however shall be submitted to the SO for verification within 30 days upon the completion of the Works. All other requirements for as-built drawings as specified above shall apply equally to the reflected ceiling co-ordination and services co-ordination as-built drawings.

Page 42: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/16

220

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

The Contractor shall submit (4) four sets

of Operation and Maintenance Manual at the time of training. The Manual shall be compiled on paper of A4 size and bound in hard cover and appropriately labeled. Information shall be organized in a neat and concise manner. It shall be properly indexed and contain dividers with tabs between each section. Two (2) draft copies of the Manual shall be submitted as early as practicable and at least 2 months before the training for examination and approval before final issue. One (1) draft copy will be returned to the Contractor with comments within one (1) month of receiving them. If the Operation and Maintenance Manual is found to be inaccurate or inadequate during the execution of the work or one-year defects liability period, the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and furnish supplements. All amendments shall be made and amended copies resubmitted by the Contractor at no cost to the Authority.

The Manual shall be in English Language and include the following:-

General

a) A brief description of the project.

b) A general description of the operation of the project. The Instruction Manuals shall describe the equipment/system as a whole and shall give a step by step procedure for any operation likely to be carried out during the life of the equipment / system, including operation and maintenance.

e) A separate section of the Manual shall be devoted to

each size and type of Plant and/or equipment/system. It shall contain a detailed description of its construction and operation and shall include all relevant pamphlets. Electrical Plant and/or equipment shall be described in operation step by step giving the complete sequence of operation. The detailed sections of the Manual, if necessary, shall contain further maintenance instructions and fault location charts.

Page 43: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (S$)

COLLECTION

PL/17

f) Drawings of single line diagram of the electrical control circuits and all the relevant wiring diagrams shall be included. Every control circuit single line diagram must be accompanied by the circuit description in English

g) Drawings of single line diagram of any electrical

installation to the lift equipment. h) Detailed description of all controls and display and their

functional role in systems operations. i) Procedures which affect system and personnel safety

shall be specifically identified. j) All emergency procedures related to Plant and/or

equipment, power failure, alarm, rescue operation, etc. k) Preventive maintenance schedule to indicate the

inspection required at regular intervals, the inspection procedure, the routine cleaning and lubricating operations, the regular safety checks and similar steps.

l) General trouble-shooting guide to assist maintenance

staff in rapid analysis band correction of malfunctions. Plant and/or Equipment and Spare Part Schedule

m) A complete list of materials, Plant and/or equipment and spare parts showing quantity, location, make, type, rating, addresses and telephone numbers of manufacturers, suppliers and local agents, etc.

230 WSHA AND OHSAS 18001 The Contractor to comply with all the WSHA & OHSAS 18001

Act as per MOM guidelines. Contractor MUST submit Risk Assessment duly signed by all parties as per specimen attached in appendix before commencing of all works at site. The Contractor shall provide any testing documents related to the furniture items specially for fire tests, acoustic qualities, strength and durability of products. All reports should have details on how the test was carried out.

Page 44: Tender Documents

PRELIMINARIES

COLLECTION

PL/18

$ ¢

Page No. PL/1

Page No. PL/2

Page No. PL/3

Page No. PL/4

Page No. PL/5

Page No. PL/6

Page No. PL/7

Page No. PL/8

Page No. PL/9

Page No. PL/10

Page No. PL/11

Page No. PL/12

Page No. PL/13

Page No. PL/14

Page No. PL/15

Page No. PL/16

Page No. PL/17

TOTAL CARRIED TO SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES (A)

Page 45: Tender Documents

PART I OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

Page 46: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/1

Tenderers shall carry out their own site survey and measurement during the tender site show round. The quantities shall be referred to the measurement to be taken during site survey during the tender site shown round. All items in this section are to be priced accordingly and it shall comply with the specifications and drawings. No extra claim shall be entertained. The awarding of optional items is at the sole discretion of the Employer.

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

1.0 PRELIMINARIES FOR THE WHOLE PROJECT (A)

2.0 DEMOLITIONS, ALTERATIONS & EXCAVATION

2.1 To demolish/remove existing unwanted walls,

floors and ceiling finishes; including removing debris off site and make good all works affected as shown in drawing ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

2.2 To remove existing fittings and fixtures;

including removing debris off site and make good all works as shown in drawing ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

2.3 To remove existing electrical wirings, trunkings,

conduits, flexible tubes, LAN points, LAN cables, telephone points, telephone wiring; including all necessary diversion of services, reinstate the damaged items to good working condition, removing debris off site and making good all works disturbed as shown in drawing ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

2.4 Others

All other items which are necessary and required for the execution and completion of the whole works but not specifically list above (if any) (Note : Contractor to provide details)

a._________________________________ b._________________________________ c._________________________________

Page 47: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/2

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

SUB-TOTAL (B)

3.0 BUILDERS’ WORKS

3.1 Wal l a To supply and install new gypsum board

partition; with steel studs, rockwool insulation, gypsum board, anchor bolt; including all other necessary materials and work as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

b To supply and install new frameless full height

tempered glass partition with frosted film for meeting room; including all other necessary materials and work as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

3.2 Others

All other items which are necessary and required for the execution and completion of the whole works but not specifically list above (if any) (Note : Contractor to provide details)

a._________________________________ b._________________________________ c._________________________________

Page 48: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/3

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

SUB-TOTAL (C)

4.0 INTERIOR FURNISHING

4.1 Painting Works a To prepare surfaces including smoothening any

rough surfaces with cement mortar to a smooth furnish, brush down and apply 1 base coat and 2 finishing coat of acrylic emulsion paint to newly erected partitions, walls and existing surfaces for internal walls as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

b To prepare surfaces, brush down and apply 1

base coat and 2 finishing coat of acrylic emulsion paint to new retaining wall as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

4.2 Skirting

To supply and install 100mm(H) x 15mm(Thk) timber skirting securely plugged to walls & partition, scribed to floors and properly mite at angles as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

4.3 Carpet

Supply and install approved environmentally friendly carpet tiles with approved designs and sizes (samples/colours of carpet and mock up for carpet design/pattern are to be submitted for approval), comes with compatible adhesive to floor screed, proper; including cutting to suit all partition layouts and system furniture layout as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction. The Contractor shall take measures to protect all newly lay carpets either carries out in phases or lay before/after the system furniture is installed.

LS $

Page 49: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/4

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

4.4 Others

All other items which are necessary and required for the execution and completion of the whole works but not specifically list above (if any) (Note : Contractor to provide details)

a._________________________________ b._________________________________ c._________________________________

Page 50: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/5

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

SUB-TOTAL (D)

5.0 JOINERY WORKS

5.1 Doors

Supply and install timber door including ironmongery, hardware, conceal door closer, door seal, lockset including all other necessary materials and work as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

a - Type D1 – Single-leaf solid timber door LS $

5.2 Supply and install glass door including ironmongery, door seal, hardware, lockset, floor spring; including all other necessary materials and works as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

b - Type D2 – Single leaf swing frameless

tempered glass door comes with SS ‘D’ pull handle.

LS $

5.3 Customized Furniture

Supply all necessary labour, materials, tools and equipment for the installation of built-in cabinet in selected laminate finish; including all framework, adjustable tracks, fixing accessories, hardware, lockset, ironmongery and all associated works; including all other necessary materials and works as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

a - C1 LS $

b - C2 LS $ c - C3 LS $

d - C4 LS $

e - C5 LS $

5.4 Meeting room table To fabricate and install new veneer wrapped LS $

Page 51: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/6

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

meeting table for capacity of 8 persons, including provision for wire management and access as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

5.5 Master Key System a Supply labour and material for incorporation

and installation of master key system and lockset for all doors as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

b Supply labour and material for incorporation

and installation of key alike and master key system for all system furniture cabinets as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

5.6 Others

All other items which are necessary and required for the execution and completion of the whole works but not specifically list above (if any) (Note : Contractor to provide details)

a._________________________________ b._________________________________ c._________________________________

Page 52: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/7

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

SUB-TOTAL (E)

6.0 SIGNAGES

6.1 Supply, deliver, fabricate and install new

signage/ nameplates for entire renovated area for the following purposes; as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

a - Name plates for all room doors LS $

b - Push and Pull signage for glass door LS $

6.2 Others All other items which are necessary and

required for the execution and completion of the whole works but not specifically list above (if any) (Note : Contractor to provide details)

a._________________________________ b._________________________________ c._________________________________

Page 53: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/8

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

SUB-TOTAL (F)

7.0 AIR-CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION INSTALLATION

7.1 Ductwork and Diffusion Equipment a To supply and install new ductwork complete

with internal insulation, VSD, hanger bracket, insulation, painting and labelling as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

b To relocate existing air-conditioning grillers and

diffusers to suit new layout c/w flexible duct, bracket, supports etc as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

c To supply and install air-conditioning grilles and

diffusers, VCD, bracket supports, control dampers and labelling etc as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

7.2 Mechanical ventilation system a Supply and install mechanical ventilation fan

c/w anti-vibration mounts, flexible connectors and accessories as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

- Exhaust air fans LS $

b Testing and commissioning of completed air-conditioning and mechanical ventilation system to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

7.3 Others

All other items which are necessary and required for the execution and completion of the whole works but not specifically list above (if any) (Note : Contractor to provide details)

a._________________________________ b._________________________________

Page 54: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/9

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

c._________________________________

SUB-TOTAL (G)

8 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

8.1 Distribution boards a Supply all necessary tools, labours, materials

to modify existing DB c/w circuit breakers including all necessary accessories as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

b Supply and install new DBs c/w private meter,

support and all necessary accessories as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

8.2 Distribution sub-mains a Supply and install new sub-mains c/w trunking/

tray and all necessary accessories as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

8.3 Final sub-circuit wiring a Supply and install lighting and power sub-

circuits including cables, trucking/GI conduits and all necessary accessories as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

8.4 Lighting and small power installation a To supply and install 1 lot of new EXIT sign

light c/w new wirings in concealed GI conduit including rewiring works to the existing EXIT sign light as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

b To supply and install lighting dimmer system to

meeting room as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

c To supply and install new power points c/w

wirings, isolators, connector units etc in concealed GI conduit as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

Page 55: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/10

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

d To supply and install TL5 fluorescent light fitting complete with light switches, control accessories etc as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction. (Lumen level to achieve: 500 lux)

LS $

8.5 1-way EVC system a To reuse and relocate the existing 1-way

Emergency voice communication system inclusive of existing and new speakers, GI conduits, cabling, testing and commissioning as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

8.6 LAN system a Supply and install trunking/GI conduit c/w

socket, connectors, cable tray etc as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction. Cabling work will be done by others. Guideline for pricing of conduit: Cat6 cables

LS $

8.7 Telephone system a Supply and install new telephone points c/w

wirings in concealed GI conduit, brackets, faceplates and all necessary accessories to support telephone system from existing block terminal downstream to all workstations, meeting rooms, director rooms etc as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction. Each faceplate shall accommodate 2 telephone points. Costing shall include patching of telephone point.

LS $

8.8 Audio video system a Supply and install complete PVC trunking c/w

ceiling mounted bracket pull wire, junction box (KO box), VGA cables, RG59, speaker cables and accessories including all necessary cabling work as shown in drawings ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

8.9 Service outlet box a Supply and installation of under floor service

outlet box (SOB) c/w under floor cable trunking from the box up and accessories, including twin SSO as shown in drawings ref. and specify to

LS $

Page 56: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/11

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

SO’s satisfaction. Guideline for pricing of conduct: Cat6 cables

8.10 Proper labelling

a Supply all necessary material, tools and labour to label all switch socket outlets, lighting switches, LAN points, Telephone points as shown in drawing ref. And specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

8.11 Others

All other items which are necessary and required for the execution and completion of the whole works but not specifically list above (if any) (Note : Contractor to provide details)

a._________________________________ b._________________________________ c._________________________________

Page 57: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/12

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

SUB-TOTAL (H)

9.0 FIRE PROTECTION SERVICES

9.1 Sprinkler System a Addition and Alteration of existing Ceiling

Sprinkler System including relocation of existing Sprinkler Points, modification of existing Sprinkler Pipe work, provision of royal flush sprinkler c/w new points pipe works and accessories necessary to suit the new office layout, as shown in the drawing ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

b To carry out testing and commissioning of fire

protection services, including drain off and changing of water for the sprinkler system, as shown in the drawing ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

9.2 Portable Fire Extinguishers a To supply and install 4 numbers of 2.0 Kg ABC

dry powder portable fire extinguishers c/w mounting brackets; mounted on wall at 1.2m with hooks, as shown in the drawing ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

9.3 Miscellaneous a Supply & install new Zone Charts (Entrance &

Exit) of silk screen type to replaced existing and also provide for SAP as shown in the drawing ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

b Re-programming of Existing Main Fire Alarm

System at MICA building as shown in the drawing ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

c To label all fire protection system as shown in

the drawing ref. and specify to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

Page 58: Tender Documents

TENDER FOR PROPOSED RENOVATION TO STRATEGIC PLANNING DEPARTMENT LEVEL 5, MINISTRY OF INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND THE ARTS (MICA) BUILDING SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES

SOP/13

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

AMOUNT (S$)

d Provision for 5 numbers of spare concealed

sprinkler points c/w pipe work and necessary materials to complete the work

LS $

e Carry out draining and charging back of water

to sprinkler tank to facilitate sprinkler works (minimum of 2 times), including all necessary labour, tools, liaison with existing contractor etc. to carry out the work to SO’s satisfaction.

LS $

9.4 Others

All other items which are necessary and required for the execution and completion of the whole works but not specifically list above (if any) (Note : Contractor to provide details)

a._________________________________

b._________________________________ c._________________________________

SUB-TOTAL (I)

GRAND TOTAL (A to I) carried forward to Form of Tender

Note: All rates and prices tendered shall be exclusive of Goods and Services Tax (GST)

Page 59: Tender Documents

PART I

OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

LIST OF DEVIATION FROM TENDER SPECIFICATION

Page 60: Tender Documents

LIST OF DEVIATION FROM TENDER SPECIFICATION

LOD/1

The Tenderer is to set out below a tabulated statement showing clearly and in order of the relevant clauses, and deviation from the specification. No other departures will be accepted during the course of the contract unless otherwise approved by the SO in writing.

S/No Section / Page Clause/ Sub-clause (E.g Clause 1, Sub-

clause 1.3) Remarks/ reasons for non-compliance

Page 61: Tender Documents

PART II OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

PUBLIC SECTOR STANDARD CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

WORKS, 2008

SIXTH EDITION DEC 2008

Page 62: Tender Documents

PART II PUBLIC SECTOR STANDARD CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION WORKS, 2008. (SIXTH EDITION) DEC 2008.

COC/1

The Conditions of Contract shall be the Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract for Construction Works, 2008 (6th

Edition Dec 2008) including the Appendix, any option Modules, Particular Conditions (if any) and Amendments thereto.

The Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract for Construction Works, 2008 (6th Edition Dec 2008) is available for viewing at the website http://www.bca.gov.sg. The Tenderer shall satisfy himself on the contents of this document. It shall be deemed that the Tenderer has inspected this document and has taken it into account in his Tender. The Employer shall not entertain any claim arising from the Tenderer’s failure to study this document.

Page 63: Tender Documents

PART II OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

APPENDIX TO STANDARD CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

Page 64: Tender Documents

APP/1

Appendix to the Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract for Construction Works, 2008. (Sixth Edition, Dec 2008).

Clause

OPTION MODULES

1.1(c)

NIL

EMPLOYER

1.1(m)

Government of the Republic of Singapore c/o Ministry of Information, Communication and the Arts

LIMITATION ON THE AUTHORITY OF THE SUPERINTENDING OFFICER

2.1

-

SECURITY DEPOSIT

4.5(1)

0% of Contract Sum

TIME FOR COMPLETION

14.1

Whole of the Works

(Including mobilisation)

6 weeks

Phase or Part of the Works

-

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

16.1

Whole of the Works

$220/- per day

Phase or Part of the Works

-

DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (12 months if none stated)

18.1

12 months from the date of

completion

Page 65: Tender Documents

APP/2

Appendix to the Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract for Construction Works, 2008. (Sixth Edition, Dec 2008).

Clause

VALUATION METHOD

20.1 CPG Fixed Schedule of Rates I, II, III (Version 2008)

20.1(d)

10%

LIMITATIONS ON EXTENT OF LIABILITY FOR ANY ONE ACCIDENT

27.1(1)

(b)

As specified in the

Preliminaries for the Whole Project

PERCENTAGE OF PROFESSIONAL FEES

28.1(1)

-

LISTED MATERIALS AND PERCENTAGE OF INVOICE VALUE Materials, Plant and Goods

32.1(c)

-

MINIMUM AMOUNT FOR INTERIM PAYMENT

32.2(2)

Nil

PERIOD FOR HONOURING CERTIFICATE (21 days if none stated)

32.6

30 days upon receipt of

Contractor’s invoice

RATE OF INTEREST UPON UNPAID SUMS (5% if none stated)

32.6

5%

Page 66: Tender Documents

PART III OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

Page 67: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/1

1 GENERAL ................................................................................................ 2

2 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................... 2

3 PERIOD FOR COMPLETION ........................................................................ 4

4 WORKING HOURS .................................................................................... 4

5 DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO COMPLETE ON TIME .......................................... 4

6 CONTRACT DRAWINGS ............................................................................. 5

7 FORM OF TENDER AND SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES .......................... 5

8 PRELIMINARIES FOR THE WHOLE PROJECT ................................................. 5

9 PROGRAMME AND PROGRESS CHART ......................................................... 6

10 ORDERING MATERIALS ............................................................................. 6

11 ITEMS SPECIFIED BY NAME ........................................................................ 6

12 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................ 7

13 SITE CONSTRAINT AND AVAILABILITY OF SITE .............................................. 7

14 ADEQUATE SITE SUPERVISION ................................................................... 8

15 MEETINGS .............................................................................................. 9

16 WORK METHODS ..................................................................................... 9

17 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND PEOPLE .................................................. 10

18 WATER FOR THE WORKS ........................................................................ 11

19 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER FOR THE WORKS ................................. 11

20 OFFICIAL VISITS ..................................................................................... 12

21 TERM / DIRECT CONTRACTORS EMPLOYED BY THE SO UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS ............................................................................................... 12

22 GENERAL ATTENDANCE ON DIRECT CONTRACTORS AND NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS ........................................................................................... 12

23 PROTECTION OF SUB CONTRACTORS’ / SUPPLIERS’ WORKS ........................ 14

24 STANDARDS ON MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ....................................... 15

25 WARRANTY ........................................................................................... 16

Page 68: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/2

1 GENERAL 1.1 The Ministry of Information, Communications and the Arts (MICA) is going to

carry out a renovation on level five (5) at its MICA Building. Address: Ministry of Information, Communications and the Arts

140 Hill Street Singapore 179369

1.2 The Contractor is advised to acquaint himself with the actual site conditions and allow for any contingency with regard to the means of access and any special site restrictions. The access shall be approved by the SO and the Contractor shall comply with any condition required by the relevant Authority.

2 SCOPE OF WORKS 2.1 The extent of Works shall be as described in the Tender Documents or

reasonably inferred there from. The Contractor shall carefully study the Tender Documents and satisfy himself as to the full extent, character and nature of the Works to be performed under this Contract. The Employer shall not entertain any claim arising form the Contractor’s failure to study these Documents.

2.2 The Scope of Works under this Contract shall include but not be limited to the

following.

2.1.1 Builder’s work 2.1.2 Mechanical and electrical services 2.1.3 Fire protection services

2.3 The Contractor shall supply all labour, transport, equipment, materials and all

else for the proper execution and completion of all works, all in accordance with the Particular Specification, Technical Specification, Conditions of Contract, Particular Conditions of Contract, drawings and to the satisfaction of the SO.

In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singular number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the project.

2.4 The Contractor shall submit all material samples, catalogues, shop drawings

and technical specifications to the SO for approval before commencement of work.

2.5 The Contractor shall carry out all necessary demolition, alteration and

preparation to receive new works including making good of all affected works. The Contractor shall provide all necessary protection to existing finishes of the work site to be free from dust and dirt generated from the Works. The Contractor shall ensure all unfinished surfaces where the partitions are taken out have to be finished with matching wall finishes. The Contractor shall replace all damaged carpet, ceiling finishes and skirting to match existing. The Contractor shall disconnect or diverted all services which come within the area to be demolished to the approval of the Employer. The Contractor shall carry out all necessary tracing of existing services e.g electrical, telephone lines, fire protection, ACMV etc that is necessary to ensure that occupants in other area

Page 69: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/3

of MICA building will not be affected. The Contractor shall execute the work in such a manner as to cause as little inconvenience as possible to other occupants in the building. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements and house rules set out by the Employer.

2.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary materials, works, labour

required to carry out the works including testing and commissioning of all newly installed systems.

2.7 The Contractor shall also be responsible for all applications and submissions to

the relevant authorities for all additions and all alterations to the existing mechanical and electrical works and installations and the responsibilities shall include but not limited to the following:-

(i) Preparation of all necessary submission drawings and documents. (ii) Endorsement by Professional Engineers, Qualified Persons, Licensed

Personnel and Registered Inspectors. (iii) Liaison with the relevant authorities and arranging for inspections.

2.8 Others

2.8.1 Engagement of Professional Engineers, Qualified Person, Licensed Electrical Workers (of appropriate grade) etc and all necessary relevant Authority submissions.

2.8.2 Provision of all necessary documentations and shop drawings including

all necessary submission and compliance to the respective code of practice and regulatory authority for the completion of work under the Contract and to the satisfaction of the SO.

2.8.3 Provision of updated as built drawings, manuals and other operational

information documenting the construction, engineering / technical details, maintenance requirements for the system no later than one (1) month after work completion

2.8.4 Liaison with existing term contractor and all other contractors/suppliers

for the completion of work under the Contract.

2.8.5 All other work and equipment necessary for completing the work under the Contract.

2.8.6 Allow for maintenance stocks of 5% of the materials i.e. carpets, ceiling

boards, etc used during the said works and to be handed over to the SO after defects liability period. The Contractor shall ensure that these maintenance stocks are of the same consistency in respect of type and quality as those installed.

2.8.7 The Contractor shall make good all affected works during the course of

carrying out the construction work of this tender. The Contractor shall carry out proper cleaning up work after Construction work.

2.8.8 Provision of defects liability period of twelve (12) months from the date

of certificate of substantial completion of the whole project.

Page 70: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/4

The general description of the Works mentioned above is only for the guidance of the Contractor and any error or omission shall not constitute a ground for claim by the Contractor. The onus for investigating and ensuring the actual extent and nature of the Works comprised in this Contract prior to the submission of the tender is solely with the Contractor. Any doubts should be clarified with the Superintending Officer (herein known as the SO) before the tender is submitted. No claim arising out of lack of clarity or availability of information will be entertained. Allowance for any or all these provisions shall be made in the tender.

3 PERIOD FOR COMPLETION

The period for the completion of the works shall not exceed six (6)

weeks (including mobilisation) from the date of commencement of works.

4 WORKING HOURS 4.1 The Contractor shall note the normal office working hours. The contractor has

to observe the MICA House Rules (Refer to Appendix E) for any work restriction for the renovation.

4.2 As the renovated area is a standalone building, the Contractor is therefore

allowed to work for all day. In the event that the Contractor has scheduled for 24 hours work, the Contractor has to take note that every personnel/worker does not exceed twelve (12) working hours per day and forty-four (44) hours per week and in accordance to the Ministry of Manpower Regulations.

4.3 The SO reserves the right to restrict or prohibit day work or overtime work

which in the SO's opinion may give rise to security problems or may result in disturbance to the surroundings. The SO shall not be responsible for any claim whatsoever in respect of any delay or cost in connection with such prohibition. The Contractor shall allow in his tender for any and all eventualities arising out of this requirement. Any claim for extra will not be entertained.

4.4 The Contractor is to ensure that work progress should be keep up with the

Work Schedule and all works carried out shall not affect the normal operating of the SO and his staff.

4.5 Contractor has to exercise caution and diligence while working within the

premises. Any kind of damages shall be borne by the Contractor. 5 DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO COMPLETE ON TIME 5.1 It is to be clearly and definitely understood by the Contractor that the period for

completion of the project must be strictly adhered to. The whole of the Works comprised in this Contract together with any minor additional works (if any) that may be ordered by the SO MUST

be fully completed and handed over to the SO strictly within the periods and in the order and manner stipulated by the SO in the Contract.

Page 71: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/5

5.2 Failure to complete the Contract within the stipulated period will render the Contractor liable to pay the SO liquidated and ascertained damages at $220.00/- per day subject to a maximum amount equivalent to the contract sum.

5.3 The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and provisions for all

eventualities in the computation of his tender for strict and unreserved compliance with the foregoing requirements. No claim to the contrary will be entertained or considered by the SO under any circumstances whatsoever. No claim for extension of the contract period will be entertained by the SO except at the absolute discretion of the SO.

6 CONTRACT DRAWINGS 6.1 The drawings referred to in this contract are as listed in the List of Drawing

herein and shall include for all further drawings relating to or in amplification thereof as may be issued by the SO from time to time during the progress of the works.

6.2 Drawings which are indicated as 'for reference only' is given solely for the

Contractor's guidance and the SO shall in no way be responsible for the accuracy, adequacy and trueness of the information supplied.

7 FORM OF TENDER AND SCHEDULE OF BREAKDOWN PRICES 7.1 The Contractor shall provide a true and accurate breakdown cost in the format

as given in the Form of Tender and Schedule of Breakdown Prices. The items in the format are not meant to be exhaustive and the Contractor may propose or add other items if he deems it necessary. The pricing of the breakdown shall be deemed to be on a lump sum basis and shall be used for the purpose of progress payments and valuation of variations, where applicable.

8 PRELIMINARIES FOR THE WHOLE PROJECT 8.1 Payments towards items executed under "Preliminaries for the Whole Project"

shall be made progressively in a manner to be agreed with the SO. 8.2 Generally, a mixture of the following mode of payment for "Preliminaries" items

shall be adopted:-

8.2.1 Items where expenditure is expended according to time shall be based on a "time basis" provided always that the programme of the Works is according to the planned and agreed schedule.

8.2.2 Items where expenditure are expended based on the value of works

shall be paid in proportion to value of works executed in relation to the cost of the Whole Contract.

Page 72: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/6

8.2.3 Items that cannot be valued based on methods above shall accordingly be broken down into its element costs and payment for the item made in accordance to the break-down (for example : The item for temporary buildings could be broken down into the elements of (a) erection (b) maintenance and (c) clearing away upon completion of contract. Upon erection, the cost of erection for the item shall be included in the progress payments). During evaluation of Tenders, the Contractor shall submit breakdown of such items for purposes of payment during the progress of the Works.

9 PROGRAMME AND PROGRESS CHART

9.1 At the time of the tender, the Contractor shall submit to the SO for his

approval a programme showing the order of procedure in which he proposes to carry out the Works including the works of Subcontractors and Suppliers, if any. If at any time after the commencement of works, it should appear to the SO that the actual progress of works does not conform to the approved programme, the Contractor shall produce, at the request of the SO, a revised programme, showing the modifications of the approved programme necessary to ensure the completion of the Works within the time for completion.

10 ORDERING MATERIALS 10.1 The Contractor shall place his orders for specified materials at the earliest

possible date after notification of acceptance of his tender or at such times as may be specifically stated elsewhere for any particular material. If, in the opinion of the SO the Contractor by his failure to order any specified material, or by his failure to deliver to the Site any specified material within the time stated for same, causes interruption or delay in the progress of the Works, then in either case, the SO may be at liberty to purchase such specified materials in whatever quantities he deems necessary and at the rates current in local markets at the time of purchase and all charges in connection therewith including delivery charges shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deducted from money due or to become due to him under this Contract and neither profit nor extension of time shall be allowed to the Contractor in respect of such items.

11 ITEMS SPECIFIED BY NAME 11.1 Where a material, article, product or equipment is specified by trade name,

brand, catalogue reference or manufacturer's name, the Contractor shall use only such material, article, product or equipment as specified. Where a list of alternatives is given in the specification, the Contractor may use any of the listed alternatives.

Page 73: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/7

11.2 Where the phrase "or equal and approved" appears after a material, article, product or equipment specified by trade name, brand, catalogue reference or manufacturer's name, the Contractor may propose substitutes for consideration in his tender submission, together with such drawings, specifications, samples, manufacturer's literature, performance data and test results, and cost proposal and other information as are necessary for the SO to evaluate the proposed substitutes completely.

11.3 If the Contractor did not propose any substitute for the consideration of SO in

his tender, then he shall be bound to provide the listed item. If a substitute proposed by the Contractor is not in compliance with the specifications, his tender may be rejected, unless in his tender submission, he has clearly confirmed that he would provide the listed item should the proposed substitute be found unacceptable.

12 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT 12.1 After the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall not substitute any

material, article, product, or equipment specified (hereinafter called the "specified item") in the Contract without the prior written approval of the SO.

12.2 If the Contractor wishes to propose a substitution for a specified item, he shall

make a timely written request to the SO, stating the reasons (as supported by documentary evidence) for the request. He shall also provide such drawings, specifications, samples, manufacturer's literature, performance data and test results, and other information as are necessary for the SO to evaluate the proposed substitution completely. Any deviation from or non-compliance with the contract requirements shall be highlighted and brought to the attention of the SO, failing which the Contractor shall be deemed to warrant that the proposed substitute will comply with the contract requirements.

12.3 The Contractor shall also submit details of the comparative prices for the

specified item and the substitute to the SO, and indicate the savings accruing to the SO.

12.4 For the avoidance of doubt, the Contractor is bound to provide the specified

item under the Contract. The decision whether or not to consider the request for substitution and to accept or reject it is entirely a matter of discretion for the SO and the SO whose decision shall be final and binding. Any delay or alleged delay on the part of the SO or the SO in considering the Contractor's request for substitution or in coming to a decision shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of time or additional payment.

13 SITE CONSTRAINT AND AVAILABILITY OF SITE 13.1 The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site, have familiarised

himself with site conditions and have understood local conditions and the full extent and character of the Works, the supply of and conditions affecting labour and probable adverse effects of the weather on the general execution of the Contract before tendering, as no claim would be entertained for delays or for additional cost incurred during the progress of the Works, for change of designs or methods of construction because of unforeseen circumstances arising out of the Contractor's lack of knowledge of these conditions.

Page 74: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/8

13.2 The Contractor shall take into account that there may be other contractors, government or statutory bodies working in the same area. He shall ensure that there is no interference with the work of such other contractors, government or statutory bodies working in the area and that his work progresses in a smooth and orderly manner. The Contractor shall carry out and complete the works or any part thereof, in such order and manner as may be agreed to by the SO from time to time.

13.3 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions not to disturb or damage

existing plants, planting beds, concrete kerbs and drains, roads, pavements, wires, cables, pipes, equipment, underground cables, pipes and services, etc. Any damage to such items during the progress of works shall be made good to the satisfaction of the SO at the Contractor's expense or alternatively, the cost of such restoration shall be deducted from any money due to the Contractor under this Contract. The Contractor shall be expected to respond immediately to any disruption of existing services and restoration shall be done promptly (within 2 hours) so as to minimise disruption.

13.4 The Contractor shall ensure that their building materials, equipment and tools

are kept within the designated area as any obstruction to the common areas, fire escape routes, etc. shall be immediately cleared.

13.5 Any heavy drilling, knocking, spray painting, varnishing or other works that are likely to cause annoyance, nuisance and inconvenience to the tenants and users of the building are to be done after office hours (i.e. after 6 pm on weekdays and after 2 pm on Saturdays).

14 ADEQUATE SITE SUPERVISION 14.1 The Contractor shall ensure that adequate supervision of his workers be

provided on site at all time during the progress of the works. He shall appoint at least one (1) experienced and competent site foreman who shall be stationed at the site for efficient supervision and effective execution of the works during the contract period.

14.2 The Contractor shall be held responsible for the safe custody of materials

delivered to the site of himself. 14.3 The Contractor shall bear all risks and responsibilities in carrying out the

Works and shall be responsible during the progress of the Works for any damage or disturbance to existing or adjoining properties, or annoyance or nuisance to residents and users of these properties arising out of the execution of the Works.

14.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for restricting his workmen only to the Site

of the Works and shall prevent trespass into adjoining properties and existing buildings.

14.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all claims resulting from

the above liabilities.

Page 75: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/9

15 MEETINGS 15.1 Site Meeting

15.1.1 Site meetings are to monitor progress, co-ordinate and review

overall status of the Works. The Contractor shall provide all facilities at the site for the purpose of conducting the site meetings between the Contractor and the SO throughout the duration of the works. Site meetings shall be convened weekly or fortnightly as directed by the SO.

15.1.2 The Contractor will be required to attend the same as and when

notified and he shall make available a senior representative with SO to accept and make decisions and to act on his behalf. All site meetings shall be properly recorded by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO.

15.2 Variation Meeting

15.2.1 Variation meetings shall be conducted monthly among the SO, QS

and his representatives and the Contractor throughout the duration of the project. The Contractor shall attend and submit to the SO an up-to-date statement of his variation claims at the variation meetings and the SO shall verify that the Contractor’s claims are in accordance with his written instructions. Variation claims not authorised by the SO in writing have to be resolved promptly at the variation meetings.

15.2.2 The Contractor shall substantiate his claims and give a breakdown of

each items wherever possible, to satisfaction of the SO. 15.3 Technical Meeting

15.3.1 The Contractor shall attend technical meetings to clarify, co-ordinate

and review technical matters. The technical meetings shall be convened weekly or fortnightly as directed by the SO.

15.4 Contractor’s co-ordination Meeting

15.4.1 The Contractor shall conduct his own co-ordination meetings at least

once a week with all sub-contractors and will be responsible for recording and circulating minutes to the SO within three working days of such meetings. He shall also conduct co-ordination meetings for the direct contractors when necessary. The SO, may at his own discretion, attend such meetings.

16 WORK METHODS 16.1 The Contractor shall submit to the SO for his approval the work methods of the

trades as required by the SO to ensure good workmanship. A marking system, where applicable, showing inter alia, the control, grid and level reference lines shall be included in the work methods.

Page 76: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/10

16.2 The Contractor shall also ensure that sub-contractors engaged for each trade shall also comply with the work methods approved by the SO.

16.3 Should it appear to the SO at any time that the work methods proposed by the

Contractor will not ensure good workmanship in the Works, the SO may require the Contractor to make at his own cost and expense such modifications to the original work methods as the SO may consider necessary or appropriate.

16.4 The Contractor shall use and employ only workers who are skilled and capable

of executing the Works in accordance with the work methods approved by the SO.

16.5 Approval by the SO of the Contractor's work methods, revised work methods

or any details and information provided under this clause shall not in any way affect the Contractor's liabilities or obligations under the Contract.

17 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND PEOPLE 17.1 The Contractor shall allow for providing all necessary coverings, barricades,

casings, protection sheets, tarpaulins etc. to protect workpeople, occupants from adjoining property, the public, all existing property, all materials, all completed works and the SO’s property adequately from damage, maintaining and removing on completion and complying with all the directions of the SO.

17.2 The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all prevailing laws

and regulations relating to public and workmen safety now and thereafter in force and shall bear all costs connected with the compliance of the same.

17.3 The Contractor shall also ensure that his own fixed or unfixed materials and

articles are properly protected and allow for any storage, watching, etc which may be required.

17.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the completed works such as wall, ceiling,

floor finishes, etc. are adequately protected when the furniture are delivered. Any damages as a result of his works shall be made good by him to the satisfaction of the SO and at his own cost.

17.5 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid causing any

damage or interruptions to the existing services and properties serving other parts of the SO's premises not included under the phases of work. Should there be any isolation of power or shutdown, it has to be during after office hours or during weekends.

17.6 The Contractor shall provide the SO and his representatives on Site, safety

helmets, safety boots, water-proof coats and hats, umbrellas, protective apparel and any other necessary safety devices.

17.7 Allowance for any or all of these provisions shall be made in the tender. No

claim on account of the above-mentioned requirements shall be entertained by the SO.

Page 77: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/11

18 WATER FOR THE WORKS 18.1 The Contractor shall tap from the main water supply and sub-meter shall be

provided for monitoring purposes. The Contractor shall keep records of daily water consumption and submit to the SO at the end of every week. The SO reserves the right to backcharge the cost of all water consumption by the Contractor, Nominated Sub-Contractors, Suppliers and Approved Specialist Sub-Contractors.

18.2 The Contractor can also maintain a temporary water supply and distribution

system sufficient for the execution of the Works (including the works to be executed by Nominated Sub-Contractors, Suppliers and Approved Specialist Sub-Contractors). The temporary water supply installation shall comply with the requirements of the Public Utilities Board. The Contractor shall alter, adapt, maintain as necessary and remove the installation upon completion of the Works, reinstate all works disturbed to the satisfaction of the SO and the Public Utilities Board and pay all costs, charges and fees in connection therewith.

19 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER FOR THE WORKS 19.1 The Contractor shall make provision of their own power source for temporary

lighting and power. The Contractor is deemed to have examined the site and taken into consideration all prevailing and foreseeable conditions and constraints in the tender price. The Contractor must make sure that all equipment for their temporary power source must not generate any noise.

19.2 The Contractor can also tap from the main power supply and sub-meter shall

be provided for monitoring purposes. The Contractor shall keep records of daily electricity consumption and submit to the SO at the end of every week. The SO reserves the right to backcharge the cost of all electricity consumption by the Contractor, Nominated Sub-Contractors, Suppliers and Approved Specialist Sub-Contractors.

19.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for connections from their power source

for temporary artificial lighting and electric power for the works including that required by subcontractors/Suppliers in accordance-with the current Electricity Regulation and the current edition of the Singapore Standard Code of Practice - Wiring of Electrical equipment of Building. Comply also with all guidelines and requirements from the building License Electrical Worker.

19.4 All electrical installations shall be carried out under the responsibility of

Contractor’s own Licensed Electrical Workers. 19.5 The Contractor shall provide temporary electrical arrangements for distribution

around the Site including that required by subcontractors/ suppliers. 19.6 The Contractor is required to employ a licensed Electrical Contractor to install

and maintain such temporary lighting and electrical power on the Site, and to ensure that they are in accordance with Singapore Standard CP 5/l988 - "Code of Practice for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings" and CP44:1988 - Temporary Electrical Installations for Construction and Building Sites.

Page 78: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/12

19.7 All such supplies of 60A and less shall incorporate a current operated Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (E.L.C.B.) and direct tripping sensitivity of 20/30 mA and tripping time within 0.1 second.

19.8 The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain all necessary temporary

lighting during hours of darkness for construction, safety or other purposes in order to carry out work.

20 OFFICIAL VISITS 20.1 The Contractor's attention is drawn here that, from time to time, official visits

may be conducted on sites to brief visitors about the project. He shall give due allowance for the provision of safety helmets and boots and any other assistance which may be required of him for such official visits.

21 TERM / DIRECT CONTRACTORS EMPLOYED BY THE SO UNDER

SEPARATE CONTRACTS 21.1 The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact that there will be term/ direct

contractors who will be working on site during the construction period. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the work for all the direct contractors as instructed by SO to ensure that the project is completed according to schedule.

21.2 The Contractor shall coordinate and work closely with other Contractors

engaged by the SO during the progress of works. All cost due to the coordination works shall be borne by the Contractor.

21.3 The Contractor shall coordinate and work closely with the Term Contractors /

existing specialist Contractors engaged by the SO for any isolation / shut down of electricity during the progress of works. The Contractor is deemed to include in his tender price the cost of any isolation / shut down of electricity and all other works by the Term Contractors / existing specialist Contractors for smooth and proper execution of his work.

21.4 The Contractor shall liaise closely with the direct contractors on the delivery

and installation timing and details. 21.5 The Contractor shall allow in his tender for any necessary works in affording

facilities and attendance to the term/ direct contractors. 22 GENERAL ATTENDANCE ON DIRECT CONTRACTORS AND NOMINATED

SUB-CONTRACTORS 22.1 The Contractor shall price, where indicated, for providing general attendance

on the Term/Direct Contractors, service department/ companies and others separately engaged by the SO as if they were Nominated Sub-Contractors. Such attendance shall include, where applicable, for the following:- a) All the workers must have prior approval/clearance by the SO. b) Providing free and full use of standing scaffolding. The Contractor shall

Page 79: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/13

give notice to the sub-contractors before he removes/ dismantles any standing scaffolding.

c) Providing temporary lighting, electrical power (1 stage and 3 stage)

including distribution network and water supplies for the Works including that required for the testing and commissioning of the subcontract works. Where testing and commissioning are required to be carried out using the permanent supply, the Contractor shall pay for such power and water usage.

d) Removing rubbish from positions on each floor designated by the

Contractor, including final removal from site. e) Providing all setting out and survey information including giving all

necessary dimensions. f) Providing working space. g) Programming, co-ordinating and organising the sub-contractors' work

to ensure the correct timing, sequencing and completion of all operations including preparing co-ordinated working drawings of all services (i.e. mechanical, electrical, plumbing and sanitary services etc.) to the SO's approval. The drawings shall have sufficient details to enable co-ordination to be carried out and shall include plans, elevations and sections showing locations and levels of all services.

h) Ascertaining all particulars relating to the sub-contract works in regard

to sizes and positions of chases, holes, mortices and the like which are to be formed or left in the structure by the Contractor and making good thereafter.

i) Protecting the sub-contract works which have been completed and

incorporated into the Works.

j) Securing the building and building works in such a manner that the works in progress by sub-contractors are not subject to damage by construction activity such as falling debris or water seepage.

k) Cutting and forming holes, recesses, chases etc. for ductwork, pipes,

conduits, under floor trunkings and fittings through/in ceiling, roofs, structural walls, slabs, beams, columns etc. and making good all works disturbed including filling and sealing gaps etc. to ensure water and air tightness where applicable. Where the holes, recesses, chases etc. are made in fire-rated members, the gaps shall be filled and sealed with fire-stop material of the same fire-rating. The Contractor shall ensure that holes cut through proprietary ceilings and partitions are carried out by or with the permission of the respective specialist contractors. However, the Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for making chases along brickwalls for pipes, conduits and fittings etc. but making good to the walls shall be done by the Contractor.

l) The building-in or casting-in of inserts, bolts, sleeves for pipes, ducts,

trunking, equipment, etc. The sub-contractor shall provide the inserts, bolts, sleeves, suspensions, etc. and will locate for the Contractor the

Page 80: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/14

correct positions for these fittings. The Contractor shall be responsible for marking the locations of any prestressing cables (if any) on the soffits of structural floors, faces of walls etc.

23 PROTECTION OF SUB CONTRACTORS’ / SUPPLIERS’ WORKS 23.1 The Contractor is responsible for the protection and safety of all Sub

Contractor's and supplier's works on site during the period of the construction. The Contractor is to provide adequate and appropriate storage space required for the Sub contractor's and suppliers' works and materials. The Contractor is to allow for access including the use of the Contractor's equipment and power supply to the carrying out of the works by the Sub Contractor and suppliers. The Contractor is responsible for the timely delivery and installation of the works or equipment by the sub contractor/supplier and ensures proper testing and commissioning is carried out to the satisfaction of the SO. The Contractor shall be responsible for all the works or equipment including the installation by the Sub Contractor/suppliers related to the works. The Contractor shall follow all instructions and work statements by the sub contractor/suppliers and he shall engage competent and qualified specialist for the installation of any specialized works. The SO reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to engage specialists to construct or install any works or equipment if the SO deemed that the Contractor is not competent in installing the works.

23.2 Any payment issue pertaining to the Contractor’s sub-contractors/suppliers, the

Contractor has to take full liability for all such pay payment issue. 23.3 Materials and workmanship

As directed, furnish the SO with approved documents to prove that materials are as specified. The documents shall include but not be limited to any or all of the following, such that the authenticity of the materials can be easily ascertained . a) shipping documents b) serial numbers c) warranty certificates In the event that any documents submitted are not

original copies, they shall be duly certified by the originating parties. No information within the documents shall be tampered with, unless it is clearly discernible that the items are not related to the materials specified in the Contract.

Where specific brand and model number are specified, or where alternative brands and model numbers are offered by the Contractor and accepted by the SO, it shall be deemed that the finished products are entirely of original make by the registered manufacturer and fully supported by the Manufacturer's warranty. In the event that any alteration is made to the goods by a local agent or any other intermediary, the approval of the SO shall be sought and the result of the alteration shall be fully supported by the Manufacturer such that the Manufacturer's warranty is maintained.

All references to local or foreign standards and/or Codes of Practice shall be deemed to be inclusive of the latest amendments to these standards and/or Codes of Practice.

Page 81: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/15

Samples of materials shall be submitted to the SO for approval before order is placed with the supplier.

23.4 Precautions against materials and equipment being taken out of site

The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe custody of all materials and equipment delivered to the Site and shall therefore ensure adequate protection and prevention of such materials from being taken out of the Site. The SO will not accept any excuse for materials taken out of the Site by the Contractor, his foreman or other individual even without the knowledge of the Contractor who is deemed to have provided for proper control against such malpractice. If it is established that cement or any other material or equipment is taken out of the construction Site without specific written approval from the SO, this shall be deemed to be an irregularity and inter alias, the right of the Contractor to compensation for price fluctuations for all materials shall lapse.

24 STANDARDS ON MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 24.1 The Contractor shall note the relevant standards (e.g. Codes of Practice,

Singapore Standards and British Standards) that are incorporated to the contract by reference. These standards form the basic requirements that the Contractor shall satisfy in respect to the works that they are applicable.

24.2 In the event of any discrepancies or conflicts between the requirements of the

Specifications and the codes, regulations or standards, the most stringent of the requirement shall govern the works.

24.3 Should no standard be quoted the materials or fittings shall be to the approval

and satisfaction of the SO. 24.4 Where timbers are used as structural members, either permanent or

temporary, the Contractor shall ensure that the requirements as set out in the latest CP 1 (The use of timber in building construction) and (Structural use of timber) published by the Productivity and Standards Board or Spring Singapore are met.

24.5 If the scope of works involves welding of steel members, the Contractor shall

ensure that the requirements as set out in the latest (Use of manual metal-arc welding in the steel building construction) and CP 50 (Safety in welding and cutting and other operations involving the use of heat) published by the Productivity and Standards Board or Spring Singapore are met.

24.6 All demolition works shall be carried out in accordance with the latest CP 11

(Demolition) published by the Productivity and Standards Board or Spring Singapore.

24.7 Where the works necessitate the use of scaffolds, the Contractor shall ensure

that the requirements as set out in the latest CP 14 (Scaffolds) and CP 20 (Suspended scaffolds) published by the Productivity and Standards Board or Spring Singapore are met.

Page 82: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/16

24.8 If the scope of works involves painting, the Contractor shall ensure that the requirements as set out in the latest CP 22 (The painting of buildings) published by the Productivity and Standards Board or Spring Singapore are met.

24.9 While noise is inevitable during the course of works, the Contractor shall

ensure that the requirements as set out in the latest CP 49 (Noise control on construction and demolition sites) published by the Productivity and Standards Board or Spring Singapore are met.

24.10 All plastering works shall be carried out in accordance with the latest CP 56

(Internal plastering) published by the Productivity and Standards Board or PSB are met.

24.11 If the scope of works involves making good to existing building surfaces, the

Contractor shall ensure that the requirements as set out in the latest CP 67 (Cleaning and surface repair of buildings) published by the Productivity and Standards Board or Spring Singapore are met.

24.12 The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements on site safety as set out in

the latest CP 79 (Safety management system for construction worksites) published by the Productivity and Standards Board or Spring Singapore are met.

24.13 As-built drawings shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with the

latest CP 6 (Building drawing) and CP 83 (Construction computer- aided design) published by the Productivity and Standards Board or Spring Singapore are met.

25 WARRANTY 25.1 The Contractor shall provide a one (1) year defects liability period. The

Works to be tendered shall also include supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning and thereafter a Twelve (12) months Warranty & Maintenance Period for the said system free of cost to the Employer. The Tenderer must comply to the Response Time and Down Time during the maintenance of the system during Defects Liability Period. The cost of such maintenance is deemed to be included in the tender price.

25.2 Response Time

The Response Time is the period of time commencing when a fault condition has been reported to the Contractor and finishing when suitably qualified maintenance personnel arrive at the site and start maintenance. The Response Time shall be calculated on a 24 hour basis, and shall include Sundays and Public Holidays. Call-out Time for attending to breakdown of the System shall not exceed one (1) hour

.

25.3 Down Time

The Down Time is the allowable time which commences from the time a fault, breakdown or defects is reported by the Employer or the SO to the Contractor, his supervisor or staff, whether verbally or in writing; or the period of time the

Page 83: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/17

User is deprived of the use of the item, facility, etc.; to the time the said fault, breakdown or defect is fully rectified and the affected item is restored to its normal functioning condition. The Down Time shall not exceed three (3) hours

.

25.4 The Contractor shall provide the following warranties and those specify in the Technical Specifications against all manufacturing faults, improper and poor design, defective materials, components or parts, poor workmanship and performance, etc. All warranties shall commence only after the defects liability period.

a) Painting works (interior) - 1 years b) Carpentry (includes workmanship and finishes) - 1 year c) Partitions (i.e. gypsum partition, phenolic board) - 1 year d) Carpet tiles - 1 year e) M&E equipment and system - 1 year f) Any other product - as provided

25.5 In every case where the Specifications require the Contractor's Specialist to

co-warrant the works or materials to be executed or supplied under the Contract, such Specialist, subject to such other requirements as may be prescribed in the Specifications, may only be employed by the Contractor with the SO's prior written approval, and the SO will approve such employment if the Specialist gives his written undertaking to execute the Deed of Warranty. If such written undertaking is not given, then the Contractor shall appoint an alternative Specialist willing to give the written undertaking. The employment of any Specialist who refuses to give his written undertaking will not be recognised by the SO, and no Specialist may commence any work or supply any materials before his written undertaking is given.

25.6 The SO's prior written approval of such Specialist's employment shall not in

any way affect or diminish the Contractor's contractual obligations to the SO in respect of any work or materials executed or supplied by such Specialist on behalf of the Contractor, and the provisions of this Clause shall not in any way affect or diminish the SO's entitlement to withhold the payment of any sums due to the Contractor by reason of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified.

25.7 Any defective part shall be replaced free of charge during the warranty period.

This warranty shall also apply to parts with life span of less than the warrant period under normal use. Replacement of such parts shall be made free of charge during the warranty, unless due to vandalism as determined by the SO.

25.8 The warranty is to be given by the Contractor to the SO in writing on the SO's

format of Warranty and is to be executed under seal by the Contractor. All costs including stamp fee incurred therein shall be borne by the Contractor.

25.9 Should any of the afore-mentioned defect are determined to be the

Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor shall be required to make good all defects within seven (7) days from the date of notification by the SO.

Page 84: Tender Documents

PART III PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

PS/18

25.10 Rectification shall include inter-alias, supply and delivery of all defective parts and components for repair or replacement, removal and replacement of all defective parts, removal and disposal of all debris, making good generally and testing and adjusting the system to operate satisfactorily, all to the satisfaction of the SO.

25.11 In the event that the Contractor fails to rectify such defect after due notice has

been given by the SO and upon the expiration of the said period of notice or the time period allowed by the SO on the rectification works stipulated above, the SO shall have the right to engage other person(s) or contractor(s) to repair, rectify and make good the defect and the expenses plus 15% administrative charge shall be recovered from the Contractor. Such amount may be deducted from any monies retained, due or payable to the Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor to the SO.

Page 85: Tender Documents

PART III OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

Page 86: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/1

1 GENERAL ................................................................................................ 2

2 DEMOLITION ........................................................................................... 2

3 PARTITION WORKS ................................................................................... 4

4 GLAZING ................................................................................................. 6

5 SUSPENDED CEILING ................................................................................ 8

6 PAINTING WORKS .................................................................................. 12

7 IRONMONGERY ...................................................................................... 17

8 CARPET FLOORING ................................................................................ 19

9 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORKS ........................................................... 21

10 LOOSE FURNITURE AND FITTINGS ............................................................ 27

Page 87: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/2

1 GENERAL 1.1 This section is to be read in conjunction with all other sections contained in these

documents and is deemed to have been taken into consideration by the Contractor for pricing of this contract and the subsequent observance, strict adherence and compliance of the said requirements on this project.

1.2 The Contractor shall be deemed to have read, understood and agreed to comply

duly with the SO's fitting-out guides and procedures. All damages, responsibilities and liabilities arising out of the Contractor's failure to conform to these requirements shall be borne fully by the Contractor to the total exclusion of the SO.

1.3 The SO shall be notified in writing of any inconsistency between existing site

conditions and that as indicated in the drawings and/ or related contract documents. No claims shall be allowed on the ground of ignorance of the existing site conditions.

1.4 The Contractor shall be deemed to have studied the specification and drawings

carefully and has highlighted any discrepancies or inaccuracy prior to the submission of tender. Any cost arising from these discrepancies shall deem to be included in the Contractor’s tender price.

1.5 The Contractor shall check and verify all dimensions on site. Any discrepancies

between dimension from the drawings and those on site shall be reported immediately to the SO.

1.6 In the absence of details or descriptions but where additions or changes are

necessary to complete the Works, the Contractor shall provide the same at no extra cost.

2 DEMOLITION 2.1 The Contractor shall visit the proposed site to establish the extent of the

demolition work, if necessary. The dimensions and sizes indicated herein and on the drawings are only approximate, it is the Contractor’s responsibilities to verify the actual dimensions and sizes on site with the SO.

2.2 The Contractor shall demolish and remove with the prior permission of the SO all

existing obstructions and fixtures made redundant by the renovation works which are within the contract limit and/ or related to the proposed works.

2.3 Demolition is to be carried out in such a manner so as to cause as little

inconvenience as possible to adjoining facilities and the public. The contractor will be held responsible for any such claims that may arise from the disregard of this clause.

Page 88: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/3

2.4 The Contractor should study all tender drawings carefully and it is particularly

imperative for this section of the work that he intends to include in his tender price. He shall allow in his tender for any other cognate items of work not mentioned specifically herein but shown, implied, intended or can otherwise be ascertained from the drawings and is required by the SO. The SO shall entertain no claim on account of this clause.

2.5 The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to avoid any damage to the

remaining parts of the building structure, finishes and fixtures. Not-standing any approval or concurrence given by the SO, all demolition works shall be carried out at his own risk and if any damage should occur in carrying out the works, the Contractor shall make good forthwith or reinstate the same at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the SO. All making good is to be executed with materials and workmanship to match in every respect with the surrounding work is to be properly bonded thereto.

2.6 The Contractor shall prior to the commencement of and after demolition works,

engage qualified personnel approved by the SO to conduct a pre and post condition survey. The pre-condition survey report shall be submitted to the SO prior to commencement of the demolition works, while the post-condition survey report shall be submitted after the demolition works have been completed. The survey reports shall contain labelled photographic records of the structures in proximity to the demolition works. Any cracks appearing on the structures either before or after the demolition works, shall be identified or described in detail in the respective reports.

2.7 The Contractor shall remove, repair or replace any defective work caused by

existing conditions at his own cost should these defects are not reported in the pre and post condition survey.

2.8 The Contractor shall provide all necessary shoring, hoarding, temporary supports,

screens, etc. to ensure safety of the persons and surrounding properties and to the satisfaction of the SO. He shall ensure sufficiency of temporary works for the new and existing works, protection against inclement weather and make good all defects and work disturbed as the works progress. The construction and efficiency of such supports shall be the entire responsibility of the Contractor. Should any subsidence or any damage result from the inadequacy or inefficiency of the shoring or any other support provided, the damage shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense.

2.9 Before commencing the demolition works in any part of the existing facilities, all

electrical, telephone, plumbing, drainage and other services that come within the area of work shall be disconnected, diverted or protected to the approval of the SO.

2.10 Removal of M&E equipment and plumbing fittings such as sanitary wares, pipes,

etc. shall include disconnection, diversion, sealing or plugging, protection, connecting pipes to new fittings, etc

Page 89: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/4

2.11 All surfaces arising from demolition works unless otherwise stated shall be

properly prepared to receive new works including making good all works disturbed and surrounding surface to match existing. The Contractor is deemed to have included all such reinstatement works in the tender prices.

2.12 The Contractor shall propose the methods of demolition. The Contractor shall

submit full proposal, which give details on his method, sequence, tools and equipment before commencement of works on site. These shall include supporting brochures, the level of noise, dust and vibration that would be generated.

2.13 During the course of works, the Contractor shall keep the site of his operations in

as clean and neat conditions as possible. He shall remove all equipment, tools and dispose all residues after the demolition works. He shall leave the entire site of the work in neat and orderly condition.

3 PARTITION WORKS 3.1 The Contractor shall provide all necessary labour, tools, materials and equipment

for the supply and installation of partition and framing system as shown in the drawings.

3.2 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for SO approval prior to work

commencement. 3.3 Proper protections of other completed works on site are to be considered and as

requested by S.O. 3.4 Pipes and conduits should be held securely in position by suitable fixings. Care

should be taken to avoid situations likely to damage any services, e.g. cables and pipes should not be passed through gaps provided to allow for deflection in the adjacent structure, such as over framing at ceiling level. Service holes through thin metal are invariably sharp edged and any cables not in conduit passing through these holes should have protection against insulation damage. Care should also be taken to prevent partition wall fixings perforating or damages services.

3.5 All concealed services should conform to their relevant code of practice and be

tested and accepted before the partition wall is completed. In the case of framed and stud partition walls erected in two (2) stages, the services should be tested prior to the final lining being installed. Access should be provided for maintenance and repair.

3.6 The Contractor shall also be required to form chases, openings and holes for

other trades, and shall be capable of concealing wire/trunking/pipes, etc., as required by the S.O. The Contractor shall also be required to form openings on partitions for M&E Services and provide half-hour fire-rated materials to seal gaps and openings in the acoustic partitions.

Page 90: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/5

3.7 Any alteration or cutting of the partition wall and lining by service installers should

not be allowed to impair the structural stability and performance levels of the partitions walls. The method of sealing around services should be agreed with the partition wall contractor and SO.

3.8 Joints between fire-resistant partition walls and other elements of structure which

serve as a barrier to the passage of fire should be fire stopped using suitable materials. Equally, all openings for service penetrations through partition walls should be fire stopped in order to meet the requirements of the Code of Practice for Fire Precaution in Buildings:2007.

3.9 Where gaps in and around partition walls are required to be closed, they should

effectively sealed in accordance with the SO’s instructions. Care should be taken to ensure the correct materials as specified are used. On completion, check the sealing of all joints, perimeter junctions and services apertures are made.

3.10 The fixings of the partition wall to adjacent construction should be equivalent or

superior to those used in the tests to satisfy the performance requirements given in SS 492:2001. These fixings should be compatible with the materials of the adjacent structure to be joined.

3.11 Drywall partitions

3.11.1 Drywall partition unless otherwise indicated shall consist of 12.5mm thick non-combustible gypsum board on both sides fixed to galvanised steel channel studs with non-rusting concealed self tapping screws and infilled with approved rock wool of minimum density of 60kg/m3 or 80 kg/m3. The overall thickness of the partition shall be approximately 100mm thick.

3.11.2 All partition board shall be vertical laid with abutting edges occurring

over studs flanges. The tapered butt joints shall be filled with ready-mix joint compound, reinforced with joint tape. Screws heads and other depressions shall also be filled with joint compound. Joint compound shall be applied in 3 coats, feathered and finish surface sand smoothen to receive wall finishes as specified.

3.11.3 At all corners where drywall partition meets other walls and at corner

joint, perforated metal angle bead reinforcement fixed with fasteners at 300mm centre, on each side shall be provided as shown in the drawing.

3.11.4 Expansion joints shall be provided at intervals of not more than 7.2m

with plaster sheet stopping angles and plastic or metal casing beads.

3.11.5 Horizontal studs bracing shall be installed wherever vertical studs are cut or the gypsum board is cut for passage of pipes, ducts or other penetrations and anchor horizontal bracing to vertical bracing with sheet metal screws. All door opening shall have double vertical rows of steel studs.

3.11.6 Additional galvanised steel studs and stiffeners shall be provided for

magnetic white board to be mounted to the drywall partition.

Page 91: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/6

3.11.7 All partition perimeters shall be sealed with an approved acoustical sealant. All openings through the gypsum board wall shall be sealed using appropriate materials.

3.11.8 The Contractor shall provide fire-stopping materials and seal up all

openings for pipes, ducts, conduits, cables, etc which pass through any part of an element of structure and / or cavity barrier as defined in the Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Building 1991 to maintain the fire resistance of such elements.

4 GLAZING 4.1 All glass shall be of approved manufacture complying with BS 952 or equivalent.

They shall be of the qualities particularly specified and free from specks, air bubbles, wanes, scratches, air holes and other defects.

4.2 The glass shall be delivered to site in cut or stock sizes and in packages bearing

the manufacturer's name and/or trade mark. The type, quality, thickness of the glass shall be clearly marked on the package.

4.3 The Contractor shall carry out all glazing works as specified and shown in the

drawings including all approved wash leather, neoprene strips, silicone sealants, etc.

4.4 All exposed glass edges shall be ground with carborundum stone and polished. 4.5 Adequate glazing clearances must be allowed. Edges of glass must not be

ripped, shelled or damaged in any way. Glazing with cracks or damages caused by faulty installation, incorrect tolerance, etc., must be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

4.6 All glazing work shall be installed strictly in accordance with BS 6262 and the

manufacturer's instructions. 4.7 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings prior to fabrication to the SO for

approval. No glazing work shall commence until the shop drawing submitted are approved.

4.8 Upon completion, wash and clean all glass to remove all excess grout, dirt, stains

etc. from glass surface to the satisfaction of the SO. 4.9 Tempered glass

4.9.1 Tempered or toughened glass shall be clear or tinted to minimum thicknesses of 12mm thick “Armour-plate” or other approved equivalent glass. It shall be free from any scratches, chips, pinholes and warpage.

4.9.2 All heat-treated (tempered and heat strengthened) glass shall meet

ASTMC 1048 and the following more stringent requirements.

(a) Compression Levels

Page 92: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/7

(i) Heat Strengthened Glass . • Surface Compression - 5,500 psi. Range 4,000 psi

to 7,000 psi for 8mm glass and thinner. • Surface Compression - 6,500 psi. Range 5,000 psi

to 8,000 psi for glass thickness exceeding 8mm. • Edge Compression - 5,000 psi minimum

(ii) Tempered Glass

• Surface Compression - 10,000 psi minimum • Edge Compression - 9,700 psi minimum

(b) Warp, Bow and Surface Conditions

(i) Overall Bow and Warp, when measured in accordance with the procedure listed in ASTMC 1048, shall not exceed 0.79mm per 300mm length.

(ii) Rollerwave Peak to Valley Distortion

• Within the main body - 0.0762mm maximum • Within 267mm of a leading and trailing edge -

0.203mm maximum

(iii) Rollerwave distortion shall run parallel to the width of the entire project. The only exception is when the width dimension exceeds 2,134mm

4.9.3 All tempered glass shall meet ANSI Z97.1, CPSC Standard 16 CFR

1201.

4.10 Glass panel and glass door

4.10.1 The Contractor shall supply and install fixed glass panel including frames, top and bottom concealed stainless steel channel, galvanised brackets, silicone sealants and any other device to complete the system. The fixing details shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction or to need the design requirements.

4.10.2 The glass panel and door shall meet the following specifications:-

a) Glazing units shall be 12mm tempered glass b) Colour, tint is subject to approval. Colour range to include clear,

blue and green tinted.

4.10.3 The glass door shall complete with pull handles, lockset, floor spring, patch fitting and all other necessary accessories.

4.10.4 All fixed glass abutting partition shall be sealed to achieve required

sound proofing (STC -45)

Page 93: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/8

5 SUSPENDED CEILING 5.1 The suspended ceiling shall be installed by a specialist firm approved by the

ceiling manufacturer and the S.O ensuring compliance with design and performance requirements. Set out accurately to give level soffits free from undulations and lipping, with all lines and joints straight and parallel to walls.

5.2 Cut and fit tiles/sheets around recessed light fittings air conditioning diffusers,

sprinkler heads and the like. Form openings for access panels together with additional trimming and framing, etc.

5.3 The Contractor shall submit sample of the ceiling board for approval by the S.O.

Shop drawings detailing the method of fixing, especially at the corners, etc. shall be submitted to the S.O. before any installation is commenced.

5.4 All ceiling board surfaces shall be covered with a protective film or membrane to

prevent damage by staining, abrasion or other injuries during transportation, handling and installation. All components shall be delivered to the site in additional individual protective plastic wrappings

5.5 Co-ordinate installation of ceiling hanger insert in concrete to provide the required

hanger spacing. 5.6 The suspended system shall be an exposed semi-concealed or concealed system

as described and shall comprise inserts (or other approved devices for fixing hangers) hangers and channel suspension system as grid and perimeter trim. Concealed channels shall be galvanised finish.

5.7 Fix suspension ceilings to manufacturer's recommendations, set out accurately to

avoid undulations with straight joint parallel to walls, unless otherwise described. Set out to ensure edge tiles are not less than half width or length. Fix additional hangers and runners around obstructions. Scribe and cut tiles accurately at perimeter and around obstructions. Protect finished ceiling from damaged. Clean exposed surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

5.8 All ceiling boards shall be properly installed and perfectly fitted in position in the

suspension system without bending or forcing the boards/strips into place complete with all necessary screws, clips, fasteners or any other fixing device, power fixing where required and everything else necessary for the proper fixing of the ceiling boards/strips all in accordance with the details as shown on the drawings. All cut edges shall be straight, true and free from blurs.

5.9 All ceiling boards and the suspension system shall be fixed symmetrical from the

centre of each area in the regular pattern or patterns indicated in the drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper and accurate setting out of his work and shall give proper and careful supervision during the carrying out of the installation. All surfaces shall be finished perfectly level.

5.10 All ceiling boards or edge trims at horizontal or vertical surfaces of adjacent

finishes shall be packed and described to match these finishes and conceal gaps and irregular borders and margins.

Page 94: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/9

5.11 All ceiling works which have been completed shall continue to be protected from damage by other trades.

5.12 Any work or material which is damaged in any way shall be taken down and

replaced to the SO’s satisfaction and any work disturbed in consequence must be made good at the Contractor's expense.

5.13 The whole of the suspended ceiling works shall if necessary be touched up and

made good to the complete satisfaction of the SO, at the Contractor's own expenses.

5.14 The Contractor shall also provide all materials or fittings or perform any work

which is obviously necessary to the efficient functioning of the installation or which is generally provided or performed in accordance with accepted trade practice even though such material or work may not be explicitly mentioned in this specification or shown on the drawings.

5.15 Suspension System

5.15.1 The ceiling suspension shall be fastened to the structural soffit/ anchors with a suspension system strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's fixing and installation instructions.

5.15.2 All components to be used for the fixing and installation of the ceiling

shall be heavy duty hot-dipped galvanised steel and shall come complete with all accessories, angle stiffeners, modular carriers, edge trims, rod hangers, primary grid, ceiling grid and the like.

5.15.3 The main tee shall be strengthened with a reinforced bead process to

achieve a load bearing capacity of 25.9 kg/m with mid span deflection not exceeding 1/360 span.

5.15.4 The suspension system shall be cold rolled with a double web

construction from 0.4 mm thick steel strip and hot dip galvanised in accordance to BS 2989 using the Sendzimir process to provide a zinc coating of 180g/m² and a tensile strength of 270 N/m².

5.15.5 The ceiling panels are laid on the grid and hold down by clips on each

side of the panel where necessary.

5.15.6 The fixing of the brackets to the ceiling soffit shall be wall plugs or other approved equivalents.

5.15.7 Capping shall be galvanised in similar manner & pre-coated with a 5μ

epoxy primer and finished with 20μ polyester lacquer.

5.15.8 The perimeter trim shall be 20mm x 20mm x 20mm W-shaped shadow angle. It shall be hot dip galvanised and pre-painted in a similar manner to main tees and cross tees.

5.15.9 The system shall be suspended by 4mm diameter hanger rod,

adjustable quick fit hanger and L bracket in accordance to manufacturer’s detail.

Page 95: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/10

5.15.10 Fixing and Installation

(a) Setting Out

(i) The Contractor shall set out the works with the following objectives:

• To establish the correct ceiling level. • To establish panel centres and joint lines and the

like including the layout at obstructions and in irregular areas.

• To avoid or minimise cutting of ceiling panels • To co-ordinate with and seek approval from the SO

the positions of access panels, luminaries, grilles and other services equipment, fire checks and everything else that affects setting out.

• To establish the location of all battens and other fixing points.

• The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the soffit and other backgrounds are clean and fit to receive suspension systems and perimeter work. Checks shall be made to ensure that any cast-in or otherwise prefixed suspension points are secure and correctly positioned.

(b) Erection

(i) The Contractor shall install the suspended ceiling system

complete and securely fix all components. Comply with the following: -

• Erect suspension system complete with rod hangars, primary grid and ceiling grid

• Provide additional suspension for luminaries, grilles, ducts and other equipment to be supported, including adaptation and span bars and the like where necessary.

• Adapt the system for obstructions, bulkheads and sloping sections

• Fix fire stopping and insulation • Fix all perimeter supports • Fix perimeter and other trim. • Check and adjust as necessary and leave truly level. • To establish the correct ceiling level. • To establish the correct ceiling level. 5.16 Access Panel

Where access panel is required, contractor shall provide for maintenances of the services or other equipments which are mounted above the ceiling.

5.17 Mineral Fiber ceiling (for Open office)

5.17.1 The false ceiling shall be of the type and standard acceptable by the

local authorities. The ceiling materials, system and the installation shall

Page 96: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/11

comply with the relevant local standards and code of practice. The ceiling shall be free of any asbestos and shall be unaffected by moisture.

5.17.2 The installed ceiling shall have a sound transmission class of minimum

STC40 for areas required higher acoustic quality. (Recording Room)

5.17.3 Supply and install ceiling board of 600x600 in size with min. 15 – 18mm thick on 15mm wide grid. The edge profile of the board shall be angled tegular type. The board shall furnish with factory applied latex paint in white colour.

5.17.4 Grid members shall be formed from commercial quality hot dipped

galvanised steel and coated of paint with colour matching the ceiling board.

5.17.5 The minimum light reflectance of ceiling boards LR is 0.85. (tested under

ASTM E 1477)

5.17.6 The false ceiling work shall include all accessories, control joints, end trims, which may not be expressly indicated on the drawings, but which are necessary to provide a total ceiling systems package, which interfaces in a complete manner with the adjacent constructions.

5.17.7 The contractor and supply shall provide 10 years limited warranty for the

materials.

5.18 Fibrous Plaster Ceiling

5.18.1 Fibrous plaster ceiling shall consist of 13 mm thick gypsum plasterboards reinforced with strands of fibreglass at the ratio of 275 gm/m2 for 8 mm thickness and 365 gm/m2

for 13 mm thickness.

5.18.2 Plaster used for stopping shall be specially manufactured plaster or compound developed and approved for such purpose.

5.18.3 Water used in the mixing of plaster gauge and/or wetting down or dry

plaster surfaces shall be clean and fresh.

5.18.4 The labour employed in the erection of fibrous plaster ceiling shall be competent tradesmen.

5.18.5 All nogging, trimming, straightening and packing of studs and ceiling

joists necessary for the application of fibrous plasterglass ceiling shall be provided by the Contractor prior to fixing operations. Ceiling framing shall provide backgrounds for continuous perimeter fixing.

5.18.6 Flush joints, butt joints and the like shall be carefully checked over and

be brought into alignment before stopping is commenced, the joints to be filled with approved bonding compound, taped and to receive the applied finish.

5.18.7 Where scrimming is not applied at the back of the flush joint, the joint

shall be kept open 10 mm to facilitate caulking from face side. The joint

Page 97: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/12

is then filled with plaster compound and trowelled to leave a flush surface in true relationship to the adjacent surface.

5.18.8 The ceiling shall be spray painted with a prime coat and at least 2

finishing coats of polyurethane paint.

5.18.9 Nails shall be galvanized wire nails complying with BS 1202 Part I.

5.18.10 All wall and ceiling finishes to be properly made good around all pipes, brackets, gratings and similar obstructions.

5.18.11 Plaster to be continued into grooves and rebates in timber door frames,

plaster finished against timber or metal windows with slightly coved internal angles.

5.18.12 Cut back all damaged, loose or contaminated plastering and cut out all

large cracks. Undercut all edges and make good to fine cracks with an approved filler trowelled smooth and perfectly level with adjoining surfaces.

5.19 Interfacing with fittings

5.19.1 The Contractor shall allow provision and make all necessary cutting, perforation for the installation of mechanical and electrical fittings and public address sound system. Where necessary, additional reinforcement, trimmers shall be provided to ensure proper installation of air-conditioning diffusers and light fitting

6 PAINTING WORKS 6.1 General

6.1.1 The Contractor shall exercise extra care to avoid any paint stain on corridors, existing properties and completed works etc.

6.1.2 The Contractor is advised to provide necessary and sufficient covering to

avoid any paint stain during painting. All paint stain must be removed immediately within the same day.

6.2 Repainting works/Repairing to painting surfaces

6.2.1 Surface Preparations For Repainting Works

(a) All existing paintwork must be sound. Peeling paint layers must be removed by manual scraping or pressure washing.

(b) Efflorescence (deposited salts) shall be removed by brushing with

bristle brushes and water, or application of acidic proprietary chemicals.

(c) All cracks to receive surface patch repair works

Material specifications

Page 98: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/13

(i) Fast setting cementitious patching mortar for vertical

masonry surfaces (ii) Superior bond and adhesion properties (iii) Compatible with the coefficient of thermal expansion of

concrete (iv) Contains no gypsum or chloride compounds (v) Method of application to follow strictly the manufacturer’s

recommendations

(d) Interfacing cracks wider than 3mm to receive self-adhesive jointing tapes after completion of the surface patch repair (item 1.5) along the crack line.

Material specifications

(i) Fiberglass alkali-resistant mesh fabric (ii) Good bonding (iii) Tensile strength minimum 0.5N/mm

2

(e) Apply 2-coat of approved SS345 emulsion paint (low odour with a pleasant fragrance) for the internal surfaces of blocks.

6.2.2 Surface Preparations For Repainting Works

(a) Mark the area of defective surface to a rectangular shape (b) Cut the boundary of areas to be repaired with diamond cutter

(c) Hack and remove the defective surface with approved tool to the

sound substrate

(d) Clean the affected areas with a stiff brush and water

(e) Form keys on the smooth surfaces

(f) Apply approved bonding agent on the surface in accordance to the Manufacturer Specification/Recommendation

(g) Reinstate the affected areas with approved polymer modified

cement mortar based rendering strictly following the Manufacturer’ Specification/Recommendation to match existing

(h) Followed with general surface preparation

Material specifications

Page 99: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/14

(i) Two-component system repair mortar (ii) Compressive strength at 28 days min 40 N/mm2 and max

55 N/mm2

(iii) Minimum polymer solid content by weight of cement: SBR > 8%, ASC >5%, PAC > 5%, EVA >5%

(iv) Stiffening time < 390 min at 1 N/mm2, < 480 min at 2

N/mm2

(v) Shrinkage at 28d < 0.08%

(vi) Tensile pull-off adhesion strength > 1.5 N/mm2, after 100 cycle weathering (intermittent heating and water spray) the strength shall not vary more then 10%

6.3 Wall Finishes

6.3.1 Materials

(i) General

Paints generally for the works shall be acrylic emulsion paint. The painting works shall include one (1) coat of water borne anti-alkaline acrylic sealer and two finishing coats of water-borne Acrylic emulsion with the following performance:

• Resists the growth of algae and fungi, including bacterial

strains • Highly washable & waterproof • Covers hairline cracks • Good anti-carbonation and alkaline resistance • Odourless/low odour

and high opacity rating paint to internal surfaces not specified to be painted in another paint, unless otherwise indicated.

All paints for priming coats, undercoats and finishing coats used for the work shall be of the same brand and from the same manufacturer.

(ii) Colours

Colours will be selected by the SO and shall be specially mixed or milled as necessary by the manufacturer. No additional payments will be allowed where colours have to be specially milled. Sample chips will be used for purposes of comparison and colours which do not match the samples will be rejected Colours for other materials will be selected from a range of colours supplied by the manufacturer.

(iii) Storage

Page 100: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/15

All materials for painting shall be delivered to Site in the original sealed containers supplied by the manufacturers and shall be carefully stored to minimise exposure to high temperatures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

6.3.2 Workmanship

(i) Commencement of Work

Interior decoration shall not commence before the work of all trades has been substantially completed and the areas concerned thoroughly cleaned out. Clean conditions shall be maintained during interior decoration. All external paintwork shall be executed under dry condition and the surface to be painted shall be dry before the paint is applied. The whole of the interior and exterior surfaces of the building including the ceilings and soffits shall be cleaned down thoroughly and all cracks and blemishes made good prior to the commencement of the painting work.

(ii) Conditions of Base

No paint shall be applied to surfaces structurally or superficially damp and all surfaces shall be free from condensation, dust and any extraneous matter before application. The Contractor shall make good at his own expense any failure or damage to appearance due to the structure of rendered or plastered surfaces rough or damp or otherwise unsuitable.

(iii) Previously Painted Surfaces

Remove all perished, powdered, loose and flaking paint. Water blast, mechanically sand, wire brush, scrape or burn off as necessary. Clean down and prepare all as for new work.

(iv) Protection

Before commencing work adjoining areas which are not to be painted, or which may have been previously painted, shall be adequately protected. Any material which is marked, stained or mechanically damaged shall be cleaned off and made good to the approval of the SO or if in his opinion cleaning and making good is impractical will be completely redecorated.

(v) Removal of Ironmongery

With the exception of butt hinges all ironmongery, etc attached to wood or steel shall be removed before the application of the finish to the body of the work and after completion shall be replaced, eased, adjusted and oiled.

Page 101: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/16

(vi) Inspection and Approval

Prior to painting all surfaces to be painted shall be inspected and approved by the SO. Each coat of paint shall be similarly inspected and approved before proceeding with the next coat.

(vii) Preparation and Finish of Plastered or Skim Coated Surface

Surfaces for painting shall be clean and dry. Any efflorescence shall be removed by first wiping with a dry coarse cloth and then with a damp cloth. The surface shall then be left for forty-eight hours to as certain if further efflorescence occurs and no paint shall be applied until efflorescence has ceased. All new plastered surfaces for emulsion painting shall be cured for a minimum of 28 days.

The surfaces shall be cleaned to remove dust, dirt, plaster splashes, oil, grease and all foreign matters. Cracks and other imperfections shall be cut out and make good with suitable fillers.

Trace and treat all water seepage, sprawling concrete, cracks and anything problems relating to the structures/walls, and such patching work shall be allowed to dry out thoroughly before painting.

After surfaces have been inspected and approved by the SO apply one coat of wall sealer and two coats of emulsion paint. The duration for drying time between the first and second coat must not be less than four hours.

(viii) Preparation and Finish of Mild Steel Surface

All metalwork before fixing shall be thoroughly cleaned down to remove all dirt, grease, scale and rust by wire-brushing, scraping or other means. The surfaces are to be rubbed down.

Paint two undercoats and one finishing coat on all mild steel surfaces exposed to weather.

Paint two coats on all mild steel surfaces of work located internally.

(ix) Preparation and Finish of Galvanised Mild Steel The term galvanised shall apply to hot dip or electrolytic galvanised zinc spray or cadmium plating. Make good any damaged or deteriorated sections of galvanising in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

Degrease all surfaces with lacquer thinner, apply one coat of primer and two coats of finishing coat.

Where exposed to weather, surfaces shall be additionally applied with one top coat.

Page 102: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/17

(x) Preparation of Unprimed Joinery Well sand the surface to bring it to a smooth finish suitable for a high quality finish. Apply knotting to all permissible knots, gum veins and resin streaks. Apply one coat primer and allow drying for not less than six hours and stopping all holes, shakes and splits with hard stopping.

(xi) Fillers shall be Used Where the Grain is Open

After stopping and filling allow priming to dry for not less than eighteen hours. Any shop primed joinery which does not receive the final coat within eight weeks shall be considered unprimed for the purpose of preparation.

(xii) Preparation of Shop Primed Joinery Inspect for imperfect knotting and damaged or inadequate priming, make good and -touch up as necessary. Stop all holes, shakes and splits with hand stopping. Where the grain is sufficiently open fillers shall be used.

(xiii) Preparation of Joinery for Clear Finish

Well sand the surface to bring to a smooth finish suitable for a high quality finish. Stop up any defects with plastic wood of approved manufacture tinted to match colour of timber or stain.

(xiv) Finishes of Joinery

Unpainted joinery and carpentry surfaces shall be stained and or varnished with one of the following methods as instructed at Site:-

(a) Shall be stained with two coats of timber finish and

varnished with two coats of gloss; (b) Shall be varnished with three coats of gloss where required

to have a clear finish; and

(c) Shall be stained with translucent wood stain in minimum three coats.

7 IRONMONGERY 7.1 General

7.1.1 The Contractor is to correlate and co-ordinate the delivery of all

ironmongery items as required and take delivery at Site as and when required including taking delivery of all incidental ironmongery to complete portions of Work.

Page 103: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/18

7.1.2 The ironmongery to be supplied by the Contractor shall be carefully fitted and fixed with screws of the same material or finish as the part to be fixed. All exposed parts of locks shall match the finish of the furniture. All joinery woodwork, or other work which is damaged, spoiled in appearance or weakened shall be removed and entirely renewed at the Contractor's expense. Fittings except butt hinges shall be removed during painting work and afterwards carefully re-fixed.

7.1.3 All ironmongery shall be obtained from an approved supplier list. Samples

of all ironmongery to be used on the Works shall be submitted to the SO for approval and no ironmongery shall be fitted until it has been so approved.

7.1.4 All ironmongery shall wherever possible comply with the following B.S.'s :

(a) 455 : Schedules of sizes for locks and latches in building. (b) 1210 : Wood screws. (c) 1227 : Hinges.

(d) 1228 : Iron, steel and non-ferrous door bolts. (e) 1331 : Builder's hardware for housing. (f) 1494 : Fixing accessories for building purposes. (g) 2088 : Performance test for locks. (h) 2911 : Letter plates.

7.1.5 The ironmongery shall be stainless steel finish and shall include the following fittings:

(a) Hinges (b) Door Closer- Conceal and Exposed (c) handle/long handle with timer grip (d) rose plate, eustachion, etc (e) lock system- with cyclic test (f) key lock system /latch (g) door selector (h) door stopper (i) dust proof socket (j) flush bolt and flush bolt extension (k) cup handles

7.1.6 The door and door fiiting shall be tested for fire rating. Contractor to

provide relevant test certificates. 71.7 The samples shall be provided for review and approval.

7.2 Storage

7.2.1 The Contractor shall take special care to ensure that locks are correctly identifiable for the required keying systems.

7.2.2 The Contractor shall also check that all types of hardware are provided

with screws and other fixing accessories of matching finish to the ironmongery provided.

Page 104: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/19

7.3 Installation

7.3.1 The Contractor shall check all items of ironmongery to ensure that screws and accessories provided are of matching finish to the ironmongery provided.

7.3.2 The Contractor is to fix all ironmongery in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions and is to provide plastic or other approved labels for all keys suitably marked to indicate the door to which the keys operate.

7.3.3 Special tools or templates where specified by the manufacturers are to be

used to prepare doors to receive ironmongery items.

7.3.4 Fittings except butt hinges shall be remove during painting and afterwards carefully re-fixed. All ironmongery shall be adjusted, oiled and left in good working order.

7.3.5 Upon final installation of all locks the Contractor is to hand to the SO

schedule of locks together with their keys set against door numbers. The Contractor shall provide adequate protection, all ironmongeries installed.

8 CARPET FLOORING 8.1 General

8.1.1 The Contractor is to provide floor markings on the flooring pattern design (if any) and to obtain approval from the SO prior to the commencement of the laying of the carpet flooring.

8.1.2 The Contractor shall inspect the floors before the commencement of work

and shall carry out all necessary rectification work to ensure that the conditions will not prevent him from producing good finished work. The Contractor shall not proceed with any carpeting work until such conditions are entirely rectified or corrected. Contractor shall provide self-levelling grout layer prior to receive carpet.

8.1.3 The Contractor is to confirm with the SO on the laying directions of the

carpet flooring.

8.1.4 Where carpet abuts adjacent different flooring surfaces, at the same or different level, approved stainless steel finishing strips with insert shall be used. The Contractor shall provide samples for the type of finishing strips to be used at different floorings and edges for the S.O.'s approval.

8.1.5 The workmanship for the carpeting work shall be of first class quality. It is

essential to ensure that only highly specialised and experienced tradesmen are assigned to carry out the carpeting work. If in the S.O.'s opinion that any tradesmen employed by the Contractor is incompetent to carry out the best quality workmanship, the Contractor shall at once remove such person from the works when so directed by the S.O.

Page 105: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/20

8.1.6 Carpet flooring shall be laid directly, able to hug the floor snugly without the excessive use of adhesive and shall not creep upon laying.

8.2 Setting of Carpet Flooring

It is the responsibility of the installer to verify, before installation, that the material conforms to specifications, including correct product and colour. Labels on each carton contain important information including: product, colour and dye lot. Do not mix tops and bottoms, dye lots, run numbers or print lots in the same area.

8.3 Preparation of Surfaces

8.3.1 Surfaces that are indicated to receive carpeting shall be sound, level, clean, dry and non-slippery, free of holes and cracks, depressions, ridges, oil, grease, wax, dust, dirt, concrete curing compounds or other deleterious substances. Correct deficient surfaces before proceeding with carpeting work.

8.3.2 Adhesive used shall be compatible and to be water based. It has to be

non-flammable and non-toxic.

8.3.3 Carpet in doorways, pivot points, bases of stairways, ramps, inclines and areas subjected to heavy rolling traffic must be fully applied with glue and 100% glue on. Binder bars shall be provided where required.

8.4 Over Concrete

8.4.1 New concrete must be fully cured and primed. 8.4.2 Old concrete must be primed if chemicals were used to remove the old

finish. Remove old floor covering adhesives, paint sealers, grease, oil and other foreign materials.

8.5 Installation

8.5.1 Carpet shall be properly stretched so that all surfaces are smooth, unwrinkled and without twist. Cut edges shall be free of fraying. Matching seams shall be perfectly straight.

8.5.2 Carpet shall be trimmed after stretching and hooking.

8.5.3 Carpet shall be pinched against vertical surfaces behind tack strips.

Tacks, floats, sprouts, shall be removed. Carpet shall be securely attached at edges and openings.

8.5.4 Carpet seams and edges shall not be visible after completion of the

installation.

8.5.5 Cut edges of carpet at fittings, opening cover locations, or any exposed edges shall be coated with approved silicone sealant or other approved method to prevent edge tufts from pulling out.

8.6 Clean Down

Page 106: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/21

8.6.1 Clean up the premises including removal of any loose fibre material. 8.6.2 Protect surrounding finishes and fixture and make good damage caused

by the laying of the new carpet flooring.

8.6.3 Area with completed carpet tile installation will be locked up. If not possible, carpet will be protected with plastic sheet (0.2mm thick) after installation.

8.7 Maintenance procedures

8.7.1 Upon completion of carpet installation, the Contractor shall submit a write-up of maintenance procedures including demonstrations and training to the end user. In addition, the Sub-Contractor shall provide a one time cleaning of the entire carpeted areas together with 6 months supply of carpet maintenance product in accordance with the written maintenance procedures.

8.8 Physical properties of carpet tiles

8.8.1 All carpet tiles shall comply with the following physical properties: -

PRODUCT TYPE Broadloom SURFACE APPEARANCE Textured Patterned Cut and Loop GAUGE (appox.) 1/8 (31.50 rows per 10 cm) PILE WEIGHT (appox.) 37.0 oz. per sq. yd (1255 g/m2) PILE THICKNESS (appox.) .353" (8.97 mm) DYE METHOD Piece Dyed PROTECTIVE TREATMENT

Sentry

DENSITY (appox.) 3,773 WEIGHT DENSITY (appox.)

139,601

BACKING FOUNDATION Composite Foundation FLAMMABILITY ASTM E 648 Class 1 (Glue Down) SMOKE DENSITY ASTM E 662 Less than 450 STATIC PROPENSITY AATCC-134 Under 3.5 KV CRI RATING Severe Traffic

9 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORKS 9.1 General

9.1.1 All joinery work is to be accurately set out, framed and executed in accordance with the drawings and finished in a proper and workmanship manner. All opening sizes and dimensions are to be taken out from site and on drawings. The Contractor is to take all measurements for joinery works at site and not from the drawings for fabrication and installation.

9.1.2 Samples of all materials and fittings intend to be used in the Works shall

be submitted before commencement of work. These samples or any alternative thereof if approved by the SO shall be retained to form the

Page 107: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/22

bases for checking against the actual materials and fittings used in the Works. All samples submitted shall be free of cost.

9.1.3 The Contractor is to submit shop drawings for the entire furniture, clearly

indicating all dimensions, inclusive setting out data, details of the materials, installation accessories, fixing, hard wares, etc. and all other constructional requirements prior to the commencement of all carpentry and joinery works.

9.1.4 All timber and timber veneered plywood as specified are to be of high

quality, suitable for the purpose for which it is intended, well and properly seasoned, of mature growth, free from wormholes, large loose or dead knots or other defects and sawn die square.

9.1.5 All timber shall be seasoned timber and hall has moisture content of 8% to

12%.

9.1.6 All scantlings and board are to be supplied in such lengths, breadths and thickness as may be required. Sawn timber mush holds the full dimensions specified.

9.1.7 All timber shall be stored in a dry place and the moisture content when

delivered appropriately to the use and the location of the work. 9.2 Hardwood

9.2.1 Hardwood shall comply with BS 1186 Part 1: 1971 species shall be chosen for their suitability to requirement.

9.3 Plywood

9.3.1 Plywood is to be of the best grades specified in BS 1455 and are as follows:

(i) Grade 1- for use in its natural state (ii) Grade 2- for use where subsequent painting or similar treatment

is required (iii) Grade 3- for use where the plywood is not normally visible

9.3.2 Bonding agents for plywood are to be one of the following types:

(i) Type 1- phenol formaldehyde resin adhesive classified as weather and boil-proof (w.b.p) in BS 1203

(ii) Type 2- urea formaldehyde resin adhesive classified as moisture and weather resistant (m.r)

9.3.3 Unless otherwise specified, plywood for internal use shall be Grade 2 with

Type 2 adhesive, and plywood for external use shall be Grade 2 and 20mm thick with Type 1 adhesive, the veneer in standard thickness of – 3 ply: 3mm; 5 ply: 9mm; 7 ply: 10mm. Unexposed plywood may be of any finish unless otherwise described.

9.3.4 Plywood should be sound and free from warping and twisting.

Page 108: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/23

9.3.5 Plywood shall be free from manufacturing defects such as defective

bonding pleats, overlaps, blisters and gaps.

9.3.6 All plywood shall be clean, non-oily, non-staining and proofed against the decay.

9.3.7 The contractor shall ascertain that the bonding quality of adhesion

between successive veneers or layers in the plywood conforms to requirements of BS: 1455.

9.3.8 Boards shall be sanded or scraped on both sides equally.

9.3.9 All plywood must be suitably dried after treatment and the plywood must

be protected from moisture and rainwater during delivery and on site. 9.4 Nails and Screws

9.4.1 Nails are to be wire cut type of mild or black rolled steel complying with the requirement of BS 1202 and unless otherwise described shall be ‘bright’ finish.

9.4.2 Woodscrews shall comply with the requirements of BS 1210 and are to be

of sufficient size and adequate for the purpose for which they are required.

9.4.3 Bolts shall be galvanised bolts with galvanised nuts and washers.

9.4.4 Plugs generally shall be patent plugs of approved manufacture and shall be of the recommended size for the location required and are to be of the preformed nylon type.

9.4.5 All metal cleats shall be in stainless steel. For works exposed to weather,

stainless steel bolts, single cleats, etc., is to be used. 9.5 Adhesive

9.5.1 Adhesive shall be of cold setting synthetic resin adhesive complying with BS 1204.

9.5.2 Adhesive shall be of moisture resistant and shall have sufficient bond

strength to hold the material together under dry, warm conditions to cool conditions of service life.

9.5.3 In wet areas, the adhesive is to be able to withstand warm humid

conditions and dry spells.

9.6 Wood Preservatives

Unexposed surfaces of door frames, skirting, backing fillets and similar surfaces shall be treated with one coat of approved preservative before fixing.

9.7 Workmanship

Page 109: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/24

9.7.1 Timber is to be cut out to the required sizes and length as soon as practicable stored dry under cover so that air can circulate freely around.

9.7.2 The whole of the work is to be framed and finished in accordance with the

detailed drawings, wrought where required and fitted with all necessary galvanised mild steel ties, straps, bolts, screws, etc.

9.7.3 The surface of all joinery works shall be finished with fine abrasive paper

unless otherwise directed. Defects due to faulty material or workmanship shall be made good or replaced at the contractor’s expense.

9.7.4 All panel trims to have 45degree metre corners, all edges and corners to

be slightly eased or rounded to minimum 2mm radius.

9.7.5 All joints in skirting, cornices, trim shall be of a single length of timber without joints. In no case, shall trim lengths to be pieced together of short lengths (under 3500mm), except in the case of full height panel trim, which may be made up of no more than 2 lengths of timber.

9.7.6 All drawers shall have nylon stopper and run on drawer slides.

9.8 Defects in Joiner’s Work

Should joints in joiner’s work open or other defects arises due to insufficient seasoned timber or faulty or bad workmanship, such defective joinery shall be removed and replaced with new ones at the contractor’s expense.

9.9 Wood veneer

9.9.1 Veneer samples shall be submitted for approval of the Project Consultant before commencement of works.

9.9.2 Veneers of adjacent panels, doors, etc. shall be matched.

9.9.3 Veneers shall be smooth, tight-cut and full length. When the face consists

of more than one veneer component, the edges shall appear parallel and be edge matched as required. Rotary cut faces may be whole piece or multi-piece with edge joints tight and not sharp colour contracts at the joints.

9.9.4 Veneer shall be book-matched or slab-matched to the SO’s satisfaction.

Panels shall have a timber trim of beech around the edges and veneered over top of this trim on the front surface.

9.10 Plastic laminates

9.10.1 Plastic laminates shall be abrasion resisting synthetic resin bonded and shall be of the standards grade and approved colour and pattern. The laminates shall be fixed with patent adhesives in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

9.10.2 Laminates used shall be 1mm thick and glued with approved adhesive

onto plywood as per specifications.

Page 110: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/25

9.10.3 All laminates are to be from the same batch and shall be laid in the same direction sequence cut from each flinch to ensure perfect matching and consisting in the direction of the grain. No heading joints are permitted and all veneers to be book-matched.

9.10.4 Laminates shall be reasonably matched for colour and shall be free

from knots, worm and beetle holes, splits, dote, glue stains, filling or inlaying or any kind of other defects. No end joints shall be permitted.

9.10.5 All adhesive shall be specially selected for permanent bonding as per

manufacturer’s specifications.

9.10.6 After fixing, exposed edges of sheets shall be planned and left with a smooth bevelled edge.

9.11 Metal works

9.11.1 All stainless steel shall be of high chromium and nickel steels in accordance to American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) stainless steel grade 316. The stainless steel shall contain 18% chromium, 10% nickel and 2% molybdenum. It shall be coated with 86% lead and 14% tin. The stainless steel shall be resistant to acidification of rain and atmospheric corrosion. It shall have a tensile strength of 550 to 700 N/mm2.

9.11.2 All stainless steel shall be factory fabricated to the best standard of

workmanship and under factory supervision and control. They shall be free from defects, impairing strength and durability. All weld shall be stainless steel weld.

9.11.3 All stainless steel bolts used will include heads, nuts and washer.

9.11.4 All stainless steel shall come either in hairline finish or high-polish finish

unless otherwise indicated in the tender drawings. All exposed surfaces shall be free from scratches and other surface blemishes.

9.11.5 Shop drawings of all stainless steel components specify throughout the

areas will have to be submitted before fabrication. 9.12 Hinges

9.12.1 All hinges supplied shall be of the same manufacturer and available in low, medium and high frequency.

9.12.2 Unless otherwise specified, all hinges shall be of stainless steel, button

tip, and full mortise template butt hinges.

9.12.3 All hinges shall be supplied with wood screw for timber doors and machine screw for metal doors.

9.12.4 All hinges supplied for timber doors shall be of both leaves swaged and

for metal doors it shall not be swaged.

9.12.5 Electric hinges shall be supplied with 8 wires.

Page 111: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/26

9.13 Doors

9.13.1 All flush doors shall come with acoustic requirements as subject to the SO’s approval. Dimensions indicated in the drawings or door schedules are for reference only, the Contractor shall verify site constraint and submit shop-drawing for approval by the SO.

9.13.2 Colour/surface and material finishes for the doors are as per specified

in the tender drawings. All doors shall have hardwood ripping around the edges, mitre at intersections and rebated to receive all finishes.

9.13.3 New solid timber door jamb as shown in drawing shall come in selected

finishes and to be secured to brick or concrete surface with holdfast, screwed to reinforced framework of all partitions.

9.13.4 All hinges used shall be of cam-lift type with selection to the SO’s

approval. All door concealed closers and hinges shall operate smoothly on door closing and opening.

9.13.5 All door handles and mortise locksets shall be selected by SO. All

mortise lockset shall come with thumb-turn on the internal side and key-hole on the exterior side. 2 keys shall be provided for each door with master key system for all doors. The master key system should be able to link to existing master system.

9.13.6 Where necessary, the doors shall be provided to meet the fire rating

requirement. The Door Specialist Contractor shall produce Certificate of Conformity issue by relevant Authority upon completion. Labels indicating the hour rating shall be provide on all doors.

9.13.7 Doors with viewing Panels of any size shall come in minimum of 6 to

10mm thickness. The Contractor shall ensure that no condensation will take place in the glazing cavity upon installation of the viewing panels.

9.13.8 Glass doors shall come in minimum 12mm thick tempered clear glass

panel with approved frosted pattern. Frosted film sample and artwork for pattern shall be submitted for SO’s approval before installation. Approved floor spring, pivot, handles and ironmongeries shall be submitted for SO’s selection along with waist-height glass door lock in stainless steel finish.

9.13.9 Sliding Glass doors shall come in minimum 12mm thick tempered clear

glass panel with approved frosted pattern. Frosted film sample and artwork for pattern shall be submitted for SO’s approval before installation. Sliding mechanism shall be submitted for approval along with handles, ironmongeries waist-height glass door hook lock in stainless steel finish.

9.13.10 Fire rated glass doors where specified, shall be provided to meet the

fire rating requirements. The Door Specialist Contractor shall produce certificate of conformity upon completion. Labels indicating hour rating shall be provided on all doors.

Page 112: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/27

9.14 Cabinets

9.14.1 All carpentry work is to be accurately set out, framed and executed in accordance with the drawings and finished in a proper and workmanship manner. All dimensions are to be taken out from site and verify base on dimensions indicated on drawings.

9.14.2 Unless otherwise specified, provide finger edge pull grooved into top,

bottom or vertical edges of drawers or cabinet doors. All built-in joinery, fittings shall also include for the necessary adjustable shelves with adjustable metal supports and all fixing accessories.

9.14.3 All cabinet carcasses shall be finished in selected laminate, veneer or

others. All edging to carcasses shall be in 0.5mm PVC to match Surface laminate. All internal finishes of cabinet/ furniture shall be white polykem finishes unless otherwise stated.

9.14.4 All cabinet if specified shall come with individual key lock, each lock

shall be provided with 2 keys together with a master key system of minimum 1000 combinations.

9.14.5 All full height cabinet as specify inside the drawings shall come with

50mm clearance for top and bottom carcasses to avoid cabinet doors rubbing against ceiling or floor. Minimum 6mm thick frosted tempered glass (if any) shall be incorporated at cabinets at pantry area. Expose surface of all cabinet shall come with matching finishes as per specified inside the drawings.

10 LOOSE FURNITURE AND FITTINGS 10.1 General

10.1.1 All joinery work is to be accurately set out, framed and executed in accordance with the drawings and finished in a proper and workmanship manner. All opening sizes and dimensions are to be taken out from site and on drawings. The Contractor is to take all measurements for joinery works at site and not from the drawings for fabrication and installation.

10.1.2 Samples of all materials and fittings intend to be used in the Works shall

be submitted before commencement of work. These samples or any alternative thereof if approved by the SO shall be retained to form the bases for checking against the actual materials and fittings used in the Works. All samples submitted shall be free of cost.

10.1.3 The Contractor is to submit shop drawings for the entire furniture, clearly

indicating all dimensions, inclusive setting out data, details of the materials, installation accessories, fixing, hard wares, etc. and all other constructional requirements prior to the commencement of all carpentry and joinery works.

10.1.4 All timber and timber veneered plywood as specified are to be of high

quality, suitable for the purpose for which it is intended, well and properly

Page 113: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/28

seasoned, of mature growth, free from wormholes, large loose or dead knots or other defects and sawn die square.

10.1.5 All timber shall be seasoned timber and hall has moisture content of 8% to

12%.

10.1.6 All scantlings and board are to be supplied in such lengths, breadths and thickness as may be required. Sawn timber mush holds the full dimensions specified.

10.1.7 All timber shall be stored in a dry place and the moisture content when

delivered appropriately to the use and the location of the work. 10.2 Hardwood

10.2.1 Hardwood shall comply with BS 1186 Part 1: 1971 species shall be chosen for their suitability to requirement.

10.3 Plywood

10.3.1 Plywood is to be of the best grades specified in BS 1455 and are as follows:

(i) Grade 1- for use in its natural state (ii) Grade 2- for use where subsequent painting or similar treatment

is required (iii) Grade 3- for use where the plywood is not normally visible

10.3.2 Bonding agents for plywood are to be one of the following types:

(i) Type 1- phenol formaldehyde resin adhesive classified as

weather and boil-proof (w.b.p) in BS 1203 (ii) Type 2- urea formaldehyde resin adhesive classified as moisture

and weather resistant (m.r)

10.3.3 Unless otherwise specified, plywood for internal use shall be Grade 2 with Type 2 adhesive, and plywood for external use shall be Grade 2 and 20mm thick with Type 1 adhesive, the veneer in standard thickness of – 3 ply: 3mm; 5 ply: 9mm; 7 ply: 10mm. Unexposed plywood may be of any finish unless otherwise described.

10.3.4 Plywood should be sound and free from warping and twisting.

10.3.5 Plywood shall be free from manufacturing defects such as defective

bonding pleats, overlaps, blisters and gaps.

10.3.6 All plywood shall be clean, non-oily, non-staining and proofed against the decay.

10.3.7 The contractor shall ascertain that the bonding quality of adhesion

between successive veneers or layers in the plywood conforms to requirements of BS: 1455.

10.3.8 Boards shall be sanded or scraped on both sides equally.

Page 114: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/29

10.3.9 All plywood must be suitably dried after treatment and the plywood must

be protected from moisture and rainwater during delivery and on site. 10.4 Nails and Screws

10.4.1 Nails are to be wire cut type of mild or black rolled steel complying with the requirement of BS 1202 and unless otherwise described shall be ‘bright’ finish.

10.4.2 Woodscrews shall comply with the requirements of BS 1210 and are to be

of sufficient size and adequate for the purpose for which they are required.

10.4.3 Bolts shall be galvanised bolts with galvanised nuts and washers.

10.4.4 Plugs generally shall be patent plugs of approved manufacture and shall be of the recommended size for the location required and are to be of the preformed nylon type.

10.4.5 All metal cleats shall be in stainless steel. For works exposed to weather,

stainless steel bolts, single cleats, etc., is to be used. 10.5 Adhesive

10.5.1 Adhesive shall be of cold setting synthetic resin adhesive complying with BS 1204.

10.5.2 Adhesive shall be of moisture resistant and shall have sufficient bond

strength to hold the material together under dry, warm conditions to cool conditions of service life.

10.5.3 In wet areas, the adhesive is to be able to withstand warm humid

conditions and dry spells.

10.6 Wood Preservatives

Unexposed surfaces of door frames, skirting, backing fillets and similar surfaces shall be treated with one coat of approved preservative before fixing.

10.7 Workmanship

10.7.1 Timber is to be cut out to the required sizes and length as soon as practicable stored dry under cover so that air can circulate freely around.

10.7.2 The whole of the work is to be framed and finished in accordance with the

detailed drawings, wrought where required and fitted with all necessary galvanised mild steel ties, straps, bolts, screws, etc.

10.7.3 The surface of all joinery works shall be finished with fine abrasive paper

unless otherwise directed. Defects due to faulty material or workmanship shall be made good or replaced at the contractor’s expense.

10.7.4 All panel trims to have 45degree metre corners, all edges and corners to

be slightly eased or rounded to minimum 2mm radius.

Page 115: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/30

10.7.5 All joints in skirting, cornices, trim shall be of a single length of timber

without joints. In no case, shall trim lengths to be pieced together of short lengths (under 3500mm), except in the case of full height panel trim, which may be made up of no more than 2 lengths of timber.

10.7.6 All drawers shall have nylon stopper and run on drawer slides.

10.8 Defects in Joiner’s Work

Should joints in joiner’s work open or other defects arises due to insufficient seasoned timber or faulty or bad workmanship, such defective joinery shall be removed and replaced with new ones at the contractor’s expense.

10.9 Wood veneer

10.9.1 Veneer samples shall be submitted for approval of the Project Consultant before commencement of works.

10.9.2 Veneers of adjacent panels, doors, etc. shall be matched.

10.9.3 Veneers shall be smooth, tight-cut and full length. When the face consists

of more than one veneer component, the edges shall appear parallel and be edge matched as required. Rotary cut faces may be whole piece or multi-piece with edge joints tight and not sharp colour contracts at the joints.

10.9.4 Veneer shall be book-matched or slab-matched to the SO’s satisfaction.

Panels shall have a timber trim of beech around the edges and veneered over top of this trim on the front surface.

10.10 Plastic laminates

10.10.1 Plastic laminates shall be abrasion resisting synthetic resin bonded and shall be of the standards grade and approved colour and pattern. The laminates shall be fixed with patent adhesives in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

10.10.2 Laminates used shall be 1mm thick and glued with approved adhesive

onto plywood as per specifications.

10.10.3 All laminates are to be from the same batch and shall be laid in the same direction sequence cut from each flinch to ensure perfect matching and consisting in the direction of the grain. No heading joints are permitted and all veneers to be book-matched.

10.10.4 Laminates shall be reasonably matched for colour and shall be free

from knots, worm and beetle holes, splits, dote, glue stains, filling or inlaying or any kind of other defects. No end joints shall be permitted.

10.10.5 All adhesive shall be specially selected for permanent bonding as per

manufacturer’s specifications.

Page 116: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/31

10.10.6 After fixing, exposed edges of sheets shall be planned and left with a smooth bevelled edge.

10.11 Metal works

10.11.1 All stainless steel shall be of high chromium and nickel steels in accordance to American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) stainless steel grade 316. The stainless steel shall contain 18% chromium, 10% nickel and 2% molybdenum. It shall be coated with 86% lead and 14% tin. The stainless steel shall be resistant to acidification of rain and atmospheric corrosion. It shall have a tensile strength of 550 to 700 N/mm2.

10.11.2 All stainless steel shall be factory fabricated to the best standard of

workmanship and under factory supervision and control. They shall be free from defects, impairing strength and durability. All weld shall be stainless steel weld.

10.11.3 All stainless steel bolts used will include heads, nuts and washer.

10.11.4 All stainless steel shall come either in hairline finish or high-polish finish

unless otherwise indicated in the drawings. All exposed surfaces shall be free from scratches and other surface blemishes.

10.11.5 Shop drawings of all stainless steel components specify throughout the

areas will have to be submitted before fabrication. 10.12 Hinges

10.12.1 All hinges supplied shall be of the same manufacturer and available in low, medium and high frequency.

10.12.2 Unless otherwise specified, all hinges shall be of stainless steel, button

tip, and full mortise template butt hinges.

10.12.3 All hinges shall be supplied with wood screw for timber doors and machine screw for metal doors.

10.12.4 All hinges supplied for timber doors shall be of both leaves swaged and

for metal doors it shall not be swaged.

10.12.5 Electric hinges shall be supplied with 8 wires. 10.13 Doors

10.13.1 All hinges used shall be of cam-lift type with selection to the SO’s approval. All door concealed closers and hinges shall operate smoothly on door closing and opening.

10.13.2 All door handles shall be selected by SO.

10.14 Cabinets

Page 117: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/32

10.14.1 All carpentry work is to be accurately set out, framed and executed in accordance with the drawings and finished in a proper and workmanship manner. All dimensions are to be taken out from site and verify base on dimensions indicated on drawings.

10.14.2 Unless otherwise specified, provide finger edge pull grooved into top,

bottom or vertical edges of drawers or cabinet doors. All built-in joinery, fittings shall also include for the necessary adjustable shelves with adjustable metal supports and all fixing accessories.

10.14.3 All cabinet carcasses shall be finished in selected laminate, veneer or

others. All edging to carcasses shall be in 0.5mm PVC to match Surface laminate. All internal finishes of cabinet/ furniture shall be white polykem finishes unless otherwise stated.

10.14.4 All cabinet if specified shall come with individual key lock, each lock

shall be provided with 2 keys together with a master key system of minimum 1000 combinations.

10.14.5 All full height cabinet as specify inside the drawings shall come with

50mm clearance for top and bottom carcasses to avoid cabinet doors rubbing against ceiling or floor. Minimum 6mm thick frosted tempered glass (if any) shall be incorporated at cabinets at pantry area. Expose surface of all cabinet shall come with matching finishes as per specified inside the drawings.

10.15 Tempered Glazing

10.15.1 All glass shall be of approved manufacture complying with BS 952 or equivalent. They shall be of the qualities particularly specified and free from specks, air bubbles, wanes, scratches, air holes and other defects.

10.15.2 The glass shall be delivered to site in cut or stock sizes and in

packages bearing the manufacturer's name and/or trade mark. The type, quality, thickness of the glass shall be clearly marked on the package.

10.15.3 The Contractor shall carry out all glazing works as specified and shown

in the drawings including all approved wash leather, neoprene strips, silicone sealants, etc.

10.15.4 All exposed glass edges shall be ground with carborundum stone and

polished.

10.15.5 Adequate glazing clearances must be allowed. Edges of glass must not be ripped, shelled or damaged in any way. Glazing with cracks or damages caused by faulty installation, incorrect tolerance, etc., must be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

10.15.6 All glazing work shall be installed strictly in accordance with BS 6262

and the manufacturer's instructions.

10.15.7 Samples of all types of glass and mirrors specified or proposed shall be submitted to the SO for approval prior to commencement of glazing

Page 118: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (BUILDING WORKS)

TS(BW)/33

work on site. The Contractor shall indicate where it is proposed to use each sample of glazing, compound and sealant. Each glass sample shall be minimum 200 x 200 mm showing specific visual properties and the range of variation if any, for each of the following types of glass or glazing products:

10.15.8 Samples of all types of glass and mirrors specified or proposed shall be

submitted to the SO for approval prior to commencement of glazing work on site. The Contractor shall indicate where it is proposed to use each sample of glazing, compound and sealant.

Page 119: Tender Documents

PART III

OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(ELECTRICAL SERVICES)

Page 120: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

GENERAL

TS(EW)/1

1.0 LOCAL AUTHORITIES, RULES & REGULATIONS

All electrical works, material and equipment shall comply with the following:

.01 Singapore Standards CP: 5 - Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings.

.02 All relevant Singapore Standards or British Standards Specifications for Equipment.

.03 All relevant clauses of the Singapore Standard CP: 52 - Code of Practice for Automatic Fire Sprinkler System for Electrical Works.

.04 The Electricity Regulations (Public Utilities Act).

.05 The Public Utilities (Electricity Supply) Regulations (Public Utilities Act).

2.0 THE SPECIFICATION

This Specification is intended to set out in general outline the minimum requirements and standards of installation for the various units of equipment and works it covers. Provision set out, or claims made in the successful Tender which are in excess of, or improved upon the basic requirements of the Specification shall unless otherwise determined by the Architect become part of the requirements of the Specification whether or not they are subsequently incorporated in addenda to the Specification.

The Architect shall be the sole judge of what constitutes an improvement upon or exceeds the requirements of the Specification.

The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Drawings (as per Schedule of Drawings) and are intended to be mutually explanatory and complementary to one another. All works and specification called for by one i.e. Specification or drawings even if not by the other shall be fully executed and complied with in total.

Where the statement “approved equivalent” “equivalent” or “to approval” is used in the Specification, it shall mean quality, standard, features or method of installation and construction approved by or to the approval of the Architect and the related Governmental and/or Statutory Authorities which have jurisdiction over the works.

3.0 OBVIOUS WORKS

The Contractor shall provide all material or fittings or perform any work which is obviously necessary to the efficient functioning of the installation, or which is generally provided or performed in accordance with good accepted trade practice even though such material or work may be explicitly mentioned in the Specification.

Page 121: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

GENERAL

TS(EW)/2

4.0 MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP

Unless expressly stated to the contrary, all materials and equipment supplied by the Contractor shall comply with the applicable to the latest Singapore Standards (S.S.) or British Standards (B.S.) Specifications.

Where a standard is referred to, that standard shall be the latest published edition thereof, unless otherwise stated.

All materials and equipment supplied shall be new and of the best type for each particular purpose and of the first quality as regard design, manufacture and performance.

The equipment and materials shall be suitable designed and constructed for safe, proper and continuous operation under all conditions described or implied in this Specification without undue heat, strain, vibration, corrosion or other operating difficulties.

Unless otherwise stated, the equipment and material within the scope of this specification shall be of a standard proven design. Design incorporating components which may be considered prototype in nature will not be accepted.

Equipment and equipment components shall be designed and supported to permit free expansion and contraction without causing excessive strains, distortion or leakage. Parts subject to wear, corrosion or other deterioration, or requiring adjustment, inspection or repair shall be accessible and capable of reasonably convenient removal, replacement and repair. All such parts shall be of suitable material for keeping maintenance to a minimum.

The equipment shall be designed to permit interchange ability of parts and ease of access during inspection, maintenance and repair.

Vibration, noise mechanical and thermal stresses and susceptibility to corrosion and erosion shall not be greater than with similar plant of first class design and workmanship operating under similar conditions. All works shall be carried out in accordance with best engineering practice by experienced tradesmen of appropriate grades to the approval of the Architect.

Where disagreement occur between the Drawings and the Specification or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantities, or higher cost shall be deemed to be included in this Contract.

5.0 SITE CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

All equipment and works installed shall be capable of operating effectively and efficiently under the following site conditions:

Maximum Temperature: 40°C dry bulb 95% RH

Average Temperature: 32°C dry bulb 85% RH

Page 122: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

GENERAL

TS(EW)/3

6.0 NOTICES & TESTS

The Contractor shall obtain, fill in and lodge all applications, notices, etc. as required by an Authority having jurisdiction over the installation and shall obtain all consent necessary for the various works to be executed and shall pay all fees in connection therewith. Contractor shall also be responsible for the application of all testing of all protection equipment, switchboards and other equipment by the supply authorities or other relevant Authorities and shall pay all fees in connection with the tests.

7.0 LICENSING OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

The Contractor shall be responsible for the application, payment of all fees and the obtaining of the licence for the electrical installation from the relevant authority for turn- on of the power supplies. The licensed electrical worker (LEW) under the employ of the Contractor shall be of the appropriate grade for the installation of this Contract. Contractor’s LEW shall be responsible for the control, safety and operation of the whole electrical installation form the time of power supplies turn-on until the installation is handed over to the end of the Maintenance Period. On handing over the installation, the Employer shall arrange for the licence of the installation to be transferred.

The Contractor shall set-up a systematic and safe procedure for progressive turning on of power supplies for testing and commissioning purposes before practical completion. They shall be jointly responsible of the whole electrical installation until it is handed over to the Employer.

8.0 VERMIN PROOFING & CLEANING

On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall check and ensure that all cable entries, openings, core holes etc. are properly sealed with fire rated material and rendered vermin proof. The floors, trenches and surroundings shall be cleaned and mopped, fill with sand and left in a clean, dust-free state on completion.

9.0 SEALING OF RISERDUCTS, FLOOR PENETRATIONS, CABLE ENTRY FOR FIRE STOPPING

The Contractor shall be required to seal all riser ducts, floor or wall penetrations, and other cable entry of the electrical installation for fire stopping material used shall be of the same fire resistance rating as the wall/floor of the penetration. They shall be of dry construction type; of material accepted for electrical installation work and approved by the local authorities as a fire stopping material.

‘DOW CORNING’ 3-6548 Silicone RTV foam or approved equivalent is considered as an acceptable fire stopping seal.

Page 123: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

TS(EW)/4

1.0 TYPE & CONSTRUCTION

Each distribution board shall comply with the relevant B.S. standards and shall be fabricated from 14/16 s.w.g. sheet steel, anodised and finished in grey stove enamel outside to colour 631 of B.S. 381C and matt white inside complete with hinged cover, the free end of which shall be secured by captive knurled thumb screws and chrome-plated lockable handle, gaskets, solid type concealed hinges, detachable end plates fitted top and bottom and external wall fixing lugs arranged to provide a small air gap between the back of the board and the wall.

Distribution board shall be completely enclosed in dust, insect and vermin proof units housing MCB’s, MCCB’s, contactors, electro-tinned busbars, fuses, fuse bases, time switches and carriers and all necessary items of equipment whether specified herein or not, suitable for indoor service in ambient environment as specified elsewhere at maximum continuous rating without exceeding the maximum temperature permitted by the relevant B.S. specification for operation on 400/230 volt 3 phase 50 Hz system with solidly earthed neutral. All distribution boards shall be manufactured to withstand, as a whole, the electrical, mechanical and thermal stress that could be produced by the prospective fault levels at their respective points of application.

Special attention shall be given to insulation and finishes of all items and no linseed oil varnished, fibre or hygroscopic materials shall be used in any position and all components shall have a tropical finish including electro-tinning of non-ferrous parts and vacuum impregnation of operation coils.

Distribution boards shall be slim and compact of proprietary make similar to G.E, Westinghouse or equivalent and shall so far as possible utilise standard sub-base assemblies and frames of standard dimensions in depth, length and height and the front shall present a flush, clean appearance. Additional space shall be allowed in each distribution board for increasing the no. of circuit way specified in the Specification Drawings by at least 20% and suitable blank plates shall be provided for the initial installation.

Each distribution board shall incorporate an integral manually operated incoming moulded case circuit breaker and/or residual current circuit breaker to enable all live parts to be made dead with the switch position at ‘off’ from the front. All live parts shall be suitably shrouded so that there is no possibility of accidental touch when the panel is open. The neutral shall be linked by means of a removable bolted HDHC copper link.

Fuse bases and carriers where used shall be of glazed porcelain or other non-hygroscopic insulate suitable for the reception of HRC fuses and each bank of fuses is to be arranged for easy removal. Fuse carriers shall be so designed that it is impossible for ‘live’ metal parts to be touched when the carrier is being inserted or withdrawn regardless of how it is being held.

Each distribution board shall be complete with a neutral bar of square or rectangular cross section having a two pinch grip screw terminal connections for each single phase way in the board and for conductors larger than 2.5 sq mm cross sectional area, cable sockets or four screw cable clamp pattern terminations shall be used. The neutral bar provided in each distribution board shall have adequate number of terminals.

Page 124: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

TS(EW)/5

Where applicable, all contactors and time switch for lighting control shall be mounted in a separate compartment with removable hinged covers, fixing screws within the same cabinet as the sub-circuits. Protection fuses for the contactors and/or time switch shall be neatly arranged and labelled for easy identification. Similarly, the terminal strips for remote wiring shall be clearly identified.

All contactors, time switches, cable sockets, busbars, insulators, phase colouring, labels and indicating lamps shall be included as shown on the Specification Drawings and as required for satisfactory performance whether stated herein or not all shall comply with the appropriate clauses of this Specification.

Single-line schematic diagrams of the various distribution boards are shown on the Specification Drawings.

A brass earthing terminal shall be provided of size not smaller than O.B.A. for maximum size of incoming cable up to and including 100 amps, and not less than 3.5mm for incoming cables above 100 amps. The earthing terminal shall be provided with brass washers, brass nuts, and cable lug. A brass earthing bar similar to the neutral bar specified above shall be provided and shall be linked to the earthing terminal.

Incoming cable terminals shall be provided at one end of the busbar or busbars, as required, arranged so that it is impossible to cause them to come into contact with one another or with the enclosure. Terminals shall be of the pressure clamp or soldering socket type, and shall be such that all strands of the cable may be securely contained. The phases of the busbars shall be identified by colour PVC sleeves or proper painting.

Each distribution board shall be so arranged that all connections are easily accessible from the front of the board. Adequate space shall be provided for out-going circuit wiring so that the cables will be required to pass between the back of the enclosure and the busbars/circuit breakers. All cables shall be bundled by means of nylon self-locking cables ties and fixed in a neat and systematic manner.

The constructions of the distribution boards shall be such that no cable is subjected to a bend of internal radius less than four times the overall diameter of the cable.

Each distribution board shall be provided with a label of laminated plastic, black, engraved in white with the words: DISTRIBUTION BOARD followed by the reference designation as the case may be in characters at least 6mm high, attached by screws or cemented to the outside of the cover.

A schedule of circuits shall be provided in printed form on paper or card and mounted behind transparent plastic on the inside of the hinged door.

Distribution boards shall be mounted generally at 1500 mm from the centre line to the floor level.

Page 125: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

TS(EW)/6

2.0 MOULDED CASED CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)

Moulded cased circuit breakers (MCCBs) where used shall be in accordance with the relevant clauses specified elsewhere in this Specification.

Moulded cased circuit breakers shall comply fully with B.S. 4752: Part 1 and the case shall be of moulded insulating material of good mechanical strength and non-tracking properties. The tripping mechanism shall be calibrated in compliance with British Standards at the factory and the breaker shall be sealed to prevent tampering.

Moulded cased circuit breakers shall be manual or automatic tripping operation as required. The automatic type shall each incorporate a trip unit to provide overload and short circuit protection. The trip unit for each pole shall provide inverse time delay under overload conditions and instantaneous magnetic tripping for short circuit protection. The trip units in all the circuit breakers shall be interchangeable. Earth fault protection shall be provided where called for in the Specification and Drawings.

The MCCB shall be so designed that when on tripped condition, the circuit breakers cannot be switched on again unless it has been reset by switching to OFF position first. The operation conditions (i.e. ON, OFF or TRIP) of the circuit breaker shall be clearly indicated.

Moulded cased circuit breakers shall be Single Pole (SP), Double Pole (DP) or triple Pole (TP) or four pole (4P) types as required. The construction and operation of the circuit breakers shall be such that if a fault occurs, all the poles of the circuit breakers shall operate simultaneously to isolate and clear the fault efficiently and safely without any possible risk to the operator or to the installation.

Each circuit breaker shall incorporate “trip-free” mechanism to ensure that the breaker cannot be held closed in fault conditions.

The operating mechanism of the circuit breakers shall be hermetically sealed at the factory and all metallic parts associated with the operating mechanism shall be treated against rust and corrosion. The short circuit breaking capacity of the MCCB’s shall not be less than the maximum prospective short circuit current at the point where the MCCB is installed.

The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the selection and provision of the correct type of circuit breakers for protection of the types of circuits involved. The Sub-Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring that the fuses where used in connection with MCCB shall co-ordinate with the circuit breakers to give proper protection and discrimination of the electrical system.

Moulded cased circuit breakers may be used in locations where the short-circuit current exceeds the breaker’s established interrupting ratings provided suitable current limiting fuses are incorporated in the circuit breakers. The ratings of the circuit breakers and fuses must be carefully selected to prevent damage to the circuit breaker and to ensure co-ordination and high short-circuit protection required. The Sub-Contractor must provide the relevant data for review by the Architect before the use of integrally fused MCCB’s.

Page 126: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

TS(EW)/7

MCCBs of frame size 100 Amp and above shall each be provided with extended operating handle with padlock facility.

Residual current circuit breakers (RCCBs) shall be the current operated type, 2 or 4 poles as shown on the Specification Drawings, suitable for operation on 230/400 volt, 50 Hz a.c. system and manufactured to comply with Singapore Standard SS 97. The residual current circuit breakers shall be the high sensitivity type with tripping current as shown on the Specification Drawings and shall be so designed that the tripping action is completely independent of the supply voltage. The enclosure of the breakers shall be fitted moulded from high quality insulating material. The main current carrying contacts of the breakers shall be fitted with anti-weld tips and the trip coil shall be completely encapsulated. A test button shall be provided at each breaker to enable the operation of the breaker to be checked regularly. The residual current circuit breaker shall be capable of withstanding, without damage, the thermal and mechanical stresses to which it is likely to be subjected in the case of a fault occurring on the load side of the point at which it is installed.

Residual current circuit breakers shall be of the type approved by the Power Supply Ltd and evidence of this shall be produced when requested by the Architect.

4.0 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)

Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) shall incorporate a fixed time/current tripping characteristics calibrated in compliance to B.S. 3871 Part 1 at ambient temperature of 40oC. Other features of MCB shall be as specified elsewhere for MCCB. All MCB protecting out-going circuits shall be the automatic type of the correct rupturing capacity and equipped with appropriate overload and short circuit protection to suit the particular applications. The short circuit breaking capacity of the circuit breakers shall not be less than the maximum prospective fault levels at the points where the circuit responsible for selecting and providing the correct type of circuit breakers for the protection of the different types of circuits.

Incoming MCB of distribution boards where the feeders are fitted with Power Supply Ltd’s electricity meters shall be of Type 2 M9 to Power Supply Ltd’s approval.

5.0 FUSES

Fuses where required shall be high rupturing capacity (HRC) cartridge type Cat. 440/AC4 Class “Q” to B.S. 88.

Each cartridge shall incorporate a fuse element of appropriate current rating and fusing factor in order that adequate protection and discrimination is provided to the circuit.

6.0 CONTACTORS

Contactors for lighting control shall be as specified for service contactors elsewhere in this Specification. The contactors shall be of the number of poles and rated current as shown on the Specification Drawings.

Page 127: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

TS(EW)/8

7.0 TIME SWITCHES

Time switches shall be of the quartz stabilised type with seven (7) days twenty-four (24) hours dial to provide facilities as required of time switch control of any selected service.

Each time switch shall comprise of a quartz controlled clock suitable for operation on 230 volt +/- 10%, 50 Hz a.c. supply, a nickel cadmium battery charged by the means supply during normal operation to offer approximately 50 hours running reserve in the event of a mains failure, an analogue face and marking arrow for simple setting and reading, captive push in/push out tappets for setting switching on/off period, override switch, terminal block, a transparent, protective cover, etc.

Contacts for switching on/off the loads shall be made of silver suitably rated to take the connected load.

The time switches shall be similar to MK List No. 5807 or equivalent.

8.0 INCOMING ISOLATING SWITCHES

Isolating switches where called for at the incoming of distribution boards shall be of the MCCB styled similar to Crabtree 82 Series, MK 5500 Series or equivalent manufactured to BS 5419 (Category AC22).

Page 128: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV MAINS & SUB-MAINS DISTRIBUTION

TS(EW)/9

1.0 GENERAL

The works covered in this section is for the supply, installation and connection of LV

mains, sub-main cables and final sub-circuiting as detailed in this section, including all necessary materials, terminations to form a complete installation.

All works to be performed under this section shall be in accordance with the current

edition of Code of Practice, relevant standards and rules & regulations currently in force in Singapore.

The installation of the mains, sub-mains and final sub-circuiting shall be carried out

in accordance with the specified requirements for each type of cable. The cables shall be routed in trunkings or conduits or trays as shown on the Specification

Drawings and/or detailed in this Specification.

The cable routes where shown on the Specification Drawings are for general guidance only and the Contractor shall be responsible to check and ensure the

feasibility of these routes and adequacy of the cable trunkings/trays/conduits by submitting detail dimensional drawings of all items of equipment and make any

necessary modifications/alterations to suit the site conditions and to the satisfaction

of the Architect.

Vertical metal framing/supporting system similar to ‘UNISTRUT’ or equivalent shall be erected in the vertical risers to facilitate installation of cables, cabling trunkings,

trays, ladders, etc. Details of the framing/supporting system shall be submitted to the Architect for review. Also, mock up shall be constructed if required by the

Architect.

Conductors of less than 1.5 mm2 cross-sectional area shall not be used in mains

voltage circuit.

2.0 CABLE CODES

Where applicable, the following abbreviations are cable codes used in this Specification and Drawing:

.01 PVC - Polyvinyl chloride insulated

.02 PVC/PVC - Polyvinyl chloride insulated and polyvinyl

chloride sheathed

3.0 PVC & PVC/PVC CABLES

PVC & PVC/PVC cables and PVC/PVC flexible cords shall be of 450/750 volt grade

comprising high conductivity stranded copper conductors of sizes shown on the Specification Drawings, to BS 6360, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed to SS 79 or

BS 6746 and manufactured to SS 358 for PVC insulated, non-sheathed cables and to IEC 502 for PVC insulated PVC sheathed cables. Insulate colours shall be in

accordance with the current edition of Singapore Standard CP 5: Code of Practice for Electrical Installations.

Page 129: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV MAINS & SUB-MAINS DISTRIBUTION

TS(EW)/10

PVC cables shall be routed in conduits and/or trunkings.

PVC/PVC cables shall be routed at high level on proprietary make horizontal cable

trays or ladders and support system similar to UNISTRUT or equivalent system. All vertical runs including cable to switchboards, etc. shall be secured on cable ladder

system similar to VANTRUNK or equivalent system. For horizontal runs, PVC/PVC cables shall be secured neatly on the cable trays or ladders at close intervals by

means of moulded polythene cleats similar to BICC ‘Telcleat’ or other equivalent whereas claw cleats shall be used for securing vertical cables. Fixing shall be made

with raw bolts or other patent fixing devices of design to be reviewed by the Architect. Details of cables routes, terminations and support system shall be

forwarded to the Architect for review prior to installation.

PVC and PVC/PVC cables shall be terminated in suitable sizes tinned copper compression connector to relevant BS standard requirements.

4.0 ERECTION OF CABLES

Rates for erection of cables shall include the following:

.01 All measuring, marking off and cutting to length.

.02 Temporary sealing of cable ends where necessary and testing of cuts ends

prior to connection.

.03 Supply, delivery and erection of all racks, clamps, saddles, trays, supports, framing systems, bushes and other items required for erection and fixing of

cables including excavation where necessary.

.04 Design, provision, erection and painting of all additional supporting steelwork.

.05 Sheath bonding in the case of single core cables including supply of necessary materials.

.06 Forming of necessary bends, surface fixing at intervals and phase

identification of cores by suitably coloured PVC sleeve.

.07 Sealing of cables in pipes or ducts where called for.

.08 Tests at site on completion including continuity, phasing out and insulation resistance between conductors and sheath employing a 500V ‘Megger’

tester.

In the vertical risers/ducts, all cables passing through floors shall be sealed

effectively with suitable material of two (2) hours fire rating to the approval of Building Authority and the Architect. All cables shall, where they pass through floor or

otherwise in such positions vulnerable to damage by mechanical or other means be protected by short length of steel pipe suitably bushed to prevent abrasion of the

cable.

Page 130: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV MAINS & SUB-MAINS DISTRIBUTION

TS(EW)/11

4.0 JOINTING

The Contractor is to be wholly responsible for the sealing and jointing of all cables

erected and jointed under this Sub-Contract.

Cable sealing and jointing is to be in accordance with the best current practice and of first-class workmanship. Where cable sheaths are used as earth continuity

conductors, glands are to have the necessary contact surfaces or straps to provide a low resistance path under fault conditions.

The cost of all jointing materials for the termination of cables into sealing boxes

attached to equipment supplied under other contracts is to be included in the prices for jointing into these boxes.

A record is to be kept of all joints and terminations made and are to include the

name of the jointer and mate, the date of testing and the weather conditions prevailing. Three copies of this records signed by the Contractor shall be supplied to

the Architect.

Straight joints in any of the cables installed under his Contract will only be permitted

in very exceptional circumstances and only with the Architect’s consent in writing. The cost of such straight joints, if permitted by the Architect, shall be borne by the

Contractor.

5.0 CABLE TRAYS

All cable trays shall be manufactured from perforated epoxy coated

electro-galvanised mild steel of not less than 1.5 mm thickness for tray widths less than 450mm and not less than 2mm thickness for tray widths of 450mm and above.

Copper links of appropriate cross section shall be provided from section to section to maintain earth continuity for cable tray.

Trays shall have upturned flanges on both sides of 20 mm deep for tray widths less

than 450mm and not less than 25mm for tray widths of 450mm and above and shall be complete with all necessary standard long radius bends etc. and fixing brackets

proprietary fabricated from galvanised steel channels etc. or frame system similar to UNISTRUT.

Heavy duty deep flange cable trays shall be joined by specially designed couplings

to provide a strong continuous structure at joints and rigidity.

Trays shall generally be supported by directly bearing onto the top side of the concrete rib construction forming the ceiling and in this event only; a simple and

efficient clamping arrangement to the ribs shall be effected to prevent lateral

displacement of the tray. Unless otherwise stated, the tray shall be supported at not more than 1 meter intervals.

The whole of cable tray installation is to be provided with all necessary proprietary

factory-made bends, risers, reducers, tees, crosses, drop-outs, etc. and any site fabricated items will not be allowed.

Page 131: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV MAINS & SUB-MAINS DISTRIBUTION

TS(EW)/12

6.0 CABLE LADDERS

All cable ladders shall be of heavy duty type manufactured from epoxy coated electro-galvanised mild steel of not less than 2mm thickness similar to BICC

Vantrunk or equivalent.

Cable ladders should have a minimum 120mm high longitudinal side members and minimum 50mm wide rungs with slots of 63mm x 12mm covering the whole length of

the rungs. Each cable ladder shall be in 3m length and supplied complete with coupling sets consisting of fishplates, splinted bolts, nuts and locking washers.

The whole of the cable ladder installation shall be provided with all necessary

proprietary factory-made elbows, risers, reducers, tees, crosses, drop-outs, etc. and any site fabricated items will not be allowed.

Cable ladders shall be supported from roof/sidewall using frame system similar to

UNISTRUT.

16 sq. mm copper jumpers shall be installed from section to section.

7.0 CABLE TRUNKINGS

Cable trunkings shall be manufactured from epoxy coated electro-galvanised mild sheet steel. The thickness of the body and cover shall be in accordance with Table

1 of SS 249.

The trunkings shall be complete as required with standard bolted flanged outlets, blank ends, reducers, outlet bushes, bends, tees, sleeve couplings, intersection four

way boxes and fittings adaptors of the same manufacturer. Bridge pieces to act as cable retainers shall be readily removable, but positive fixing by machine screws for

the covers shall be provided. The inner radius of any bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the minor dimension of rectangular section trunking.

A copper link shall be provided on both sides of every trunking joint to provide earth

continuity.

Trunkings shall be supported adequately by suitable brackets fabricated from galvanised mild steel angles.

Vertical runs of trunkings within electrical riser ducts which pass through floors must

be provided with two (2) hours fire resistant barriers inside and around the trunking. These barriers should consist of fire rated material cut way to enable the cables to

pass through. Similar fire barriers shall be provided for cable trunkings passing

through fire rated walls. Cable retainers shall be provided for all the cable trunkings. The type of cable retainers to be adopted shall be subject to review by the Architect.

Cables for lighting and power circuits shall not be run in the same trunking as the

cables for extra low voltage circuits unless they are segregated effectively by means of a rigidly fixed metal barrier or screen. Wiring for emergency lighting shall be run

Page 132: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV MAINS & SUB-MAINS DISTRIBUTION

TS(EW)/13

exclusively in separate trunkings.

Trunking runs shall be erected complete before any cables drawn in and the number

of cables installed shall be such that a space factor of 45% is not exceeded.

All cut edges shall be anti-rust treated and all trunkings shall be painted with two finishing coats of good quality orange paint or any other colour paints to be advised

later by the Architect.

8.0 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

All conduits, fittings and accessories where run on surface shall be galvanised steel

complying with BS 4568. Conduits shall be screwed and welded Class B and fittings shall be manufactured from steel or malleable cast iron.

UPVC conduits may be used in areas where they are concealed in walls, columns or

floors. However, in cases where part of the conduit system is run on surface and the remaining part run in concealed position, then the entire run of the conduit shall be of

galvanised steel including those parts which are concealed, in order to assure an

electrically continuous system.

UPVC conduits shall be of heavy duty type manufactured to BS 6099 and the accessories shall be manufactured to BS 4607. The system shall be halogen free,

has low smoke density under fire, flame-retardant and impact resistant. Permanent adhesive shall be used for all joints and terminations to provide a rigid watertight

joint. For long conduit runs or where structural/movement is anticipated, a non-hardening adhesive shall be used in conjunction with expansion couplers.

Appropriate bending springs shall be used for bending of UPVC conduits where recommended by the manufacturer.

All GI conduits and accessories shall be painted with one coat of red lead wherever

the exposed galvanised surface has been cut or otherwise damaged including exposed threads and connections after erection.

Conduits shall be properly and tightly screwed into the full depth of box spouts and

butted in sockets between lengths to ensure maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity so that the wiring is continuously and effectively protected

throughout its whole length and is not in anyway under mechanical stress.

The whole of the conduit system shall be electrically continuous throughout and in addition a separate circuit protective conductor shall be provided in all conduits.

Further, all conduits shall be earthed at terminations.

Conduit sizes shall be selected carefully for the number and sizes of cables they are

to contain and conduit shall be arranged with an adequate number of boxes, accessible for the life of the installation so as to allow easy draw in or draw out of

any one or all of the cables at any time and shall not in any circumstances be less than 20 mm diameter and cables drawn in shall not be greater than the appropriate

number permitted in the current edition of Singapore Standard CP 5: Code of Practice for Electrical Installations.

Page 133: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV MAINS & SUB-MAINS DISTRIBUTION

TS(EW)/14

Cables for low voltage circuits shall not be drawn into the same conduit for extra low

voltage systems. In addition, lighting and power final circuits shall be run in separate conduits except, where an adaptable box is employed as a final distribution point, a

number of final circuits may be grouped together in larger conduits between the distribution board and the adaptable box provided that all circuits in one conduit are

of the same phase; in the case of three phase circuits all three phases and neutral of any circuit should be draw into the same conduit. Wiring for emergency lighting shall

be run exclusively in separate conduits.

Where condensation is likely to occur in surface conduits they shall be laid with falls so as to drain off condensed moisture without entry into terminations. Provisions

shall be made where necessary for leading the drainage away from outside walls, ceilings, fittings and accessory boxes and collecting spots and small bore tubing may

be used for this purpose.

The inside surface of all conduits and fittings used in connection therewith shall be smooth and free from signs of corrosion, burrs and all other defects. The ends of

conduits shall be cut square, filed and reamer out after screwing and care shall be taken to ensure removal of cutting oil and metal fillings.

All corners shall be turned by easy bends or sets made cold on bending machines without deformation of the section of the conduit or opening of seams and the inner

radius of any bend shall not be less than 2½ times the outside diameter of the conduit. Where it is impracticable to set the conduit, normal or half normal bends

may be permitted but in no circumstances shall be solid or insertion elbows or ‘tee’ pieces be used in a concealed position.

All switches, socket outlets, accessories and other fittings shall be mounted in

conduit boxes of suitable size and where for reasons of construction the box face is not reasonably flush to the finished surface of wall or ceiling, purpose made

extension rings of the same construction and diameter as the box shall be employed.

When conduit terminates at a metal base, distribution board, adaptable box, motor starter, terminal box or other fitting not provided with screwed E.T. conduit entry, a

socket shall be screwed to the end of the conduit and a smooth bore male brass bush screwed into the socket entered from inside the metal case which shall be

drilled with a clearance hole for the bush. The end of the conduit should butt together with the bush after the bush has been pulled up tightly against the inside of

the case.

Where looping junction boxes are used for lighting points, outlets, etc. they shall be circular pattern with an appropriate number of back outlets. Conduits shall be

terminated in these boxes by means of screwed sockets and male brass bushes as specified above. Ceiling boxes shall be standard circular deep pattern with long

internally tapped spouts.

Conduit terminations to apparatus subject to vibration or movement shall be made

off in flexible metallic conduit which shall be heavy gauge, weatherproof type PVC coated overall and sweated into heavy brass adaptors with a male thread for

connection to the rigid conduit system at each end.

Page 134: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV MAINS & SUB-MAINS DISTRIBUTION

TS(EW)/15

Reliance shall not be placed upon the flexible tubing as an earth conductor and bare

tinned flexible copper wire of not less than 1.5mm2 shall be run inside and connected

to the equipment earth terminal at one end and isolating switch earth terminal at the

other end.

All boxes shall be fixed securely to walls, ceilings, etc., by means of at least two screws correctly spaced and all conduit runs shall be straight and run either

horizontally or vertically; diagonal runs will not be permitted.

Conduit work and accessories where not concealed shall be fixed effectively by means of heavy pattern spacing saddles to hold off the conduit from the surface.

Metal or other non-disintegrable plug of proprietary manufacture shall be used for fixings.

On straight runs the conduit shall be supported by saddles at intervals not exceeding

900 mm in addition to supports provided by structure, box or fitting included in the run except that for 32 mm conduit and larger, saddles may be spaced at intervals of

not more than 1200 mm apart.

Bends must in all cases be supported on each side by two saddles as near thereto

as possible and a draw-in box shall be provided after two bends and after not more than each nine (9) metre of straight run.

Where conduits are or may be in contact with steelwork of any description an

efficient and permanent metallic bond shall be made between conduit and steelwork.

Where conduits cross expansion joints they shall be installed so as not to resist relative movement of the sections.

Immediately on completion of erection of any conduit during building construction, all

exposed conduits and boxes shall be plugged effectively against the ingress of water and dirt particularly where concrete will be poured. Such seals shall be maintained

in good order for such time as is necessary to complete wiring and connection of fittings and switches.

On completion of erection, the conduits will be inspected by the Architect and may

be tested at his discretion by ball or plug gauge before any wire is drawn in. All conduits shall be swabbed out and free from moisture to the Architect’s satisfaction

before wiring is commenced; draw in tapes with absorbent cloth, such as winceyette, flannel or army pull through cloth, shall be used for this purpose.

On completion of the installation, all exposed conduits shall be painted with two

coats of good orange paint or any other colour paints which may be advised later by the Architect.

9.0 FIXINGS

Necessary fixings for all fittings, switches, socket outlets, cables, cable trays, cable trunkings, etc. shall be supplied and erected under this Contract as follows:

.01 In woodwork by appropriate size of woodscrew.

Page 135: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LV MAINS & SUB-MAINS DISTRIBUTION

TS(EW)/16

.02 In brickwork or concrete by appropriate size non-shrinkable raw plug and galvanised round head wood screw.

.03 On steel work by proprietary made galvanised girder clip.

No drilling of structural steel work will be permitted except as reviewed by the

Architect.

Page 136: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LIGHTING LUMINAIRES

TS(EW)/17

1.0 GENERAL

The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install and connect all lighting fittings, as indicated in the drawings. All light fittings and types are shown in the layout drawings and alternative offers of equivalent light fittings will be considered provided the offer conforms to the types as listed and to the Architect/Interior Designer/M & E Engineer’s requirements.

2.0 POSITION OF LIGHT FITTINGS

The light fittings shall be finally position in the ceiling in accordance with the ceiling tile layout and size, with the relative position and size of other services, structural beams or other obstructions which may have an effect on the light fittings position. The drawings’ layout is approximate and indicative only. The Sub-Contractor shall co-ordinate with the other Contractors to ensure that all the light fittings and outlets are located in accordance with the relative positions of the other services and architectural layout mentioned above. Any further works necessary due to this requirement shall be at the Sub-Contractor’s cost.

3.0 GUARANTEE OF LIGHT FITTINGS

All materials and accessories supplied shall be guaranteed for a period up to the end of the maintenance period. No charge shall be made for any work performed as a result of failure to fulfil the guarantee. Manufacturer’s standard guarantee shall apply to all lamps supplied with the fittings.

4.0 SWITCHES

Light switches shall conform to BS 3676 rated at 5 Amp or 20 Amp as appropriate. Generally light switches shall be mounted at 1.425m above finished floor level and grouped. The location of switches in the drawings is indicative only. The final location shall be determined after due consideration of size and opening direction of doors, other services, etc are taken into account. Light switches shall not be placed at the junction of difference finishes or on demountable partitions. It is the responsibility of the Sub-Contractor to check these details.

5.0 TERMINATION OF LIGHTING POINTS

Each surface mounted light fitting shall terminate at a B.S. junction box or ceiling rose complete with porcelain connectors to be made at that point and the wiring required connecting the specified fittings. All lighting points and switches shall be earthed with its appropriate earth continuity conductor unless they are of the all-insulated type construction.

Page 137: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LIGHTING LUMINAIRES

TS(EW)/18

6.0 FLUORESCENT LIGHT FITTINGS

Fluorescent lighting fittings shall comply with the following:

.01 Standards

The fluorescent fittings together with the lamp, lamp holders, switches and other necessary equipment shall conform to Singapore Standard SS 24 and the latest British Standards in all respects with regard to design, construction, performance, etc as a minimum requirement and shall be of SISIR approved type.

.02 Voltage Grade

All equipment shall be suitable for operation at 230 volt single phase, 50 Hz supply.

.03 Metal Housing & Reflectors

The housing and reflectors shall be manufactured by approved light fittings manufacturers. The reflectors shall be of one piece construction made from quality mild steel sheet of 22 gauges and the main housing shall be of 20 gauges.

The entire reflector shall be specially treated to prevent rust and corrosion and finished with two (2) costs of best quality super white paint.

.04 Plastic Reflectors & Diffusers

Where plastic reflectors or diffusers are specified they shall be made of best quality plastic materials recommended for lighting service, non-deteriorating and colour stable, equivalent to I.C.I. Perspex or Acrylic. They shall be of adequate thickness and strength to prevent sag under normal operation conditions.

.05 Laminar Parabolic Louver Diffusers

Where aluminium parabolic louver diffuser is specified, they shall be semi-secular natural anodised aluminium or high polished mirror finished of purity 98. 98% or as specified in the drawings. The aluminium louver set of each luminary shall be secured in open or closed position by die-formed steel hinges.

.06 High Reflective Metal Reflectors

Where highly reflective metal reflector are specified, they shall be of quality 22 gauge steel with 95% reflective secular silver film lamination. These quality silver-laminated reflectors shall have five year maintenance-free warranty.

Page 138: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LIGHTING LUMINAIRES

TS(EW)/19

.07 Control Gears

(a) Ballast

All ballast shall comply with SS24 or BS 2818: Part I and suitable for operation in circuits with tubular fluorescent lamps complying with BS 1853. Separate ballast shall be used for each lamp. They shall be of low loss type (not more than 5.5 watts) Class ‘H’ insulation and of approved manufacture. Certified test report for the ballast shall be submitted for approval.

Where electronic ballasts are specified they shall be of approved make with ballast loss of less than 4.5 watt and power factor height than 0.9. It shall conform to IEC 81 with instant lamp ignition less than 0.3 second power in standby mode (power down) less than 1.8 watt and leakage current less than 0.3mA.

(b) Capacitors

All power factors correction capacitors shall comply with BS 2818: Part2 suitable for operation with tubular fluorescent lamp complying with BS 1853. Capacitors shall be rated such as to maintain the circuit power factor at not less than 0.85 lagging. In any case, the capacitor shall be not less than 5.5 MFd 36 watt lamps.

(c) Starters

All starters complete with starter bases shall comply with BD 3772 suitable for operation with tubular fluorescent lamp complying with BS 1853.

(d) Radio Interference Suppression

All fluorescent fittings shall be fitted with suitable capacitors to reduce the level of radio interference to level as required by the BS CP:1006.

.08 Tubular Fluorescent Lamps

These shall be 600mm or 1200 or 1500mm bi-pin cap fluorescent lamps complying with BS 1853 with colour suitable for the type of service and areas where they are installed. Generally, they shall be of high efficiency, tri-phosphor, with good colour rendering type and colour temperature to final selection by the Interior Designer/M & E Engineer.

.09 Lamps Holders

They shall be of robust and well-designed construction complying with BS 1875. They shall provide firm lamp support and good electrical contact and shall be so designed that the lamps can be easily removed during maintenance.

Page 139: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

LIGHTING LUMINAIRES

TS(EW)/20

.10 Accessories

Terminals blocks, nickel plated spring clips, plastic sleeves and other necessary accessories which are required for the proper construction and safety operation of the lighting fittings shall be provided for all fittings.

.11 Suspensions

The Contractor shall supply and install the light fittings complete with all necessary suspension rods of appropriate length to support the lighting fittings. Fittings shall not be allowed to rest on the ceiling grid or tiles without any suspension.

7.0 SAMPLE OF LIGHTING FITTINGS

A sample of each type of lighting fittings proposed shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before order. It is the responsibility of the Sub-Contractor to ensure that the approval is obtained early to prevent any delay in the delivery of the fittings.

8.0 INCANDESCENT FITTINGS

They shall be manufactured by approved lighting manufacturers. Tungsten filament lamps shall be of the general lighting service pattern o otherwise of the coiled coil type. Clear lamps shall be utilised in all fittings except stated otherwise. Lamps shall be manufactured to SS 14 & BS 161 for general service lamp. Lamps up to and including 100 watts shall have bayonet cap and larger sizes shall have E.S. or G.E.S. holders as appropriate.

9.0 EXIT LUMINAIRE

Approved make of EXIT sign lighting fittings shall be provided as indicated in the Drawings. All EXIT signs shall be of 1x8W or 2X8W fluorescent type as shown in the drawings.

EXIT luminaries shall be of self-contained and maintained type with Nickel Cadmium battery and constant voltage charger. They shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of SS CP 19 and of type acceptable to the local Authorities.

10.0 EMERGENCY LUMINAIRE

Emergency luminaries shall be maintained or non-maintained, self-contained nickel cadmium battery type; of make and model as specified in the Drawings. They shall comply with the requirements of SS CP 19.

Page 140: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

POWER POINT

TS(EW)/21

1.0 GENERAL

0.1 Work Description

(a) The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install and connect all power outlet points as indicated in the drawings. All light fittings and types are shown in the layout drawings and alternative offers of equivalent light fittings will be considered provided the offer conforms to the types as listed and to the Architect/Interior Designer/M & E Engineer’s requirements.

(b) The drawings for the lighting and power points indicate approximate positions of all power outlet points, isolating switch points and the like. The actual positions of all fittings, the wiring details and cable routes shall be co-ordinated with other trades on site and submitted for the approval of the Architect. All time and cost required adjusting the layout or adjusting the completed installation to Architect satisfaction and to suit site co-ordination is included in the Sub-contract.

(c) During the exact positioning of power points, due consideration shall be given to the operational requirements of the installation, the selection of the most accessible routes for wiring and the convenience of switching.

(d) No additional cost will be entertained should the final positions be relocated within the same room or not more than five (5) metres away from the original locations due to any requirement.

(e) For the purpose of this Specification and related Drawings, each lighting and small power point circuits shall in general be coded with a prefix to indicate the corresponding distribution board number; details on the circuit way and phase shall be submitted for the acceptance of Architect.

(f) Certain types of electrical equipment or systems involving sudden changes, or low frequency or of direct electric current such as fluorescent lamps, contactors, etc. shall be fitted with radio and television interference suppression components suitable to meet the levels specified in BS 800 “Limits of Radio Interference”.

0.2 Standards

(a) The complete wiring installation shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the latest revision of the following standards and the appropriate BS/IEC SS:

i) SS CP5 : Electrical Installation

ii) SS 145 : 13A Switched Socket Outlets

iii) SS 227 : Lighting Switches

Page 141: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

POWER POINT

TS(EW)/22

iv) BS 546 : 15A & 30A Switched Socket Outlets

v) BS 800 : TV & Radio Frequency Interference

vi) BS 1362 : 13A Cartridge Fuse-Link for Fused Connection Units

viii) BS 3676 : Isolating Switches

ix) BS 4662 : Conduit Boxes

(b) The design of the cable shall also conform to the requirements of all relevant local codes, as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in this Specification and Drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the Architect.

(c) In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Sub-Contractor shall take the following precedence:

i) Architect’s decision;

ii) Local codes of practice;

iii) Drawings;

iv) Specification;

v) International standards and requirements.

0.3 Submission

(a) All technical submissions shall be accepted by the Architect prior to the respective stages of construction.

(b) As a minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:

i) Equipment catalogues submission with manufacturer’s data;

ii) Sample submission include all wiring accessories;

iii) Shop Drawings of the power positions, circuit numbers, cable routings, switching arrangement, mounting height, etc. The positions and mounting heights shall be co-ordinated with other services. Fixing details of all wiring accessories shall also be included.

iv) Drawings showing the installation details.

v) Labelling system

vi) PSB Certificate

Page 142: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

POWER POINT

TS(EW)/23

vii) Builder’s works requirement.

2.0 GUARANTEE OF LIGHT FITTINGS

All materials and accessories supplied shall be guaranteed for a period up to the end of the maintenance period. No charge shall be made for any work performed as a result of failure to fulfil the guarantee. Manufacturer’s standard guarantee shall apply to all lamps supplied with the fittings.

3.0 TERMINATION OF POWER POINTS

Each surface mounted fitting shall terminate at a B.S. junction box. All points shall be earthed with its appropriate earth continuity conductor unless they are of the all-insulated type construction.

4.0 SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS

0.1 Switched socket outlets shall be to SS 145 single pole 13 Amp 3 rectangular pin switch shuttered outlets, one or two gang for indoor service except otherwise specified and either surface or flush mounting according to location.

0.2 Switches shall be of the quick-make slow break type with silent, totally enclosed switch action and solid silver alloy contacts. Switched socket outlets for indoor use shall be housed in suitable galvanised steel boxes to BS 4662 with conduit knockouts. Types and finishes of socket plates shall match those for the lighting switches.

0.3 Generally switched socket outlets shall be positioned 300 mm above floor level except in plant rooms, kitchen, etc. where they shall be positioned 1400 mm above floor level or 150 mm above counters or benches whichever is suitable.

0.4 Switch socket outlet in all mechanical plant rooms, electrical sub-stations and switch rooms shall be of the metal clad type, with recessed or protected switch dolly, mounted in flush or surface conduit boxes as specified elsewhere.

0.5 All switched socket outlets used shall be of an approved or prescribed item as required by the local Authorities.

5.0 FUSED CONNECTION UNIT

0.1 All fused connection units shall be double pole switched, rated at 13 Amp unless otherwise specified, with fuse-links to BS 1362.

0.2 Units shall be of moulded ivory plastic, flush mounted, suitable for housing into galvanised steel boxes to BS 4662 with conduit knockouts.

Page 143: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

POWER POINT

TS(EW)/24

0.3 Fused connection units shall be of the same manufacture as 13 Amp socket outlets and of matching appearance.

0.4 Fused connection units provide supply to gas ignition of home appliance shall not be located in gas pipe compartment.

6.0 ISOLATOR SWITCH

0.1 Isolating switches shall be of the current ratings and number of poles (generally double pole for single phase and 4-pole three phases) as indicated on the Drawings.

0.2 Isolating switches shall be of the totally enclosed pattern, metal-clad or polycarbonate with positive quick-make and quick-break action.

0.3 Switches shall be capable of passing and also interrupting their full rated current safety and without damage.

0.4 Ferrous materials shall be galvanised, switch handles shall be interlocked to prevent opening the cover with the switch "ON".

7.0 15 AMP SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS

15 Amp switched socket outlets shall be 3 pin round type to BS 546 shuttered, of a finished similar to 13 Amp switched socket outlets and flush mounted in galvanised steel conduit boxes to BS 4662 requirements.

Page 144: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

TELEPHONE SYSTEM

TS(EW)/25

1.0 GENERAL

This section of the Specification covers the requirements for the supply and installation of the telephone system, including conduits, cable trays and trunkings and all necessary materials, etc. all the incoming telephone cables and risers. All works shall be carried out by the Sub-Contractor registered under CIDB (category ME08, 10, 14 in accordance with the Rules and Regulations of the Singapore Telecoms and to the satisfaction of the Architect.

2.0 CABLE TRAY, TRUNKING, CONDUITS, ETC

Reference should be made to the relevant section of the current Singapore Telecom “Guidelines for the Provision of Telecommunication Facilities by Developers” for detail and requirements of construction and installation for cable tray and trunkings, conduits, etc.

4.0 TELEPHONE, FLOOR TRUNKING & JUNCTION BOX

Services boxes (complete with outlets) and junction boxes shall be provided as shown in the drawings. Clear identification of the usage of the trunkings shall be provided at regular intervals to Architect’s and Singapore Telecom’s approval.

Particular attention shall be given to the level of all trunkings. The Sub-Contractor shall check ceiling level, other services within ceiling space for ease of subsequent cabling and maintenance works. Details of sample of the trunking system, junction boxes, service boxes, pick-up outlets, accessories, etc, shall be submitted tot he Architect for approval.

5.0 ATTENDANCE & LIASON WITH SINGAPORE TELECOM

The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all attendance and liaison with the Singapore Telecom for the installation of main distribution frame, running of main cabling and all other telephone equipment in the Building. He shall deem to have included in his contract Price for this requirement.

6.0 SEALING OF TELEPHONE RISER DUCTS

The Sub-Contractor shall be required to seal up all openings in the telephone riser ducts with approved type fire-stop material. The sealing of all riser duct openings shall be carried out after the Singapore Telecom have installed all their cables. He is deemed to have allowed cost in his Contract Price for this requirement.

Page 145: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

PAINTING

TS(EW)/26

1.0 GENERAL

This section of the Specification covers the painting of all equipment and works installed under other sections of the Specification. The work involved includes but shall not be limited to the supply and application of paint, thinners, identification labels etc., unless specifically excluded elsewhere in this Specification.

The work to be painted shall include all equipment, fittings, hangers, conduits framework supports, switchboard machinery etc and all work exposed to view. All paints, enamels, etc shall be of approved brand of best quality, ready mixed paint brought on to the site in unopened container. All paint used shall be capable of withstanding the surface temperature of the respective services without deterioration. No painting shall be done in unsuitable weather and all finishing tints shall be as indicted below or to the approval of the Architect. Each sub-coat shall be applied in a different shade. The Contractor shall provide all tarpaulins, sheets and covering to protect floors, etc.

2.0 METAL SURFACE

All metal works shall be thoroughly wired brushed to remove rust and scale and shall be free from grease and dirt. The surface shall then be prepared with an approved rust inhibitive primer and two (2) high gloss-finishing coats to approval.

3.0 EQUIPMENT TO BE PAINTED

The Contractor shall carry out the following preparation and painting to all the various equipment installed under this Contract:

.01 Distribution Boards (Internal & External)

a. Clean down with solvent

b. Treat with a cold phosphate compound

c. Apply one (1) coat of zinc chromate primer

d. Apply two (2) coats of industrial enamel - Colour: Grey

e. After installation repair any damage with primer and finish coats as above

.02 Trunking, Conduit and Cable Tray

All trunking, conduit and cable trays shall be painted with one (1) coat of zinc chromate primer and an approved type enamel finishing paint, with colour to approval.

Where they are installed outdoors, the finishing paint shall be of mica us iron oxide type or marine quality paint to approval.

Page 146: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

PAINTING

TS(EW)/27

.03 Support and Brackets

All supports and brackets for the electrical installation shall be painted with 1 coat of zinc chromate and an approved type enamel finishing paint to match.

Where they are installed outdoors, the finishing paint shall be mica us iron oxide type or marine quality paint to approval.

Page 147: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

TESTING & COMMISSIONING

TS(EW)/28

1.0 GENERAL

This section of the Specification sets out the basic requirements for testing and commissioning of the Electrical Systems. All testing, calibration and setting of equipment and controls associated with this installation shall be performed and all instruments, materials and labour necessary for this shall be supplied by the Electrical Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete and thorough testing, commissioning, adjusting and of the systems and equipment installed and to bring into safe and reliable operation the entire Electrical System.

2.0 NOTICE

The Contractor shall notify the Architect / M & E Engineer in writing of his programme to test and commission the equipment and systems at least seven (7) days before actual execution.

3.0 RECORDS

The Contractor shall prepare and provide printed testing and commissioning record forms of approved format.

He shall submit two (2) copies of a written report on the results of test, etc within seven (7) days of completion of such test, irrespective of test results.

He shall deploy on a full time basis for two (2) months after the practical completion date, one supervisor or equal to attend to complaints relating to malfunctions, overloads, tripping, unbalance and to readjust where necessary to suit the requirements of space occupants.

4.0 PROTECTION RELAY SETTING

All protection systems shall be calibrated and set under normal operation conditions and the settings shall be decided by the Architect/M&E Engineer. All settings shall then be permanently marked on the control equipment. All calibration procedures shall be properly recorded in detail.

5.0 COMMISSIONING

The Contractor shall be responsible for the testing of all switchboards, sub mains cabling, final sub-circuits, etc and shall certify that they are safe and that they are installed in accordance with the requirements of the SS: CP5 before supply is allowed to be energised. Generally, test shall include though not limited to the following:

.01 Continuity tests.

Page 148: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

TESTING & COMMISSIONING

TS(EW)/29

.02 Phasing out & Polarity tests.

.03 Installation resistance tests.

.04 Protective equipment operating tests.

.05 Earthing effectiveness tests.

.06 Measuring & sensing equipment accuracy tests.

.07 Any other tests as are reasonably required by the Architect.

6.0 TYPE TEST

The Contractor shall submit Type Test and Routine Test Certificates by recognised Testing Authorities. Such test shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant Singapore Standard of British Standards or approved alternative applicable Standards.

7.0 CLEANING UP AFTER TESTING

The cost of all labour, equipment, etc required to clean up after each and every test shall deem to be included.

Page 149: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

MAINTENANCE & SERVICING

TS(EW)/30

1.0 GENERAL

This section of the Specification sets out the minimum requirements for the works to be carried out, the supply of materials, tools, equipment, labour, etc for the efficient maintenance and servicing of the Electrical Installation during the maintenance and defects liability period.

2.0 WORKMANSHIP & MATERIALS

All works shall be performed by workmen experience and skilled in the maintenance servicing repair of installation works and shall be executed in accordance with the best commercial practice. All materials supplied shall be of the best quality and new.

3.0 SUPERVISION

All material servicing and repair work shall be carried out by workmen in the direct employ of the Contractor. The workmen shall be supervised by a skilled experience and competent foreman.

4.0 HOURS OF SERVICE

The Contractor shall provide maintenance and servicing during normal hours and twenty-four (24) hours emergency breakdown service. The breakdown service of equipment and installation shall be deemed to have occurred when such equipment or installation will not perform the design function or performance.

No equipment, except standby equipment, shall be taken out of service for maintenance during peak load period, unless due to breakdown or other emergency or scheduled annual overhaul.

5.0 CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

The following consumables shall be provided free of charge in the carrying out of the maintenance and servicing:

.01 All fuses and indication lamps.

.02 All electrical contact points.

.03 All detergent and cleaning fluids for equipment

.04 All cotton waste and rag.

.05 All paints and anti-corrosion primer.

.06 Battery electrolytes

Page 150: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

MAINTENANCE & SERVICING

TS(EW)/31

6.0 WORK TO BE PERFORMED

The Contractor shall carry out the maintenance and servicing of the completed installation at regular intervals in accordance with the details as listed in the Schedule of Maintenance and Servicing Contract to ensure that the installation operates efficiently.

He shall if so required remedy any defects or omissions discovered or appearing therein even previously certified as not to have been appeared or discovered by the Architect.

The Architect is thereby empowered to extend the time for this free maintenance and servicing of the equipment for such period as in his absolute discretion he may consider necessary for the thorough examination of all work and completion of such as may be found defective.

It is to be distinctively understood that the Employer shall have the full, free and unrestricted use of the said work without any interference whatsoever on the part of the Contractor during the currency of this period and such use on the part of the Employer shall not be held as relieving the Contractor of any liabilities or obligations in respect of his Contract.

7.0 RECORDS

All tools, observation, readings, rectification works shall be fully recorded. A log book shall be provided in the building maintenance office and all reports and recording shall be entered into the log book and to be signed and acknowledged by the Building Maintenance Engineer.

8.0 OPERATORS

The Contractor shall provide the services of two suitably qualified operators for a period of two (2) months during the Maintenance Period. The operators shall be engaged full-time on the site and shall be responsible for the starting, shut-down, cleaning, servicing and general maintenance of the installation. The operator shall also be required to tutor the Employer’s service personnel on all aspects of the operation and maintenance of the installation.

Page 151: Tender Documents

PART III

OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(ACMV SERVICES)

Page 152: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

GENERAL

TS(ACMV)/1

1.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The proposed Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems are briefly described as follows:

For the scope of works of the ACMV refer to The Specification Drawings.

2.0 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

For the purpose of this Installation, the medium voltage electricity supply will be 400/230 volts, 3-phase, 4 wire, and 50 Hz system with deviations/fluctuations as normally declared by the Supply Authorities.

3.0 DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS

The various plant capacities are based on the following design assumptions:

Outdoor Conditions

32.2o C dB/26.7o C wet bulb

Indoor Air Conditioned Areas

22.9 +/- 1o C dB/50 to 60% RH

General Lighting Loads

Corridors : 10 watts/sq m

4.0 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

In the selection/offer of equipment/plants/materials and in the execution of the work, the Sub-Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Specification and/or Specification Drawing and the followings:

.01 Indoor Air-Conditioned Areas

21.9 + 1o Celsius dry bulb

.02 Noise Level

Octave band sound pressure levels in the various areas within the Building shall not exceed the noise criteria set out in the following Schedule.

When dispute arises over the classification of any area under the following Schedule, the Architect’s determination of the space, type and function of the area, as listed below, shall be final and binding on the Sub-Contractor.

Page 153: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

GENERAL

TS(ACMV)/2

Noise Criteria

Space/Area (NC) FCU at low speed 32 FCU at high speed 38 Classroom 35

Offices, Conference / Seminar Rooms 35 Public Areas, e.g. Foyers, Corridors, Lobbies 45

The specified interior noise criteria limits apply to every position from one (1) m to two (2) m from the floor not closer than 1.5m from any air outlet, or equipment.

The Contractor shall ensure that noise emitting from any equipment under this Contract to be effectively controlled such that the noise level at property boundaries shall comply with the requirements of the Code of Practice on Environmental Health.

The Contractor shall examine all the Specification Drawings and Specifications including architectural and structural sets of working drawings, before commencing any work forming the Works and shall immediately bring to the Architect’s attention any characteristics or properties of the Building or any other factors which, in his opinion, would jeopardize or nullify the attainment of the design objectives in respect of noise level control.

The Contractor shall ensure that all plant equipment and installation included in the Works, when operated within the design criteria, shall acoustically perform to the specified noise criteria ratings.

The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective action which may be necessary either during the execution or after completion of the Works, to achieve all design objectives.

5.0 CERTIFICATES, PERMITS & FEES

The Contractor shall apply and obtain all necessary certificates and approval from the governing Authorities for the work done and shall lodge same with the Architect. The Contractor shall also obtain and complete all permits and notices required by the governing Authorities and shall obtain consents necessary for the various works to be executed. The Contractor shall pay all fees in connection therewith.

Page 154: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

FANS & FAN COIL UNITS

TS(ACMV)/3

1.0 FANS

.01 General

Fans shall be carefully selected and entirely suitable for their particular service and with respect to corrosion, in flammability or other hazardous applications.

Fans shall be capable of handling the air quantity necessary for the specified system performance against the resistance of the system. The resistance shown on the Schedule of Technical Requirements are for tendering purposes only and the Sub-Contractor shall be held responsible for checking the final system resistance before ordering the equipment.

Fans shall be balanced and free from vibration. All fan rotors, including the drive pulleys shall be statically and dynamically balanced better than 40 gram cm per 100 kg of rotor weight and shall not exceed the maximum allowable vibration criteria as specified in the Specifications. Performance test of up to 110% normal running speed shall be conducted. The rotor and pulley shall be further balanced on site to the satisfaction of the Architect. The fans shall be selected as not to exceed the maximum allowable noise levels specified in the Schedule of Technical Requirements.

Unless otherwise specified, fans shall be designed and constructed for continuous operation.

All fans shall be fitted with engraved identification and directional labels giving full details of speed, horsepower, pulley and belt sizes and type of grease required, and mechanically fixed where they can be easily seen and not subject to potential damage.

After manufacture, the casing, impeller shaft and belt guards shall be thoroughly cleaned and given two coats of “Anodite” anti-corrosive paint or other approved treatment.

All fans including motors, pulleys, electrical wiring, control panels, etc within the air stream of ventilation system for Kitchen Exhaust System shall be of the flame-proof types to comply with the requirements of the local Authorities.

.02 Fans for High Temperature Operation

Fans for high temperature operation shall be capable of operating effectively up to two hours at an ambient temperature of 250o Celsius. Fan motors insulation shall be Class C to B.S. 2757. Special high temperature performance grease shall be used in the bearings to prevent early bearing failure. Shrunk-in stators are to be doweled to prevent rotation of the stator core. Fans shall be supplied with steel or cast iron impeller.

Centrifugal fans shall be supplied and fitted generally as shown in the Specification Drawings. Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Specification Drawings, the centrifugal fans shall be double inlet, double

Page 155: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

FANS & FAN COIL UNITS

TS(ACMV)/4

width type. Fans handling more than 35,000 CMH shall be of aerofoil backward curved blade type and fans handling 35,000 CMH or less may be of flat blade backward curved type. Fan wheels and housing shall be of galvanised steel or approved equivalent. All centrifugal fans shall be belt driven unless otherwise noted on the Schedule of Technical Requirements.

All vee-belt drives and shafts shall be fitted with easily removable expanded and flattened steel guard of 6 mm mesh size and mounted on 14 SWG angle steel frameworks. All guards shall have access openings to the shaft ends to enable tachometer reading to be taken.

All belt drives shall have approved lock pulleys on both the driver and driven. Belts sets shall be matched. Belts which have taken a permanent set through remaining idle shall be rejected. All belt speed shall not exceed 23 m/sec.

Motor speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm or as noted on the Schedules of Technical Requirements.

Vibration isolators for the centrifugal fans shall be as specified in the Schedule of Vibration Isolation Equipment.

.04 Axial Fans

Axial fans shall be supplied and fitted generally as shown in the Specification Drawings. Fans shall be selected with direct driven motors giving non-overloading characteristics. Motor speeds shall not exceed 1500 rpm, or as noted on Schedules of Technical Requirements.

Casings shall be of standard length designed to protect both the motor and impeller, continuously welded throughout and hot-dipped galvanised after manufacture. Inspection door shall be provided to enable direction of rotation to be checked.

Terminal boxes welded to the casing shall be provided for electrical connection to fan motor.

Lubrication of bearing shall be possible from outside the fan casing.

Impellers may be of glass reinforced polyester resin or die cast aluminium.

Flanged connection to ductwork shall be made with cadmium plated bolts.

.05 Domestic Type Exhaust Fans

Ventilation fans manufactured from plastic or other similar approved material designed for commercial or domestic uses shall be supplied and fitted generally as shown in the Specification Drawings. Fans shall be window-mounted or wall-mounted to suit the particular installation. Wall-mounted fans shall be supplied with wall boxes and wall plates suitable for removal for cleaning or fully concealed within the wall boxes where shown in the Specification Drawings.

Page 156: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

FANS & FAN COIL UNITS

TS(ACMV)/5

Fans shall be complete with weatherproof flush fitting exterior grilles, draught-preventing iris or similar shutters linked to the fan switches and flush fitting interior grilles.

Unless otherwise specified, fan motors shall be suitable for single phase, 50-cycle operation.

.06 Industrial Type Propeller Fans

Propeller-type ventilation fans manufactured from heavy gauge metal or other approved materials designed for industrial or commercial uses and capable of continuous operation shall be supplied generally as shown in the Specification Drawings. Fans shall be ring-mounted or diaphragm-mounted to suit the particular installation; diaphragm-mounted type shall be used for in-duct application. Where fans are fitted in a run of ductwork, extended lubricators shall be provided with a suitable size access panel in the ductwork.

Fan speed shall not exceed 1000 rpm. Bearings shall preferably be of the sleeve type, and the fans shall be complete with resilient mountings, internal rings and wire guards. External grilles and fan chambers shall be provided as shown in the Specification Drawings.

Fans shall be directly coupled to totally enclosed squirrel-cage motors.

Where a fan is installed in a run of ductwork or similar enclosure, its selection shall take into account the added resistance.

.07 Mixed Flow Roof Extract Units

This shall be the mixed flow design with aluminium impeller discharging air radically in all directions.

It shall be a complete factory fabricated unit with the weather cap, unit body and weathering skirt moulded in glass fibre reinforced resin.

It shall be of single speed, direct driven squirrel-cage motor giving non-overloading characteristic.

.07 Mixed Flow Roof Extract Units (continued)

It shall be balanced and free from vibration and the fan speed shall not exceed 900 rpm.

It shall have automatic back draught shutters and shall be fitted with bird/insect screen on the underside.

It shall be suitable for three-phase, 50 cycles per second operation.

Page 157: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

FANS & FAN COIL UNITS

TS(ACMV)/6

2.0 FAN COIL UNITS

Fan coil units shall be supplied and fitted generally as shown in the Specification Drawings. Each fan coil unit shall be complete with fans, motors, filters, chilled water coil, grilles, controls and all accessories.

Fan coil units shall be selected based on medium speed operation of the fan and under this condition the coil face velocity shall not exceed 2.6 m/s.

Unless otherwise specified, fan coil units shall have non-decorative enclosures of 18 B.G. galvanised sheet steel. The fan units shall be so installed as to be easily and totally removable from the cabinet which shall be complete with front discharge and back return air duct flanges. The entire cabinet shall be insulated. Motor leads shall be terminated in an electrical junction box with multi-speed and on/off switch and control plate furnished for wall or surface mounting.

Coils shall be of the extruded surface plate fin and staggered tube type constructed of seamless copper tubing and aluminium fins and shall be complete with manual air vent and drain plug. Coil shall be suitable for the operating pressure specified.

Fans shall be of the double inlet, double width type with forward curved wheels of galvanised iron construction. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be direct driven by two-bearing, three speed motor with nominal speed not exceeding 1000 rpm.

Fractional horsepower motors shall be of permanent split capacitor type or approved equivalent. Motors shall have sleeve bearings with oil bearers; inherent thermal protection with automatic re-set and shall be resiliently mounted on vibration isolation bases. Fans and motors shall be mounted on galvanised steel fan deck with the assembly easily removable from the basic unit.

Each fan coil unit shall be internally lined on the supply air duct with minimum 2.5 m length of 25 mm thick, 48 kg/cu. m density fibreglass. The fibreglass in contact with the air stream shall be coated with a layer of neoprene.

Condensate drain pans shall be of heavy gauge galvanised sheet steel designed for quick detachment from the base unit for servicing. Drain pans shall be insulated with minimum 15 mm thick rigid insulation. Furthermore, the Contractor shall supply and install a secondary drain pan for the entire fan coil unit; this drain pan shall be constructed of minimum 18 B.G. galvanised sheet steel and suitably insulated, and

3.0 FAN COIL UNITS (continued)

hinged for easy access to the fan coil unit. The drain pans shall be connected to insulated drain pipes to discharge the condensate.

Filters shall be of the disposable type as specified elsewhere in this Specification. Filters shall be supported on frames designed for quick detachment for servicing.

Each fan coil unit shall be provided with a control valve as shown in the Specification Drawings. The valve shall be positioned in the pipe section and so arranged to facilitate periodic removal for adjustment and cleaning. The automatic control and adjusting box shall be fitted in an accessible position near one of the

Page 158: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

FANS & FAN COIL UNITS

TS(ACMV)/7

inspection covers within easy reach for control and adjustment.

Generally, switched socket outlets will be provided by the Electrical Sub-Contractor for each fan coil unit. In cases where the power supplies to the fan coil units are to be undertaken in this Sub-Contract as shown in Schedule ‘B’, then the supply shall be derived from the appropriate subsidiary control panels protected by branch MCCBs and residual current circuit breakers. The general circuit arrangement of such subsidiary control panels shall be similar to that shown in Standard Specification Drawing No. STDM-29.

4.0 AIR FILTRATION SYSTEM

.01 General

For fan coil units (FCU), only primary filter need to be provided.

.02 Primary Filters

Primary filters shall be of the dry disposable type suitable for high dust holding capacity and for face velocity up to 2.5 m/sec. The filter module thickness shall not be more than 50mm.

The filter shall have an average arrestance efficiency of 90% and dust spot efficiency of 30% based on ASHRAE Standard 52-76.

The initial air resistance shall not exceed 0.5 mbar at face velocity of 2.5 m/sec.

.03 Air Filters for Fan Coil Unit

The filter shall be cleanable type mounted in light weight metal frame with media held in position with PVC coated heavy gauge galvanised iron wire mesh of mesh size not larger than 75 x 75 (mm). All joint shall be fitted air tight with felt stripes. The complete unit including filter box shall be suitably treated against corrosion. The face velocity of air passing through the filter shall not exceed 1.8 m/sec and the initial air resistance shall not exceed 0.4 mbar.

Page 159: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

DUCTWORK AND AIR DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT

TS(ACMV)/8

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall supply and install the range of galvanised sheet ductwork generally as shown in the Specification Drawings, where duct dimensions shown are clear internal sizes; where ducts are internally insulated, the insulation thickness shall be added to the duct dimensions. Ductwork for kitchen exhaust systems shall comply with the appropriate clauses in the Specification and/or details as shown in the Specification Drawings.

All ductwork and fittings shall be constructed in accordance with practice recommended in the current editions of relevant Manuals, Standards and Guides by the SHEET METAL AND AIR-CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INCORPORATED (U.S.A.) unless otherwise specified in the section of the Specification and Drawings. Constructional tolerances shall be within +/- 3 mm for ductwork and +/- 1.5 mm for matching joints. Ductwork shall be free from buckles or waves and shall be neat and accurate. Full size standard galvanised iron sheet shall be used, and any patches, made up on second-hand sheets will be rejected. The degree of zinc coating on sheet steel shall be in accordance with Clause D of B.S. 2989 - 1982.

Ductwork shall be cross-broken or provided with steel angles bracing for additional stiffness to prevent sagging, drumming or vibration of ductwork.

All fixing of duct hangers, supports and brackets to building structure shall be by means of approved nylon or metal expansion plugs. Suitable receiving holes shall be cut by approved rotary-percussion electric drills to give true and accurate drilling.

In areas where space is limited, the ductwork and fittings shall be positioned and installed accordingly and to the Architect satisfaction. If required, the ductwork shall be prefabricated and pre-insulated before installation.

Samples of ductwork and fittings shall be reviewed by the Architect before commencement of installations. Samples shall include duct acoustic insulation, opposed blade and splitter dampers, flexible connections, flexible ducting, externally insulated duct with hangers, grilles, diffusers, registers, linear diffusers, variable air volume boxes, etc.

Dimensions of ductwork refer to the sides of rectangular ducts or the diameters of circular ducts where applicable.

Page 160: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

DUCTWORK AND AIR DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT

TS(ACMV)/9

2.0 LOW PRESSURE DUCTS

.01 Rectangular Ducts

For low pressure rectangular ducts where air mean velocities are less than 10 m/s and static pressure in duct does not exceed 5 mbar, such ducts shall be constructed of galvanised sheet steel in accordance with the table below, unless otherwise indicated in the Specification Drawings.

Dimension of longest side of duct (mm)

Sheet steel Gauge (B.G.)

Type of Transverse Joint Longitudinal

Reinforcing angle size & Maximum spacing between transverse

joints and/or intermediate reinforcing

Up to 300 26 (0.498mm)

Drive slip or Hemmed S-Slip

-

301 to 450 24 (0.629mm)

Drive slip or Hemmed S-Slip

-

451 to 750 24 (0.629mm)

25 x 25 x 3 angle flanged connection all sides or Bar Slip (40mm ht)

25 x 25 x 3 angle @ 1200 centres

751 to 1000 22 (0.794mm)

25 x 25 x 3 angle flanged connection all sides or Bar Slip (25mm ht)

25 x 25 x 3 angle @ 1200 centres

1001 to 1200 22 (0.794mm)

40 x 40 x 3 angle flanged connection all sides or Bar Slop (40mm ht)

40 x 40 x 3 angle @ 1200 centres

1201 to 1500 20 (0.996mm)

40 x 40 x 3 angle flanged connection all sides

40 x 40 x 3 angle @ 1200 centres

1501 to 2100 20 (0.996mm)

40 x 40 x 3 angle flanged connection all sides

40 x 40 x 3 angle @ 600 centres

2101 to 2400 18 (1.257mm)

40 x 40 x 5 angle flanged connection all sides

40 x 40 x 5 angle @ 600 centres

Over 2400 18 (1.257mm)

50 x 50 x 6 angle flanged connection all sides

50 x 50 x 6 angle @ 600 centres

Where drive slip joints are required for use in conjunction with bar slip joints, 25 x 25 x 3 reinforcing angle shall be provided adjacent to the drive slip if the side exceeds 450 mm.

Page 161: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

DUCTWORK AND AIR DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT

TS(ACMV)/10

Transverse joints shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 2400 mm for duct dimensions up to 750 mm and not exceeding 1200 mm for duct dimensions above 750 mm. The “duct dimension” column refers to the maximum dimension of the duct i.e. either top, bottom or side or diameter if circular.

All rectangular ducts shall be cross-broken. Cross-breaking shall be between joints.

3.0 JOINTS

Transverse joints for rectangular ductwork shall be as described in Clause .02 and illustrated in the standard drawings attached.

Thickness of metal for drive slips, hemmed S-Slips, and bar slips shall not be thinner than the metal used for the ductwork.

For angle-flanged connections and reinforcing angles, the angles shall be riveted to ducts at intervals not exceeding 100 mm.

Angle flanged connection shall be fitted with 3 mm thick neoprene gaskets and bolted at intervals not exceeding 150 mm. All angles shall be of standard steel section, cleaned and prime coated before installation. All angle flanges for each section of duct shall be welded at corners to provide true 90 degree corners.

All corners of transverse joints shall be properly closed and sealed. Drive slips shall extend approximately 200 mm and hammered over the other slip to seal the corner. For angle flanged connection, gaps at corners shall be sealed by means of neoprene gaskets with tongue and groove overlap.

Transverse joints shall be used between ducts and all fixed points (i.e. grilles, bends and branches).

Longitudinal joints of ductwork shall be made at corners with “Pittsburgh” seams.

Pop rivets and screws will not be permitted for use on ducts.

No free or cut edges of ductwork shall appear within ducts, and where seams or joints protrude into the duct air stream, they shall be arranged in the direction of air flow.

No ductwork joints, bends or other fittings will be permitted within the thickness of the wall, floor or ceiling structure.

4.0 DUCT SUPPORTS

All ductwork shall be supported by purpose-made hangers, supports and cantilever brackets at centres not exceeding two (2) metres to prevent sagging and vibration.

Generally, all horizontal ducts shall be supported by trapeze hangers with angle supports and steel rod hangers in accordance with the table below:

Page 162: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

DUCTWORK AND AIR DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT

TS(ACMV)/11

Dimension of Longest Side of Duct (mm)

Angle Support Steel Rod Hangers

(mm)

Up to 450 25 x 25 x 18 B.G. (1.257mm) galvanised sheet steel angle-hemmed

6

451 to 750 25 x 25 x 3 angle iron 6

751 to 1500 40 x 40 x 3 angle iron 10

1501 to 2400 50 x 50 x 6 angle iron 10

Over 2400 50 x 50 x 6 angle iron 10

Steel rod hangers shall be threaded at one end to enable adjustment of level of duct for minimum 40 mm; at the other end, the steel rod may be welded to a 50 x 50 x 6 angle iron piece for fixing to concrete ceiling.

Vertical ducts shall be rigidly supported by angle iron brackets securely fixed to walls or at floor levels, and at centres not exceeding 3600 mm. Details of brackets and method of support shall be submitted to the Architect for review.

All angle iron and steel rods shall be cleaned, prime coated and painted.

5.0 BENDS, OFFSETS AND TRANSFORMATION

On all bends and offsets the inside radii shall not be less than the width of duct unless otherwise shown. Where right-angled bends are used, double thickness turning vanes shall be incorporated as shown in the standard drawings attached. Single thickness vanes shall be fitted for ductwork as necessary; the leading edge of the vanes shall be turned-over with internal wire or small diameter rod bending.

All branches shall be fitted with folded metal splitter dampers fixed in position with quadrant and clamp. Details of branch take-offs are shown in standard drawings attached. For final branch take-off to an outlet, straight tap-in will be permitted as shown in standard drawing attached; for outlets located less than 300 mm from the take-off, stream splitter damper shall be installed as shown in standard drawing attached.

Changes in section of ductwork shall be effected by tapering the ducts with a slope not greater than 1 in 4 but preferably, 1 in 7 slopes or less.

6.0 SLEEVES

Where ducts pass through walls or partitions, suitable galvanised sheet steel sleeves of a gauge not less than the duct concerned shall be located into place by the Contractor in liaison with building works. These sleeves shall be of lengths to suit the finished wall thickness and in the case of plastered and/or rendered walls should not protrude more than 3 mm over the finished wall surface. In the case of insulated ductwork the sleeves shall be over-sized to allow the insulation and vapour sealing to be continuous through them.

Page 163: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

DUCTWORK AND AIR DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT

TS(ACMV)/12

Where ducts penetrate walls of plant rooms/fan rooms or penetrate floors, the insulation (if external) shall be sheathed with 16 B.G. galvanised sheet steel. The space between the duct sleeve and duct/sheath shall be tightly packed with suitable fibreglass or mineral wool insulation and sealed at both ends with approved non-hardening resilient sealant.

7.0 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

Flexible connections shall be provided on the suction and discharge connections to each fan as may be necessary throughout the Building.

Flexible connections shall not exceed 100 mm in length and shall be made of glass fabric material which shall be non-combustible when tested in accordance with methods specified under B.S. 476, Part 6, “Fire Propagation Test for Materials”.

Glass fabric material shall be coated with neoprene or other fire-retardant material on one side of the surfaces.

Flexible connections shall have heat resistance which shall withstand 148o Celsius for short periods and 93o Celsius continuously.

The flexible connections shall provide 80 mm clearance between fan or equipment connections to ductwork. The method of connection shall permit renewal of the flexible connection without dismantling the ductwork. Flexible connections shall not be used for connection between ductwork and stairwell pressurization or smoke stop lobby ventilation fans. In such cases, flange joints shall be used.

8.0 WELDING

Welding of galvanised steel ductwork may be carried out where approved by the Architect in writing. The affected areas shall be wire brushed, cleaned and painted with cold galvanising paint.

9.0 ACCESS DOORS

The Contractor shall provide access doors with approved neoprene gaskets on all ductwork connections, both upstream and downstream of coils, heaters, and humidifiers and upstream of fans, filters, fire dampers, etc for inspection, cleaning and maintenance purpose.

The access doors shall measure at least 600 mm (length) x 450 mm (width); for smaller ducts, the width dimensions may be reduced to the width or depth of duct.

Access doors shall be hinged and fitted with sash locks, and constructed in accordance with SMACNA recommendations. For insulated ducts, the access doors shall be insulated and sheathed with 26 B.G. galvanised sheet steel. Access doors shall be constructed of 18 B.G. galvanised sheet steel suitably braced. Opening in ducts shall be stiffened by galvanised sheet steel frame riveted to the duct; gauge thickness of the frame shall be same as the duct.

Page 164: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

DUCTWORK AND AIR DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT

TS(ACMV)/13

10.0 DUCT TEST HOLE - LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

Duct test holes shall be provided as shown in the Specification Drawings and on the discharge duct of each fan and each major branch duct handling over 10% of the total air to enable Pitot tube or volumeter readings to be taken.

Screwed and plugged 25 mm B.S. pipe half sockets shall be welded to a plate fixed to the side of the ducts or other convenient positions and fitted with plugs. This arrangement shall not project into the air stream and internally insulated ductwork shall have the insulation locally removed sufficient only to allow passage of robes.

Test holes shall be located at a point of minimum turbulence and the number and spacing shall be in accordance with B.S. 848.

11.0 SEALANTS

Where required, joints and seams shall be made airtight by use of sealants. Liquid sealants shall not be used except on the flexible ductwork. Mastic sealant where required, shall be applied where possible, by a pressure gun to the inside of the assembled joint. Oil based caulking and glazing compounds shall not be used.

12.0 DAMPERS

Supply and install dampers as shown in the Specification Drawings, as covered in Clause D.5 and as may be necessary. Constructional details of dampers shall be as shown in the standard drawings attached and generally in accordance with SMACNA recommendations.

Volume control dampers shall be of the opposed blade multi-leaf type except for ducts less than 300 mm in height where single leaf dampers may be used. Dampers shall be constructed of 16 B.G. galvanised sheet steel blades mounted on solid steel bar spindles not less than 10 mm diameter, and fitted with bronze bushes or ball bearings. Splitter dampers shall be of double thickness type constructed of 18 B.G. galvanised sheet steel.

Motor operated dampers shall have suitable connecting rod and base plate for mounting the damper motor. Motor-operated dampers in the “close” position shall not permit air leakage in excess of 2% of the design air quantity.

Non-return/relief dampers shall be of the multi-leaf constructed of 22 B.G. with suitable aluminium spindles and linkage rods. Non-return dampers shall be provided as shown in the Specification Drawings and also in ducts on suction sides of multiple fan installations; fan shall be selected to account for resistance across the dampers.

13.0 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

The Contractor shall supply and install all diffusers, registers and grilles where shown in the Specification Drawings, except where otherwise specified. Detailed design of diffusers, registers and grilles shall be suitable for the particular ceiling, walls or door

Page 165: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

DUCTWORK AND AIR DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT

TS(ACMV)/14

construction and to the Architect’s review. Fully finished samples of all diffusers, registers and grilles shall be submitted to the Architect for review before any bulk manufacture or purchase commenced.

All diffusers, registers and grilles shall be designed to account for the noise levels as specified elsewhere in this Specification and shall be coated with anti-condensation films.

Ceiling diffusers shall be of 4-way, 3-way or 2-way blow type as shown in the Specification Drawings. The diffusers shall be of square or rectangular type designed for overlap ceiling installation, moderately stepped down inner cores and designed to minimise smudging. Centre cores shall be removable. Deflector vanes shall be spaced at approximately 35 mm centres, measured horizontally. Duct rings shall be provided so that concealed screws may be used for right adjustment of margins to ceiling. At each outlet position, provide a rigid duct support.

Side discharge registers shall be of the rectangular or square type with adjustable vertical and horizontal face bars.

Return-air and exhaust grilles shall be of the 15 mm x 15 mm x 15 mm egg-crate type.

Registers and grilles shall be fixed using concealed screws to the Architect’s satisfaction.

Air velocities at neck of ceiling diffusers shall not exceed 2.5 m/s unless otherwise shown. Air velocities across face of return-air grilles or exhaust grilles shall not exceed 3.0 m/s.

Opposed blade volume control dampers shall be fitted to all diffusers, registers and grilles except for return-air grilles or exhaust grilles which are not directly connected to any ductwork. The dampers shall be operated by ‘Allen’ key from the front of the diffuser, register or grille. For diffusers and registers, the dampers shall be installed with blades perpendicular to the air flow wherever possible.

Where flexible ductwork connections are shown on the drawing each diffuser shall be provided with a round to square tapered transition. Volume control shall be achieved by a butterfly damper located in the flexible duct spigot on the main duct.

All diffusers and registers shall be provided with suitable non-flammable gaskets at flanges.

Generally diffusers, registers and grilles shall be manufactured of minimum 20 B.G. galvanised sheet steel with baked enamel finishes of colour to the Architect’s approval.

Where grilles/diffusers are used in conjunction with the VAV boxes, these shall be supplied by specialist grille/diffuser manufacturer. Such grilles/diffusers shall be capable of operating at reduced air volume down to 50% of the designed air quantity without air dumping. Selection of such grilles shall be submitted to the Architect for review before commencement of manufacture or order.

Page 166: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

DUCTWORK AND AIR DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT

TS(ACMV)/15

Supply air outlets shall have sound power levels sufficiently low such that the noise levels specified for the various spaces/areas are complied with.

14.0 CLEANING OF DUCTWORK

For installed lengths of vertical and horizontal ducts, properly fitted sheet metal covers shall be provided on all open ends at all times to prevent ingress of rubbish, waste, etc.

Internally insulated vertical and horizontal ductwork shall be protected with a layer of heavy gauge polythene at all the open ends before fitting of the sheet metal cover so as to prevent ingress of moisture to the insulation.

All ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned during installation and fans shall be operated as soon as practicable to clear the ducts. Dirt and dust shall not be discharged from diffusers and grilles.

15.0 DUCTWORK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM

Ductwork shall be of minimum 16 B.G. (1.58 mm) black steel sheet and all seams and joints shall have liquid tight continuous external welds. If necessary, flanged joints may be used. However, flanges must be of angles iron not less than 40 x 40 x 5. Ducts shall be attached to the flanges by liquid tight continuous welds. Flanges shall be joined by suitable pitched bolts and nuts with not less than 3 mm thick ceramic fibre gaskets and shall be liquid tight. Access holes of 300 mm x 450 mm for inspection and cleaning shall be provided at intervals not greater than 3 m along each run of ducting and at each change in direction of ducting. The lower edge of the openings shall not be less than 40 mm from the bottom of the duct. Covers of openings shall be constructed of the same material and thickness as the duct and shall be grease tight when in place by fitting ceramic fibre gaskets. Ducts shall be installed with a fall of not less than 1:200. Plugged drain point shall be provided at the lower point of each run of ducting.

16.0 FLEXIBLE DUCTING

Flexible ducting shall be supplied and fitted where shown in the Specification Drawings.

Flexible ducting shall be of the acoustic type with the equivalent of 25 mm thickness fibreglass of density 32 kg/cu m. A relatively smooth internal finish is preferred.

Flexible ducting shall be continuous between connections and shall be capable of bending, twisting, stretching under installation conditions, without denting or cracking. Maximum length of each section of flexible duct shall not exceed 4.0m.

Ductwork shall be suitable for the air pressure involved.

Flexible ducting shall be constructed such that it complies with the requirements for Class ‘O’ surface, when tested in accordance to BS 476: Part 6 and 7. Ducting shall

Page 167: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

DUCTWORK AND AIR DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT

TS(ACMV)/16

be approved by BCA and acceptable to the Architect. Contractor shall submit sample of flexible ducting for Architect’s review prior to commencement of work.

Flexible ducting shall be fixed to the sheet metal duct and diffusers by means of an approved self-locking worm-drive stainless steel clips. Each joint shall be taped with 50 mm self-adhesive, and fire resisting tape to ensure complete airtight joint.

17.0 LINEAR DIFFUSERS

Linear diffusers shall be provided at locations and of capacities as shown in the Specification Drawings.

Material shall be of galvanised steel construction minimum 26-gauge. Interior surfaces shall be lined with 12 mm thickness minimum coated fibreglass or scrimped mineral wool. The exterior surfaces shall be suitably prime etched to prevent rusting and shall be coated with anti-condensation films. The Architect shall reserve the right to reject the diffusers where rust is detected.

Diffusers shall be designed to effect high induction ratio of room air to supply air of variable supply air quantities. One or 2-way direction shall be used as shown in the Specification Drawings. Generally linear diffuser shall be 2 slots unless otherwise specified in the Specification Drawings. All slot edges shall be formed over, providing double thickness; all cut-edged shall be suitably treated against rusting taking into account that moist air-conditioned air will pass through the slot surfaces continuously.

The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a noise level guarantee in writing before placing the order.

The Contractor shall submit air flow characteristic of the diffusers showing clearly the diffusion air pattern for each type of diffuser for 100%, 75%, 50% and 40% of the designed air quantities.

The Contractor shall submit within four weeks from the day of award of the Contract the size, shape and constructional details of the diffusers to the Architect. All details shall be provided to ensure an accurate co-ordination with the ceiling grid system.

Exposed surfaces of slot(s) shall be finished to a colour approved by the Architect.

Approximate length of each diffuser shall be as shown in the Specification Drawings. However final length and overall width of the linear diffuser shall be co-ordinate with the ceiling system. For the purpose of Tender, the Contractor shall assume that the length may vary by +/- 50 mm from that indicated and all incidental cost for such adjustment to the diffuser length shall be deemed included in the Contract Price.

Sound power levels of linear diffusers shall be sufficiently low such that the noise levels as specified for the various spaces/areas are complied with.

Page 168: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/17

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall supply and install all pipe work in the positions generally as shown in the Specification Drawings. All pipe works shall be executed in an approved manner, avoiding as far as possible any interference with the work of other trades.

Water supply piping systems including all related equipment, fittings, valves, etc. shall be suitable for the working pressure shown in the Specification Drawings or 10.3 bar, whichever is the greater and shall also be suitable for the test pressure as specified elsewhere in this Specification.

Before delivery to site, all pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned, de-burred and free from scale, rust etc. Old and damaged pipes shall be rejected; only new pipes shall be used. On site, all pipes shall be again checked and thoroughly wire-brushed and prime coated prior to installation.

All exposed pipe works shall be installed so that clearance of approximately 80 mm is left between the outside of the pipe or insulation and the nearest wall, ceiling or equipment surface. Pipes shall be run at sufficient distance apart to enable them to be individually insulated and painted. Combined insulation of two or more pipes will not be approved. Pipe joints or fittings will not be permitted within the thickness of walls, floors, any partitions or below a beam.

All straight vertical run of pipe more than 30 m in length shall have dirt pockets formed from equal tees and plugs at the low point of the risers.

For all pipe connections to valves, strainers and equipment, flanged or screwed joints shall be used.

All elbows, tees and other pipe fittings shall be purpose-made by recognised manufacturers and samples shall be submitted for review by the Architect.

The minimum nominal pipe diameter to be used for all drain and air vent connections shall be 15 mm unless otherwise shown in the Specification Drawings. All drain pipes shall be terminated visibly over the floor grating provided for drainage purposes. Condensate shall drain to soil waste pipes unless shown otherwise in the Specification Drawings.

All fixing of pipe hangers or brackets to the building structure shall be by means of approved nylon or metal expansion plugs. Suitable receiving holes shall be cut by approved rotary-percussion electric drills to give true and accurate drilling.

Samples of each type of pipe hangers and pipe guide shall be submitted for review before commencement of installation.

2.0 WELDING

Welding shall be done only by capable, skilled and experienced first-class welders. Any welder may be asked by the Architect to carry out a test weld. Should the test

Page 169: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/18

weld not meet the required standard, the Architect shall have the authority demanding the removal of the welder from the site.

Welds in steel pipes shall be ‘V’ butt welds strictly in accordance with B.S. 2633. Radiographic test on welded joint will not be required.

All welds carried out shall bear the welder’s identification or code. The Contractor shall submit a list of names and identification or code of all welders employed and subsequently to revise the list whenever there is a change of welders working at site.

It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to supervise the welding such that no unlisted welders shall carry out any welding at site. Should the Architect have evidence to believe that any unlisted welder is working at site, he reserves the right to demand the removal of such welder from the site forthwith. All welds shall be thoroughly wire brushed after each welding.

Welding of galvanised steel pipe work shall be undertaken with special precautions. The welds shall be wire brushed and then painted with two coats of approved cold galvanising paint.

Immediately after the Architect is satisfied with the water testing of welded pipes, the pipe welds shall be cleaned, dried, thoroughly wire brushed again and a layer of primer coating applied.

3.0 PLUGS FOR OPEN PIPES

Any open ended pipe or pipe connection left over night or for any considerable period shall be protected from the entry of dirt, sand, etc., by the fixing of plastic or galvanised iron sheet cap securely held.

4.0 EXPANSION JOINTS AND ANCHORS

Wherever possible, advantage shall be taken of changes in direction of pipes to take up expansion and contraction due to temperature changes of the pipe and its contents. All vertical pipe supports/anchors shall be resiliently mounted with a layer of minimum 25 mm thick neoprene impregnated duck pads for loads above 0.35 MPa and up to 8.28 MPa (1200 psi). For loads up to 0.35 MPa (50 psi), two layers of 40 durometer, 8 mm thick neoprene waffle pads should be used.

All rigidly joined vertical pipes shall be anchored as required to control the movement of pipes due to thermal changes. One anchor shall be provided for each vertical pipe not exceeding 50m in length to resist movement due to expansion/contraction and the weight of the pipe and its content. Expansion joints must be provided between anchors.

Locations of expansion joints and pipe anchors shall be carefully planned to make suitable allowance for temperature variations from 4O Celsius to 40O Celsius in the case of chilled water pipes and temperature variations from 15O Celsius to 50O

Celsius in the case of condenser water pipes without causing undue stress in the pipe work and fittings.

Page 170: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/19

5.0 PIPE GUIDES

The Contractor shall supply and install pipe guides in vertical pipe work as specified, shown in the Specification Drawings or as and when necessary and directed by the Architect.

For pipes 150 mm diameter and under, pipe guides shall consist of a layer of minimum 8 mm thick, 40 durometer neoprene waffle pattern sleeve complete with steel frame for fixing to the walls, floor and support.

For pipes 200 mm and above, pipe guides shall consist of a clearance around the pipe as shown in the Standard Drawing. Suitable steel frame with approved neoprene mounts shall be provided around the circumference to allow for expansion of the pipe column. There shall be a physical clearance of 2 mm between the pipe column and the neoprene pads.

6.0 PIPE SLEEVES

Pipes passing through walls, floors or any other partitions shall be fitted with pipe sleeves. Sleeves for galvanised or black steel pipe shall be of galvanised pipe off-cuts; and sleeves for copper pipe shall be similar but of brass or copper. Cut edges of galvanised pipe sleeves shall be painted with zinc chromate paint.

Pipe sleeves fitted in walls or partitions shall end flush with the finished plaster or other surface finish.

Pipe sleeves fitted in floor shall generally end 15 mm above the finished floor level except in Plant Rooms and other areas where ‘wet floors’ are expected, in these cases the sleeves shall end 50 mm above the finished floor level, and tightly caulked with ceramic fibre blanket of not less than 96kg/m3 density.

Sleeves fitted on insulated pipes shall be over-sized to allow the insulation to be continued through them.

Where pipes pass through walls or plant rooms or fan rooms or fire brick walls or floor or other partitions, there shall be sufficient, subject to a minimum of 12 mm clearance all round the pipe and the cast-in sleeve to cater for linear and lateral (in the case of branch pipes) movement due to temperature changes. Ceramic fibre blanket of not less than 96 kg/m3 density should be inserted in between the clearance and both sides should be sealed and caulked airtight with non-setting resilient caulking compound. The pipe shall be supported on both sides of the penetration to maintain uniform clearance between the pipe and the cast-in sleeve.

Generally, pipe sleeves shall be one nominal diameter larger than the service pipe concerned except for sizes 100 mm bore and above where they may be specially constructed from not less than 4 mm galvanised sheet steel. In this case, the pipe sleeve shall give 12 mm clearance around the service pipes concerned including insulation sheathing.

Page 171: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/20

7.0 WALL PLATES

Where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings or any other internal partitions in occupied areas such as Offices, Toilets, etc. heavy chromium plated split rolled steel or brass hinged wall plates shall be provided and fixed after the painting and interior decorations are complete; such wall plates are not required within false ceiling space.

8.0 PIPE FIXINGS

Generally, hangers and supports shall be steel of adequate dimensions and designed to allow for expansion and contraction. All hangers and supports shall be primed and finished coated with black bituminous paint.

In all cases, cradles for pipes 150 mm and larger, and clamps for pipes below 150 mm diameter shall support the pipe independent of any lagging. Special care shall be taken with vapour seals and lagging to ensure they are continuous at points of support. Clamps shall be lined internally with 15 mm thickness neoprene strip.

All pipe works connected to pump sets, chillers and cooling towers, shall be isolated from the building structure by using flexible pipe hangers, anchors and pipe guides as specified in the Schedule of Vibration Isolation Equipment. No direct connection between the building structure and any part of the pipe work shall be allowed. Where pipes pass through walls or floors a clearance of 12 mm around the pipe shall be maintained. Where it is required to seal around the pipes vibration isolating packing shall be used.

Generally, all horizontal steel pipes shall be supported on cradles or by clevis type hangers or clamp type hangers with steel rod hangers and support spacing in accordance with the table below:

Nominal Pipe Dia. (mm) Max. Span (metres) Min. Rod Dia (mm)

Up to and including 50 2.0 10

63 to 89 3.0 13

100 to 150 4.0 20

200 to 300 3.0 20

350 to 400 3.0 22

450 to 600 2.0 22

Pipe hangers shall be placed not more than 600 mm from each change of direction where possible.

Vertical runs of pipes shall be supported by anchors.

Brass pipe clips or rings shall be used on all copper tube.

Samples of pipe hangers, supports and anchors shall be submitted to the Architect for review.

Page 172: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/21

Fixing of the chilled water pipes, condenser water pipes at the Main Plant Rooms and the main pipe risers shall be isolated from the structure by the use of special hangers as detailed hereunder unless otherwise stated in the Schedules and/or in the Specification Drawings:

.01 Within the Main Plant Rooms

These shall be steel spring in series with neoprene hangers/supports for the first three pipe hangers on all pipes nearest to equipment. For horizontal pipe work beyond the first three spring hangers, double deflection neoprene in shear isolator hangers/supports loaded to minimum 6 mm static deflection shall be provided.

.02 Outside the Main Plant Rooms

These shall be of the double deflection neoprene in shear isolator hangers/supports loaded to minimum 6 mm static deflection.

.03 Main Pipe Risers

These shall be supported by anchors as specified elsewhere.

9.0 AIR VENTS AND DRAINS

All pipe works shall be graded up towards air vents and down towards drains and traps in the direction of flow to a minimum of 1 in 500 in accordance with the requirements of the particular service.

In addition to those shown in the Specification Drawings, automatic air vents shall be provided at the top of each loop in all pipe work, and shall be complete with isolating cock, and tail pipe arranged for visible discharge to the nearest suitable floor drain.

All portions of equipment and drip trays, etc. in which water may be collected, shall be drained to nearest waste outlet with copper pipes. Drains shall be connected to equipment with unions to facilitate cleaning and removal.

10.0 TYPE OF PIPEWORK

The types and quality of all pipe work used shall comply with the following schedule:

.01 Refrigerant pipe works shall be of copper to B.S. 2871.

.02 Chilled water pipe work - up to and including 150 mm bore pipes shall be black mild steel to B.S. 1387, medium gauge. Sizes above 150 mm shall be of black mild steel to API 5L (Standard Weight).

Page 173: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/22

.03 Condenser water pipe work shall be as described in sub-paragraph (ii) hereof, but shall be galvanised. The galvanising of pipes shall be carried out by the pipe manufacturer.

.04 Condensate drain pipes up to and including 32 mm bore shall be of copper to BS EN 1057: 1996 for installation above false ceiling, in plant rooms & cooling tower decks. All drain pipes shall not be less than 25mm diameter. For condensate drain droppers installed in pipe shaft, AHU Room, etc. hub less cast iron pipes shall be used.

.05 Air vent pipe work shall be of galvanised steel to B.S. 1387 medium grade.

For all pipe connections to valves, strainers and equipment, flanged or screwed joints shall be used. All screwed joints shall be made with Teflon thread sealing tape; hemp or similar organic substance shall not be used.

11.0 STEEL PIPE JOINTING

For black steel pipe work, all joints up to and including 65 mm diameter shall be made by means of screwed connections. Pipes 80 mm diameter and above shall be joined by means of welding.

For galvanising steel pipe work, joints up to and including 65 mm diameter shall be made by means of screwed or flanged connections. Pipes 80 mm diameter and above shall be joined by means of flanged connections.

In all cases where pipes are joined to flanged equipment, the appropriate mating flanges shall be used.

12.0 FLANGES FOR STEEL PIPES

Flanges in accordance with B.S. 4504 shall be mild steel. All flanged joints shall be flushed and aligned, and shall be made with corrugated jointing rings, coated on both sides with the recommended jointing compound. All bolts shall be hexagonal-headed steel in accordance with B.S. 916 with washer and nuts.

13.0 STEEL PIPE FITTINGS

In all cases, galvanised pipe fittings shall be used on galvanised pipe work and black pipe fittings on black steel pipe work.

In general, all fittings shall be of the malleable iron type, but in all cases entirely suited to the working and test pressures of the circuit concerned.

On all changes of directions, proprietary made elbows and tees shall be used. Bends, offsets and other pipe fittings formed by welding together segmented pieces will be rejected. Short fill-in sections of piping less than 150 mm long shall not be welded in to any pipe run.

Page 174: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/23

Reduction in diameter for through-flow pipes shall be made by means of reducing sockets for vertical pipes only; for horizontal connections to pump suction, eccentric reducing sockets shall be used.

14.0 COPPER PIPE JOINTING AND FITTINGS

All copper pipes work up to and including 40 mm diameter shall be joined by means of brazing or compression fittings. Copper pipe work 50 mm diameter and above shall be jointed by means of brazing connections. At terminal joints to equipment flanged joints shall be used to facilitate maintenance, dismantling and repair.

All brazed joints shall be made using silver brazing alloy filler metal in accordance with BS EN 1044: 1999. Under no circumstances will the use of an acid based flux or fluid be permitted. After brazed joints are made, they shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed to remove all traces of residues before installation.

Flanges in accordance with B.S. 4504 shall be of gunmetal. Flanged joints shall be flush and aligned and shall utilise corrugated jointing rings, coated on both sides with the recommended jointing compound. Flanges shall be brazed to the pipes.

All copper fittings shall be of the capillary or compression type. In all cases the type of fittings used shall be entirely suited for their application. Where capillary fittings are used they shall have built-in solder rings, thereby requiring only flux and heat to make a truly clean joint. Bends may be pulled as necessary, but in all cases, a proper bending machine with formers for the varying pipe diameters shall be used to produce bends entirely free from buckling. Reduction tees may be brazed into the larger pipes if agreed by the Architect. In these cases great care must be taken to ensure the hole cut in the larger pipe has the required matching contour curve. Oversized holes filled in with filler metal by brazing will not be permitted.

If called upon to do so, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, samples of copper fittings and specimens of brazed joints for review before any work is carried out.

15.0 VALVES, COCKS ETC. GENERAL

All valves, cocks, etc. shall be suitable for the working and test pressure of the system concerned. Valve flanges shall be in accordance with B.S. 4504 as specified for their respective service pipe work. The nominal bore of any valve shall not be less than the bore of the pipe to which it is fitted.

Valves shall be fitted in accessible positions for operation and repair. The connection between each valve and the adjacent equipment shall be made with a union or a flange for ease of dismantling.

Valve spindles shall be adequately lubricated with graphite, and all glands shall be freshly packed before installation. All valves in main plant rooms shall be of the external spindle type. All valves shall be fitted with hand-wheels.

Where possible, all valves supplied and fitted shall be of the same manufacture.

Page 175: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/24

Control valves shall be supplied only by manufacturer of control equipment.

All valves, cocks, etc. for water supply or other services shall comply with the requirements of the PUB. Where valves are located more than 2 m above floor level or in an inaccessible location, they shall be operated by chain mechanism.

Valves used for working pressure more than 19 bars shall be of the flanged cast steel type. The materials with which valves and valves bodies, used for lower working pressure, are manufactured shall be as specified in the following clauses.

16.0 ISOLATING VALVES

Gate valves up to and including 80 mm diameter shall be of gunmetal and shall have female screwed connections when fitted to steel pipes. Valves for copper pipe shall be of brass and shall have compression type connections for a size up to and including 40 mm diameter. Such valves shall be of the full way, split wedge disc pattern and with non-rising spindles made of high tensile steel and fitted with detachable cast iron hand wheel.

Valves of 100 mm diameter and above when fitted to steel pipes shall be of the flanged cast iron type, with inside screws solid wedge and with high tensile steel spindles fitted with detachable cast iron hand wheel.

Valves of 50 mm diameter and above when fitted to copper pipes shall be flanged and these flanges shall be similar to those specified for steel pipe work.

17.0 GLOBE VALVES

Globe valves shall be supplied and so fitted for proper balancing and water flow control. They shall be of the globe pattern, screwed gunmetal for sizes up to and including 80 mm diameter. Globe valves 100 mm diameter and above shall be of the flanged cast iron type. For copper pipe work, the relevant details specified earlier for isolating valves shall be applicable.

18.0 DRAIN COCKS

Gunmetal drain cocks shall be provided as and when necessary to ensure that all sections for the pipe work and plant can be effectively drained. The sizes of drain cocks shall be as follows:

Pipe work and Plant Size of Drain Cock

.1 Tanks, Plant and pipes not less than 25 dia mm above 150 mm diameter .2 Pipes up to 125 mm 15 mm diameter

All drain cocks shall be complete with hose unions for draining down.

Page 176: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/25

19.0 RELIEF VALVES

Relief and safety valves when fitted to pipe work shall be of the “Enclosed Spring Loaded” gunmetal type with outlet pipes terminating at 150 mm above floor level.

20.0 CHECK VALVES

Check valves shall be of the spring loaded non-slamming type. They shall be of gunmetal and shall have female screwed connections for sizes up to and including 80 mm diameter. For sizes of 100 mm diameter and above, they shall be of the flanged cast iron type with bronze discs.

The Sub-Contractor is required to select these valves in relation to the velocity of the water in the pipe. In all cases valves are required to operate silently on reversal of water flow.

21.0 VARIABLE PRESSURE CONSTANT FLOW VALVES

Automatic flow control valves for flow rates of 0.5 litres/sec or higher, shall be of the floating piston type through which the changes of pressure differential across the valve will actuate the piston to vary the discharge orifice area to maintain constant flow as specified in the Schedules. Pressure drop across such valves shall not exceed 300 mbar. All flow control cartridges shall be interchangeable. If necessary, two or more constant flow valves shall be installed in parallel to maintain constant flow as required.

Automatic flow control valves for flow rates less than 0.5 litres/sec may be used in conjunction with fan coil units. Such valves shall contain factory calibrated spring-loaded metering pin to maintain constant flow as specified in the Schedules. Pressure drop across the valve shall not exceed 200 mbar.

22.0 BALL FLOAT VALVES

All ball float valves shall be supplied and fitted complete with back-nuts, ball float and arm. Ball floats may be of soldered copper or brass or alternatively of polythene PVC. They shall be of the low pressure type generally and comply with B.S. 1212.

23.0 STRAINERS

Strainers shall be the ‘Y’ type complete with removable metal strainer screen not greater than 56 mesh. Strainers up to and including 80 mm diameter shall be of the screwed brass type. Strainers of 100 mm diameter and above shall be of the cast iron type and flanged. All cast-iron strainers shall be fitted with integral ball valves for draining.

Page 177: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/26

24.0 PRESSURE GAUGES

Pressure gauges shall be of the 100 mm diameter brass cased type. They shall be designed for pipe mounting and be calibrated in mbar.

All pressure gauges shall be of the Bourbon tube type and selected for normal operating point to be at mid-point of the scale. All pressure gauges shall be provided with suitable gauge cocks and snubbers to prevent vibration of its needle. Pressure gauges shall conform to BS 1780.

25.0 THERMOMETERS

Thermometers shall be of glass stem industrial heavy duty type fitted in metal case. Thermometers shall be designed for pipe mounting and complete with pipe well. Calibration shall be in Celsius. Measuring range shall be suitable for the particular service. Thermometers used in conjunction with chilled water pipe work shall be rejected if condensation should occur at the glass face plate.

26.0 ANTI-VIBRATION COUPLING

Piping connections to all pumps, chillers, fan coil units, air handling units etc. shall be by means of wire or fabric reinforced, high pressure moulded convoluted rubber connections unless otherwise shown in the Specification Drawings. Fittings shall have integral rubber flanges and be bolted onto pipe flanges. Suitable devices shall be provided to limit elongation of the fitting.

27.0 UPVC PIPE

Unplasticised PVC (uPVC) pipe work shall be to B.S. 3505 and installed complete with standard moulded fittings. Sample of pipes and fittings shall be submitted to the Architect for review.

UPVC pipes shall be odourless type and shall not taint and shall be suitable for the service and duty specified. UPVC pipes shall be resistant to all external and internal corrosion and shall not attack or be subject to attack by insects and rodents. Pipe material shall be suitable for use with thermal insulating materials and vapour sealing compounds specified elsewhere in the Specification.

Pipe runs shall be fabricated using cemented sockets, bushes, bends, elbows and tees but flanged or screwed joints shall be used at connections to plant items and valves. Sufficient additional flanged joints shall be provided to facilitate maintenance and dismantling as directed by the Architect.

Generally pipe fixing shall be in accordance with the clause on “Pipe Fixings” and particular care and attention shall be paid to the greater degree of expansion and contraction of uPVC pipes in comparison with that of metal pipes. Hangers or supports spacing shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations but in any case shall not exceed the following:

Page 178: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/27

Up to and including 40 mm bore .... 1 m apart 50 mm bore to 80 mm bore .... 1.5 m apart 100 mm bore to 150 mm bore .... 2 m apart

Valves, cocks, etc. for uPVC piping systems shall be (as specified in the appropriate clauses of these Specifications) applicable to uPVC pipes. UPVC pipes shall be flange connected to metal valves and metal systems. Screwed connections will not be accepted but composite unions or special adaptors may be used.

28.0 ORIFICE PLATES

Orifice plates shall be of stainless steel and complete with orifice carriers, matching flanges, gaskets, flange bolts, etc. Tapping points shall be provided at both upstream and downstream of the orifice plates and shall be made in strict accordance with B.S. 1042 Part 1 and associated amendments.

29.0 FLOW METER

The flow meter shall be of the direct reading type and shall consist basically of an accurately calibrated resistor which converts the orifice pressure drop into flow rate directly proportional to the main flow. The indicator float shall also be of the stainless steel. Isolating valves shall be provided at inlets and outlets of the flow meter. Flow meter for cooling tower make-up water lines shall be PUB-approved cumulative water meter.

30.0 EARTHING OF RISER PIPES

Earthing bosses shall be provided at the top and bottom of each condenser water pipe risers and earthed to the respective pump set electrical earthing system.

Earthing bosses shall be of the same material as the pipe to which they are connected, and shall be welded to the pipes in an accessible and approved location, suitable for connection to the earthing system. Bosses shall be 50 mm diameter with 10 mm diameter clear hole and 7 mm deep.

31.0 LABELLING

Directional arrows and symbols - 25 mm black lettering on yellow background or as approved by the Architect, shall be used on all pipe work throughout the installations. All arrows shall indicate the direction of flow of water in the pipe. Such arrows and symbols shall be located on each pipe between each floor level and throughout plant rooms in positions to the approval of the Architect.

Page 179: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PIPINGS, VALVES AND FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER)

TS(ACMV)/28

Symbols shall be as follows unless otherwise approved:

Description Symbol

Chilled Water Flow CHWF

Chilled Water Return CHWR

Condenser Water Flow CWF

Condenser Water Return CWR

Condensate Water CW

Suction Line SL

Liquid Line LL

All valves larger than 100 mm diameter shall be fitted with engraved brass labels indicating the valve duty. The label shall be mounted on top of the valve and screwed onto the hand wheel or level nut.

Page 180: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS

TS(ACMV)/29

1.0 ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS(EAC)

Electronic air cleaners shall be installed in the return air duct of the air conditioning system for the spaces as shown on the drawings or defined as bars, discos or lounges. The EACs offered shall be Underwriter Laboratories Listed and/or Canadian Standards Association certified and approved for use in Singapore by the relevant authorities. The efficiency rating of the equipment shall be determined by ASHRAE Standards 52-76.

The EACs shall be designed for 240 v, 50Hz operation with ground. The EAC shall be selected for airflow shown on the plans and sized for an efficiency of 95% for particles of 0.01 micron.

The EAC shall base on the principle of two (2) stage electrostatic precipitation: the first stage being the lonizer section and the second stage being the Collector SECTION. The EAC offered shall have a galvanised cabinet, permanently lubricated ball-bearing fan motor, heavy duty commercially med electronic cells, and solid state power supply, protective screens/pre-filters etc.

The solid state power supply shall provide high voltage (DC) to the lonizer section and to the Collector section. It shall be self-regulating without being affected by moderate fluctuations of the input voltage. It shall have a safety interlock switch which automatically interrupts power to prevent operation when the access door or grille is opened. The interlock switch shall be recessed to prevent accidental powering of the high voltage power supply, fan motor during normal maintenance. The EAC shall have a high voltage on the electronic cells. It shall have a status indication light to indicate proper power operation. All light indication and access door/grille shall be sited towards the front of the EAC or near side for easy access.

The lonizer section and the Collector Section shall be contained in the electronic cell. The lonizer section and the Collector section of each electronic cell shall have at least nine (9) ionizing wires and seventy-two (72) collector plates respectively.

The air intake and discharge grille, the prefilter and the electronic cells shall be removable for cleaning without the use of tools. The electronic cells shall have a handle to prevent damage during handing. The power supply shall be capable of being removed from the unit without removing the electronic cells.

The duct mounted EAC shall be able to be monitored remotely by means of a Solid State Performance Indicator (SSPI) and shall have LEDs that display On/Off status, WASH and check indicator. The subcontractor shall provide voltage-free contacts at the ITB for the abovementioned points for BMS monitoring.

The ON/Off operation shall be controlled by interlocking with the AHU operation. As air is paned through the EAC, bigger particles are to be trapped by the protective screen/prefilters. The air is then cleared of the particles by the electronic cells.

When the deposit on the collector plates gets concentrated, an auto-wash indication light shall give early indication that servicing of the electronic cells is required.

Page 181: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

INSULATION AND PAINTING

TS(ACMV)/30

1.0 THERMAL INSULATION

All insulation work shall be carried out by skilled and experience craftsmen and special attention paid to the final coating of insulation that will be on view; all plane surfaces shall be trowel to a truly smooth surface and all pipe insulation shall be finished using purpose made metal formers as necessary for a clean, smooth unlined surface.

All cold valves, strainers, flanges, pump volutes and other fittings shall be insulated as necessary as detailed for the pipe insulation and securely held in position by purpose made galvanised sheet steel or aluminium split case boxes with non-corrosive screws. A sample of one of these boxes shall be submitted to the Architect for review before final manufacture commenced.

All insulation shall be applied as whole continuous pieces. The Architect reserves the right to order the partial or complete replacement of any section of insulation or call for further skin-finishing coats where in his opinion the work is of sub-standard nature. This work shall be carried out by the Sub-Contractor at no extra cost.

All insulation work shall be carried out after the particular section or run of the pipe work has been successfully tested and the Tenderer’s attention is called to the correct choice of adhesive materials, its adaptability and correct method of usage when combined with other materials. Samples of the typical finished insulation on sheets of 300 mm x 300 mm x 3 mm steel plate shall be submitted to the Architect for review before insulation work is carried out.

All internal insulation to ductwork shall be fabricated off site, unless otherwise approved.

.01 Factory Assembled Plant

The factory assembled plant shall be insulated as recommended by the manufacturers and as specified earlier. This insulation shall be applied at the manufacturer’s factory and only as necessary on site during or after installation. Should this insulation appear inadequate in the opinion of the Architect, he reserves the right to call for its partial or complete removal and repair or replacement by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Employer.

.02 Chilled Water Pipe Work

The whole of the refrigeration pipe lines including gas suction line, all fittings, valve and strainer bodies, flanges, etc. on the refrigeration equipment shall be insulated with 50 mm thickness fire-resisting sectional foam with surface of Class ‘D’ having an aluminium foil jacket with vapour permeable of less than 500 ug/Ns and approved by the local Authorities.

All surfaces over which the insulation is to be applied shall be dry and grease free. A 100 mm wide strip of vapour barrier shall be glued over each joint with an approved vapour seal adhesive.

Page 182: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

INSULATION AND PAINTING

TS(ACMV)/31

Each section of the insulation shall be secured by not less than three 15 mm galvanised metal straps at not more than 1 metre centres.

The entire pipe network shall be finished with a 26 B.G. galvanised steel sheath held in position by means of galvanised metal bonding straps at not more than 1 metre centres. Care shall be taken not to penetrate the vapour barrier. Joints shall be reviewed by the Architect.

The sheathing shall be then primed and painted two coats as specified in the Schedule of Colours.

.03 Thermal Insulation for Chilled Water Pipe Works

The whole of the refrigeration pipe lines including gas suction line, all fittings valve and strainer bodies, flanges, etc. on the refrigeration equipment shall be insulated with minimum 12mm thickness sectional Arma-flex insulation. The insulation shall completely cover the pipe surfaces to also act as a vapour seal. Refrigerant gas suction line running in the roof attic space shall be insulated with two (2) layers of minimum 12mm thickness insulations as specified above.

All surfaces over which the insulation is to be applied shall be dry and grease free.

.04 Ductwork

All air-conditioning supply and return air duct work, unless internally insulated, shall be externally insulated with non-combustible semi-rigid fibreglass of density 24 kg/m3 minimum or mineral wool blanket of 32 to 64 kg/m3 density, with a thermal conductivity not greater than 0.035 W/m oCelsius. The insulation shall be held in position to the ductwork by gluing with a layer of “Flintcote” of 1.0 mm thickness. Where the dimension of the ductwork exceed 300 mm the insulation shall be held securely with pins or studs suitably glued to the duct and retained by washers; the pins or studs shall be provided at 300 mm centres, except for insulation to top of horizontal duct runs.

The insulation shall be wrapped with fibreglass reinforced double-sided aluminium foil as vapour barrier of less than 550 ug/Ns; fibreglass reinforcement shall be not greater than 25 mm mesh. All aluminium foil shall be of Class 0 surface flame spread when tested in accordance with methods specified in the Code of Practice for Fire Precautions for Buildings (current edition) and shall be approved by the local Authorities. All joints of the reinforced aluminium foil shall be overlapped (minimum 80 mm) and then sealed with an approved self-adhesive reinforced aluminium foil tapes 80 mm wide.

Unless otherwise noted insulation thickness shall be 25 mm thickness except for all areas directly below roofs or plant rooms where 50 mm thickness is required. Insulation of 50 mm thickness is also required for all ducts running through non-air-conditioned areas, or running outside the Building.

Page 183: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

INSULATION AND PAINTING

TS(ACMV)/32

Flexible connection to ductwork shall be insulated with glass fibre mats and finished with approved vapour barrier.

The insulation on all ducts where exposed to weather shall unless otherwise specified be super coated with 15 mm hard setting mineral fibre cement, similar to B.I. No 450 Insulation Cement, applied in two coats and reinforced using 15 mm wire mesh trowel to a clean smooth finish and painted to approval.

All access doors shall be insulated as specified for the ductwork for the appropriate areas as above, except that galvanised steel sheathing shall be provided and the insulation shall be bevelled clear to allow the doors to be easily opened for frequent inspection. Similar bevelling is to be used around holes cut for testing and commissioning purposes, thermostatic control equipment, and at the edges of all insulation works; approved type insulation cap shall be installed over cut holes, etc. with suitable holding clips.

The insulation on all ducts exposed to view shall be sheathed with 0.45 mm thick galvanised iron sheathing held in position by means of 25 mm wide by 0.45 mm thick galvanised iron strips at 1 metre centres. Care shall be taken not to penetrate the vapour barrier.

The joints of all ducts exposed to the weather shall be suitably treated and made waterproof to the satisfaction of the Architect.

.05 Pipe Work

All pipes exposed to view shall be painted with 1 coat of primer and 2 top coats of hard gloss finish paint. All pipes exposed to weather or corrosive air shall be specially treated and painted with suitable anti-corrosion paint. The colour of all exposed pipes shall be to Architect’s approval.

The whole of the chilled water distribution pipe work and condensate pipes shall be insulated with preformed sectional insulation of closed cell phenolic foam of density 35 kg/m3 having double sided aluminium foil jacket as vapour barrier of less than 550 ug/Ns. Aluminium foil shall be approved by the local Authorities. Thermal conductivity of insulation shall not be greater than 0.035 W/m degrees Celsius at 10oC mean temperature.

Insulation thickness for chilled water pipes shall not be less than the dimensions given in the following schedule:

Nominal Pipe Diameter (mm) Insulation Thickness (mm)

Up to and including 25 25

32 to 65 40

80 to 150 50

200 to 400 65

Chilled water pipes which are routed through non-air-conditioned areas shall

Page 184: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

INSULATION AND PAINTING

TS(ACMV)/33

be provided with insulation 15 mm thicker than listed above.

Insulation for all condensate drain pipes shall be 25 mm thick.

All surfaces over which insulation is to be applied shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, scale and dust.

Insulation shall be applied with an approved non-inflammable adhesive. This adhesive shall be applied to the surfaces and joints and shall be compatible with the insulation.

Each section of the insulation shall be secured by not less than 15 mm galvanised metal straps at 600 mm centres.

Joints of aluminium foil vapour barrier shall be overlapped 80 mm minimum and sealed with an approved self-adhesive aluminium tape of minimum 80 mm width.

For all pipes, suitable vapour seals shall be applied at minimum 6 m centres to limit the extent of water penetration in the event of physical damage.

Valves, flanges, bends and other pipe fittings, where sectional insulation cannot be fitted shall use carved block of insulation with ends and inner surfaces applied with an approved non-flammable adhesive held together by galvanised metal straps. The insulation shall then be covered with 0.10 mm aluminium foil and to the approval by the local Authorities, wrapped or crinkled in place and overlapped with 80 mm minimum lapping with adjoining vapour barrier.

All insulated chilled water pipes in plant rooms or where exposed to view shall be sheathed with 26 B.G. galvanised steel sheathing held in position by means of 25 mm wide x 26 B.G. galvanised iron strips at 1 metre centres. Care shall be taken not to penetrate the vapour barrier. All joints shall be reviewed by the Architect.

All pipe supports for chilled water pipelines shall be fixed around the outside of the insulation except anchors where direct contact must be made with the pipe. To prevent the supporting band passing through the insulation approved heavy density Phenolic foam sections of the same thickness as above shall be used at these points. The supporting bands shall be elongated on pipes of 80 mm diameter and over and 16 B.G. galvanised sheet steel sheathing joined with suitable self taping screws shall be fixed over the insulation and under the support. Wood shall not be used in anyway for supports or insulation.

.06 Thermal Insulation for Condensate Drain Pipes

All condensate drain pipe shall be similarly insulated as for refrigerant pipe work.

Page 185: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

INSULATION AND PAINTING

TS(ACMV)/34

2.0 ACOUSTIC INSULATION - DUCTWORK

The Contractor shall install acoustic insulation of thickness and length as shown in Specification Drawings. The internal insulation material shall be fibreglass of not less than 48 kg/m3 density or Rockwood of not less than 64 kg/m3 density and faced with 24 B.G. galvanised steel perforated sheet of minimum 30% net free area. The lining and facing material shall be suitable for velocities up to 10 m/s without erosion of the lining.

Notwithstanding the above, all supply and return air ductwork for air handling units and ventilation fans shall be internally lined for a minimum distance of 3m from the fans and AHU’s and with a minimum thickness of 50mm unless otherwise specified.

Internal insulation and perforated metal shall be fastened to the interior of the duct by pins or studs suitably glued to the duct and shall be retained by spring washers. Internally insulated ductwork shall be fabricated off-site unless otherwise approved. Pins or studs shall be provided at least 150 mm centres on the top surfaces, 250 mm centres on the vertical surfaces and 300 mm centres on the bottom, and staggered in the longitudinal direction.

Where the duct dimension exceeds 450 mm at the longer side, 24 B.G. galvanised corner angles shall be fitted.

3.0 PROTECTION OF FINISHES

All polished or chromium plated iron or steel-works shall have at least 1-coat of protective finish at the manufacturer’s works and the Sub-Contractor shall maintain this preservative until the work is finally painted or put into use.

4.0 PAINTING AND PROTECTION

The following items shall be painted to colours approved by the Architect:

.01 Ductwork, sleeves and sheet metal casings

.02 Diffusers and grilles

.03 Pipe and duct insulation

.04 Electrical conduits, electrical trunkings and cable trays

.05 Unprotected metal work

.06 Screw heads and means of fixing

.07 Suppliers items

.08 Galvanised steel

.09 Special applications

Page 186: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

INSULATION AND PAINTING

TS(ACMV)/35

Before any painting is carried out the Contractor shall ensure that the surface to be painted is clean, free of grease and rust as recommended by the paint manufacturers. If necessary, degreasing and de-rusting shall be carried out.

Each coat of paint shall be applied by brush and when thoroughly dry, smoothed with suitable abrasive paper or cloth before the next coat is applied.

No painting or drying should be carried out in direct sunlight and due care shall be taken during dusty or wet conditions.

Should any corrosion, or signs of faulty painting workmanship become apparent during the Maintenance Period the Contractor will be required to remove the defective paint work or component part at his own cost and retreat and/or repaint it as directed and to the satisfaction of the Architect.

Painting shall be carried out as follows:

.01 All un-lagged ductwork and internally insulated ductwork and associated metal casings, sleeve boxes, etc. which is exposed to view shall be painted as follows:

a. - primer coat b. - top coats hard gloss finish paint

.02 All diffusers, registers and grilles of steel construction are to be delivered to site with a baked-on paint finish. Painting shall consist of at least 1 primer coat, one (1) undercoat and two (2) finish coats all to the Architect’s approval. Furthermore, all duct internal surfaces behind diffusers and grilles shall be painted matt black.

.03 All pipe and duct insulation in the plant room and where exposed to view shall be painted as detailed under 1.

.04 All electrical conduits, electrical trunkings and cable trays shall be painted with two (2) finishing coats to orange colour or any other colours as may be instructed by the Architect.

.05 All unprotected concealed metal work shall be painted two (2) coats of bituminous paint, care shall be taken in the choice of this paint in regard to its melting point and adhesive properties.

.06 All screw heads, wing nut and other means of fixing shall be painted at the time of installation and re-finished after the final testing and commissioning is complete.

.07 All manufactured items that are delivered in a painted condition, whether under or finish coated, shall be prepared as mentioned above and re-painted. Special care shall be taken with the painting of the underside of pumps, bases, etc. A layer of bituminous material or roofing felt shall be laid on the base before the item is installed and then trimmed to size.

Page 187: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

INSULATION AND PAINTING

TS(ACMV)/36

.08 All cut ends of galvanised steel or sheet metal work shall be prepared as specified herein and painted with two (2) coats of zinc chromate paint.

.09 All items that are considered liable to oil or grease splashes shall be finished painted using two (2) - coats of appropriate oil proof paint.

All items subject to corrosive air or other hazardous conditions shall be specially treated and painted with suitable anti-corrosive paint as recommended by the manufacturers.

Colour schemes for various services, ducts and pipes shall be in accordance with the Schedule of Colours thereof or as otherwise directed by the Architect.

5.0 SCHEDULE OF COLOURS

B.S. 381C Colour No

B.S. 2260 Colour No

(i) Insulated and un-insulated ductwork and fittings Manila 367 3-040

(ii) Condenser cooling water flow pipe to cooling tower White - -

(iii) Condenser cooling water return pipe to condenser Primrose 310 4-055

(iv) Chilled water return pipe Middle Blue 109 0-013

(v) Chilled water flow pipe Artic Blue 112 7-084

(vi) Make-up water pipe ‘Light’ Green - 6-071

(vii) Refrigerant Discharge Lines

Post Office Red 538 0-006

(viii) Refrigerant Suction Lines ‘Dark’ Green - 6-073

(xi) Refrigerant Liquid Lines Black - -

(x) Oil Lines Middle Brown 411 3-045

(xi) Condensate Drain Lines Black - -

Page 188: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PAINTING

TS(ACMV)/37

1.0 GENERAL

This section of the Specification covers the painting of all equipment, pipe work, valves hangers, brackets, water tanks, etc. installed under other sections of the Specification. The work involved includes but shall not be limited to the supply and application of paint, thinners, identification labels, etc. unless specifically excluded elsewhere in this Specification.

2.0 PAINT

All paints supplied and applied to the various surfaces shall be suitable for the surface to be painted and shall be best quality of an approved manufactured.

They shall be delivered to the site in the marker's containers with the seal, etc., unbroken the marker's name or trademark and contents and colour clearly marked.

The paints used must be proven for use in tropical climate.

All material for multiple cost work, e.g. primers, undercoating and finishing paints shall be obtained from the same manufacturer and shall be those re- commended by the manufacturer as suitable for application together and for the type and duty of surfaces concerned.

3.0 PAINTING PROCEDURES

No painting on exterior work to be done during wet weather, or upon surfaces that is not thoroughly clean and dry.

During the execution of painter's work the Sub-Contractor is responsible for taking all precautions necessary for the health and safety of his workmen.

The paint shall be kept stirred during use and when more than one coat is specified, subsequent coats shall not be applied until preceding coats have thoroughly hardened.

4.0 SURFACE PREPARATION

All works before painting shall be thoroughly cleaned down to remove all dirt, grease, and scale rust, powdery residues by wire brushing, scrapping or other means. Surfaces shall be washed with solvent to remove oil/grease and with water to remove powdery residues. After any cleaning treatment, sufficient time shall be allowed for the surface to dry.

All painting shall be carried out within seven (7) days of delivery and erection on site. These requirements shall be strictly complied with.

Page 189: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

PAINTING

TS(ACMV)/38

5.0 METAL SURFACES

All metal surfaces shall be painted. Premier for metal surfaces shall be red lead or chromate metal primer or other approved equivalent. If the primer has thoroughly dried, apply one undercoat of appropriate shade, allow at least twenty-four (24) hours drying time under normal weather conditions before application of each subsequent finishing coat. Finishing coat shall be high gloss enamel paint. All galvanised steel surface shall be primed with zinc chromate before application of the finishing coats.

All metal surfaces shall be given a minimum of two (2) finishing coats.

All brackets, supports, pipe-works etc., must be primed before installation. Where possible, the first finishing coat shall applied before installation and the final finishing coat shall be applied after the installation is completed.

6.0 PIPE WORK

All pipe-work shall be painted as described under "METAL SURFACEI”

All underground pipe work shall be painted with two (2) coats of approved type bituminous based paint for corrosion protection and over wrapped with anti-corrosion proprietary tapping similar to "DENSO" or "RUSTOL" or approved equivalent.

7.0 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPELINES

The direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow STENCILLED in black/white paint diameter.

- Min. 75mm in length for pipes 50mm diameter and under

- Min. 15Omm in length for pipes above 50mm diameter

8.0 COLOUR SCHEMES

Colour schemes of all painting works on pipe work and equipment installed under this Contract shall be as directed by the Architect.

Page 190: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

BALANCING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

TS(ACMV)/39

1.0 TESTING APPARATUS

The Contractor shall have in his possession all the necessary testing equipment to carry out the complete balancing, testing and commissioning of the installation. The minimum testing equipment he is expected to have are set out below:

1 - Combined mounted maximum and minimum thermometer

1 - Vane anemometer with case

1 - Recorder (with daily/weekly charts) for temperature and humidity

1 - Mounted degree Celsius dry bulb thermometer

1 - Mounted degree Celsius wet bulb sling psychro-meter

1 - Sound level meter with octave-band frequency analyzer

1 - Meter-recorder for measuring liquid flow rate through orifice plates

1 - Set portable air flow measuring station of +/- 5% accuracy

1 - Tachometer/stroboscope for measuring rpm

The Contractor shall not include the costs of this testing equipment in the Contract as this testing equipment shall remain the properties of the Contractor.

All testing, apparatus as well as measuring instruments, gauges, recorders, etc. which are specified and installed under this Contract, shall be calibrated to the Architect’s satisfaction. Calibration certificates issued by independent test laboratories acceptable to the Architect shall be submitted when required by the Architect.

2.0 REGULATION AND PERFORMANCE TEST

All balancing, testing and commissioning shall comply with all by-laws, rules and requirements of the local Authorities. After completion of each and every section of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect two (2) copies of all test results with the method of testing stated clearly. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to seek approval from the Architect for the method of testing. The Contractor shall then give a minimum of fourteen (14) days notice to the Architect or to the Employer to verify the test results on site and the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Architect that the installation is adjusted and regulated correctly to fulfil the function for which it has been designed, e.g. room temperature and relative humidity to be maintained, air quantity to be handled, etc. and the Contractor shall adjust, balance and regulate the section concerned as and when directed to do so by the Architect or the Employer until the required conditions are obtained.

Page 191: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

BALANCING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

TS(ACMV)/40

Should the Architect or the Employer find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements demonstrated to him on site, the Contractor shall be required to repeat the tests. Tests shall be repeated to the satisfaction of the Architect or of the Employer at no additional cost to the Employer.

Room temperatures and humilities shall be measured by recording instruments located 1.5 m above floor level at points away from the influence of draught or direct radiation from hot or cold surfaces, whilst air quantities shall be measured by the Volumeter or Anemometer. Room temperatures at all areas shall be maintained within +/- 1 degree Celsius of the design indoor dry bulb temperature as stated elsewhere in the Specification.

Demonstration of room temperatures shall be carried out when the external air temperature is at or above the design outdoor dry bulb temperature as specified elsewhere in the Specification.

The duration of the tests will be at the discretion of the Architect or the Employer and all recording charts including those of the outdoor condition during the tests shall be submitted to him for approval.

3.0 RELIABILITY TESTS

When the preparatory tests have been concluded successfully and the Contractor has notified the Architect that the installation is ready to work, each section of the installation shall be required to operate either continuously or intermittently as required for a period of one calendar month without failure of any kind before the “Certificate of Practical Completion” of the Works will be issued.

Should any failure occur due to, or arising from, faulty design, unsatisfactory materials or workmanship sufficient to prevent the commercial use of the installation, the reliability test period of one calendar month shall be recommenced after the Contractor has remedied the said faults to the satisfaction of the Architect.

The onus of proving that any failure is due to any other cause shall rest with the Contractor.

4.0 TEST RECORDS

At the completion of the installation, the Contractor shall test the output from each diffuser, grille, and fan and complete two (2) copies of the Records of Tests; copies of this Test Form shall be issued to the Contractor by the Architect.

5.0 PIPE WORK

All water pipe works, heat exchangers, coils and other fittings shall be hydrostatically tested to one and a half times the working pressure or 14 bars whichever is greater and this test pressure maintained for twenty-four (24) hours. The test pressure shall not drop over the twenty-four (24) hours period, save the fluctuation due to temperature variation.

Page 192: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

BALANCING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

TS(ACMV)/41

All refrigerant pipe works shall be tested to pressure as recommended by the manufacturers using anhydrous carbon dioxide or nitrogen. After charging with refrigerant, the system shall be thoroughly checked for leaks, using the Halide Torch or similar approved device.

All pressure tests of pipe works shall be reviewed by the Architect before any work relating to insulation of pipe works may commence.

All water for hydrostatic pressure testing of pipe work systems shall be chemically treated with a suitable corrosion inhibitor.

The corrosion inhibitor shall be properly mixed with water either by batch mixing in an external tank or by recirculation within the pipe systems.

The chemically treated water shall remain and totally filled for each section of the system until all sections of the system have been pressure tested and the complete system is ready for the re-commission cleaning operation.

Immediately after the hydrostatic pressure testing water has been released from both the open and closed re-circulating water systems, the systems shall be filled with a mild acid phosphate/non-foaming detergent solution to remove all foreign matter. The chemical solution shall be circulated continuously for a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours, during which time, all strainers shall be removed and accumulated debris cleaned at least three times and all air release points shall be adequately purged. The systems shall then be drained of cleaning solution as rapidly as possible and recharged with fresh water which shall be re-circulated for two hours. The systems shall again be completely drained and recharged with fresh water which shall be circulated for two (2) hours. After draining, each system shall immediately be filled with fresh water and the initial dose of corrosion inhibitor added. This mixture shall then be circulated continuously for at least eight (8) hours.

In the case of cooling towers, the cooling tower fans shall not run while the cleaning and flushing is being carried out.

6.0 AIR OUTLETS

The methods of balancing air outlets shall be in accordance with recognised standard for field measurement and instrumentation, and shall be to the approval of the Architect.

Vane anemometer may be used for air grilles. The average anemometer reading shall be determined by marking off the grille in sections, taking the readings in front of each section and averaging the results. Moving the anemometer back and forth across the face of the grille to obtain the average reading shall not be permitted.

For air diffusers used in conjunction with the air-conditioning systems, the air quantities shall be measured with the use of proprietary made portable measuring stations. Suitable collecting sections or cones shall be used to facilitate measurements to be readily taken. Air flow meters shall be calibrated before use. All grilles/diffusers shall be set to within designed figures plus the same tolerance as specified for the air-handling units and ductworks.

Page 193: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

BALANCING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

TS(ACMV)/42

7.0 ELECTRICAL RELIABILITY TESTS

When commissioning tests have been concluded successfully and the Contractor has notified the Architect that the installation is ready to work, each section of the installation shall be required to operate either continuously or intermittently as may be required without failure of any kind for a period of one calendar month before the issuance of the “Certificate of Practical Completion”.

Should any failure occur due to, or arising from faulty design, unsatisfactory material, or workmanship sufficient to prevent the commercial use of the installation, the reliability test period of one calendar month shall commence after the Contractor has remedied the said faults to the satisfaction of the Architect.

The onus of proving that any failure is due to any other cause shall rest with the Contractor.

Page 194: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

TS(ACMV)/43

1.0 GENERAL

The works covered by this Section is for the supply of all materials, tools, apparatus, equipment and appliances, labour and necessary incidentals for the servicing and maintenance of all the systems and ancillary plant, machineries and equipment supplied and installed under this Contract during the Maintenance Period as well as for the future servicing and maintenance thereof after the expiry of the Maintenance Period.

All works to be performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the best commercial, technical and engineering practice, and must be strictly in accordance with this Specification.

During the Maintenance Period, the Contractor shall replace and/or repair all defective plants, machineries and equipment and installations or any parts thereof entirely free of charge to the Employer whenever directed by the Architect if such repairs or replacements are necessitated by reason of defective design, materials or workmanship or parts thereof replaced during the Maintenance Period shall carry a fresh warranty for a period of six (6) months or the balance of the Maintenance Period whichever is the longer with effect from the date of replacement or completion of repair thereof.

For servicing and maintenance after the Maintenance Period, all labour costs Involved in the carrying out of servicing, maintenance, replacement and/or repair of defective parts or items and the costs of supplying consumable materials (as listed hereinafter), incidental materials and of using tools, apparatus, equipment or appliances required for carrying out such tasks, shall be deemed to have been included in the prices quoted for future servicing and maintenance after the Maintenance Period.

2.0 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS

The works described hereunder shall be performed by workmen skilled in the servicing, maintenance and repair (or replacement) of the plant, machinery, equipment of all types supplied and installed under this Contract, and shall be executed in accordance with the best commercial and technical (or engineering) practice.

All materials to be supplied in connection with the Works under this Section shall be new and unused, and shall generally be of the best quality as regards manufacture and performance.

3.0 SUPERVISION

The Contractor shall have a Supervisor in charge of the servicing, maintenance and repair (or replacement) works required to be carried out under this Specification. For works which required by the local laws and regulations to be performed by personnel who is licensed or registered with the relevant local regulating bodies, the Supervisor as proposed by the Contractor shall deem to have the appropriate licence or registration.

Page 195: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

TS(ACMV)/44

This Supervisor shall also be fully competent in supervising the servicing, maintenance and repair (or replacement) of plant, machinery, equipment of all types, and shall be in direct employ of the Contractor and acceptable to the Employer.

4.0 SCOPE OF WORK

All plant, machineries and equipment comprising the complete systems and ancillary equipment supplied and installed under this Contract shall be serviced and maintained strictly in accordance with the requirements/recommendations stipulated by all the plant and equipment manufacturers as well as in compliance with all by-laws, rules, regulations and requirements of the Local Authorities and shall also satisfy all appropriate Singapore and British Standards including all relevant Codes of Practice. The Contract includes the preparation of comprehensive servicing and maintenance schedule to meet these requirements for the entire Works, during and after the expiry of the Maintenance Period; this schedule shall be submitted to the Architect for review after the award of the Contract. The Architect’s reviewed schedule shall be included and form an integral part of the Operating and Maintenance Instructions and Parts List specified elsewhere in this Contract.

The Contractor shall liaise with and seek agreement from the Employer on the time and day for carrying out the servicing, maintenance, repair and replacement of all plants, machineries, equipment and installations comprising the whole system under this Contract such that operation of the installation is not unduly disrupted. It is expected that working outside normal operating hours (i.e. overtime) will be required. The Contractor shall also provide emergency repair services at any time of the day (overtime included) if so requested by the Employer.

The Contractor shall be contractually bound to advise the Employer of any defects or deterioration in any part of the equipment/materials observed during the routine inspection and servicing, and shall repair such defects if required doing so by the Employer.

The Contractor shall include the services of a Registered Professional Engineer and/or Licensed Electrical Worker/Licensed Plumber, as required by the Local Authorities to take complete charge of the entire works and all costs connected herewith including fees payable to the Authorities are deemed to have been included in the Contract and in the Maintenance Prices submitted.

5.0 REGULAR SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

.01 General

The Contractor shall inspect and service all plant, machineries, equipment and installations supplied and installed by him (irrespective of whether or not there are specifically listed in this Section) at least once a month, except when otherwise directed by the Employer.

Page 196: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

TS(ACMV)/45

During every regular inspection, he shall:

a. Check the performance of the complete air-conditioning system, including adjusting various controls as and when technically necessary.

b. Instructed the Employer’s operators, responsible for the operation of the system, in respect of the correct method of operation and on the proper maintenance procedure.

c. Report in writing to the Employer any defects discovered, coming to light or observed in any part of the Air-Conditioning Systems. Such report shall state fully the cause(s) of such defect(s) and shall include an estimate of the cost of repairs required.

d. Record, in the logbook for each element of the system kept by the Employer, particulars of all maintenance or repair works carried out and initial all entries in the logbook.

e. Report in writing to the Employer all works carried out in accordance with the Servicing and Maintenance Schedules as specified.

The minimum items of work to be performed by the Contractor at each regular monthly inspection and servicing of all the plant, machineries and equipment, are detailed in the Schedules hereinafter stated.

.02 Schedules for Fan Coil Units

Inspection and servicing of refrigerant equipment shall include all refrigerant compressors and components in chillers, direct-expansion units, water-cooled packaged units, after-coolers, etc.

The following minimum items of work shall be performed by the Contractor at least once a month:

a. Check all seals and pipe lines for leaks, and rectify as and when necessary.

b. Check all refrigerant and oil levels, and charge refrigerant and oil into refrigerant systems as and when necessary.

c. Check the tension of all belt drives, and adjust as and when necessary.

d. Check the proper functioning of all refrigerant controls and clean, adjust and lubricate as and when necessary.

e. Check the proper functioning of all safety devices, and clean, adjust and lubricate as and when necessary.

Page 197: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ACMV WORKS)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

TS(ACMV)/46

f. Check the suction and discharge pressures of all refrigerant compressors, and if the pressures are found abnormal, trace the faults and rectify them as and when necessary.

g. Check all bolts and nuts for tightness, and tighten them as and when necessary.

Page 198: Tender Documents

PART III

OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(FIRE PROTECTION SERVICES)

Page 199: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

GENERAL

TS(FP)/1

1.0 GENERAL

A Particular Specification shall be issued which will contain additional clauses applicable to the particular Contract. If any part of the Specification contradicts the Particular Specification, the latter shall take precedence.

The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Particular Specification, Drawings, the Conditions of Contract and all other documents in respect of each Contract.

General Description The Alarm Systems are generally described hereunder:

Fire Alarm System A fire alarm system using heat detectors, smoke detectors, manual break-glass call

point, etc. together with fire alarm panels and a direct telephone line to an approved alarm monitoring station, shall serve the building.

2.0 CLIMATE CONDITIONS

The Sub-Contractor is deemed to be familiar with climatic conditions prevailing in Singapore and to be aware of the high temperature (up to 40

o C) and the high

relative humidity.

The Sub-Contractor in submitting a tender will be assumed to warrant that all materials and items of equipment are suitable for continued use and/or operation in the various climatic conditions encountered.

3.0 STANDARDS

All details of the equipment, materials and installations standard shall comply with this Specification and the current standards and regulations as described in other part of the Specification.

Where the materials or equipment offered comply with other standards, this trade shall demonstrate they meet the requirements of this Specification and details shall be provided to the Architect for approval.

The Sub-Contractor shall provide and perform all necessary inspections and maintain quality and workmanship in his works to ensure compliance with the Specification.

Design Rules & Regulations for Alarm Installation

* The fire alarm system shall be installed in accordance with the current edition of the Singapore Standard CP10: Code of Practice for the Installation and Servicing of Electrical Fire Alarm Systems (hereinafter also referred to as SS

Page 200: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

GENERAL

TS(FP)/2

CP10) and comply with all regulations and requirements of the Fire Safety Bureau, Singapore Civil Defence Forces.

4.0 EQUIPMENT SELECTION

All equipment supplied shall be in accordance with this Specification and the relevant drawings and to the approval of the Architect.

The capacities of all plant and equipment described in the Contract are minimum capacities and this Trade shall check them with the Architect, taking into account any variations which may be made to the systems during the progress of the Contract Works.

The Sub-Contractor shall be required to demonstrate at site that the duties required of the equipment are obtainable.

Physical sizes of all plant and equipment are to be suitable for the space allocated for the accommodation of such plant and equipment, taking into account the requirement of access for maintenance purposes.

In selecting makes and types of equipment, the Sub-Contractor shall ascertain that facilities for proper maintenance, repair and replacement and space, access, lifting and the like are provided for this installation.

Where the Sub-Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed in the drawing, which requires any redesign of the system, drawings showing the layout of the equipment and such redesign as required therefore shall be prepared by the Sub-Contractor at his own expenses. Where such approved deviation necessitates a different quantity and arrangement of materials and equipment from the originally specified or indicated in the drawings, the Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install any such additional materials and equipments required by the system at no additional cost.

Equipment catalogue and manufacturer's specifications must be submitted for the examination and details shall be submitted for the approval of the Architect before any equipment is to be ordered.

This shall include all information necessary for the Architect to ascertain that the equipment complies with this Specification and drawings. Data and sales catalogue of a general nature will not be accepted.

Before ordering equipment, this Trade shall provide the Architect with full details of the weights and characteristics of the equipment for purposes of determining floor loadings, power consumption and like.

Page 201: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

GENERAL

TS(FP)/3

5.0 PACKING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

Any items suffering from damage during manufacture, or in transit, or on site whilst in storage or during erection shall be rejected and replaced without extra cost to the Employer.

The Sub-Contractor shall also apply an approved protective crating or fix some other protective material to the materials, equipment components and accessories so as to protect them after installation. In the event that the Sub-Contractor fails to do this, the Sub-Contractor shall repair to the satisfaction of the Architect or supply free of all charge any replacement required to substitute for any part of the materials, equipment, components and accessories which may have been damaged in whole or in part as a result of such failure as directed by the Architect and shall without prejudice to such other liabilities under this Contract, pay for all expenses and outgoings of the Employer incurred in respect of the removal and disposal of the damaged parts and the installation of the substitute parts.

The Sub-Contractor shall also ensure that all plant and equipment are correctly maintained when installed on site prior to their actual setting to work. In particular, major plant such as chillers, pumps, boilers, fans and the like shall have long term storage warranty maintenance whereby they are prepared for long term non-use by the supplier/or his agent, and a programme of regular maintenance is included in the Contract. This will include turning of motors, activation of electrical heaters and the like.

The details of the proper set works must be submitted after award of contract for approval.

6.0 ARCHITECT’S ENDORSEMENT

No comment or failure to comment on or any other act or omission by the Architect relating to the Specification and nothing contained in the Specification shall constitute an instruction or otherwise impose upon the Employer or relieve the Sub-Contractor wholly or partially of any duty, liability or obligation whatsoever provided that the Sub-Contractor shall comply with instructions issued by the Architect which relate to the production of information as applicable to the contents thereof.

7.0 SAMPLES

Within one month following the award of the Contract, the Sub-Contractor shall submit for approval one set of labelled samples as follows:

• Cables and wiring;

• Cable supports, pipe supports;

• trunking/conduits/cable trays

• Smoke detectors;

• Heat detectors;

• Any item requested by the Architect, and/or stated in this Specification/ Drawings elsewhere.

Page 202: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

GENERAL

TS(FP)/4

The Architect reserves the right to require samples which show the fabrication techniques and workmanship of component parts, and the design of accessories and other auxiliary items, before any installation work proceeds.

The Sub-Contractor shall submit to the Architect for endorsement manufacturer's specification and installation instruction for trade products.

8.0 SUBMISSION

All submissions must be made early enough in the Contract to enable the Architect to fully check such as item prior to ordering. Generally, a period of at least three weeks will be required from the receipt of the complete submissions for the Architect to provide his comments. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that their submissions are made at least two months before any equipment requires to be ordered to meet the Construction Programme.

No claims for extensions of time or additional costs shall be entertained as a result of the Sub-Contractor's failure to make his submissions in time which may result in the delay of the completion of the project as a whole. Consequently the Architect shall have the authority to nominate and instruct the Sub-Contractor at no increase to the Contract Sum.

If the Sub-Contractor subsequently fails to place such orders within a period of four weeks from receipt of the Architect's instruction, then the Architect shall have the right to order the materials and/or equipment directly from the manufacturer(s). The cost of all such orders, including freight, shipping, insurance, handling and administrative charges shall be deducted from the Contract Sum or recovered in any other method at the discretion of the Employer.

The Architect shall be at liberty to reject any plant, materials and workmanship not complying with the requirements of this specification or which are in any way unsuitable and to order their removal and replacement, without increase to the Contract Sum.

The Architect's decision as to what constitutes compliance with requirements and suitability shall be final and binding; the true intent and meaning of the Contract being that the whole of the Contract Works shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Architect.

No rejected item shall be considered as a reason for failure to meet the completion date of the project.

9.0 SHOP DRAWINGS

The Sub-Contractor shall submit for the Architect's approval shop drawings in a timely manner according to the Construction Programme. Within 14 days of being notified of the intent to award the contract, Sub-Contractor shall submit the submission programme for approval. The submission programme shall include the following details:

Page 203: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

GENERAL

TS(FP)/5

• Proposed submission dates;

• Proposed approval date to meet the installation and Authorities submissions' programme.

The shop drawings shall include the following:

• Schematics;

• Plans (minimum in 1:100 scale) suitable for submission to the local Authority;

• Sections and elevations (minimum in 1:50 scale);

• Schedule and details (minimum in 1:20 scale).

The shop drawings are intended to be used as the basis for submission to the local Authorities and must be of sufficient detail to satisfy the Authorities' requirements to the approval of the Architect.

The shop drawings shall show all location of equipment, pipes, valves, strainers, cable, conduits, joints for pipes and wiring, anchors, supports, hangers, test points, measurement instruments, and the like.

Shop drawings for endorsement shall be submitted in sepia form with one print. The sepia shall be endorsed by the Architect.

As-built drawings for endorsement shall be similarly submitted at Completion prior to them being incorporated in the maintenance manuals.

During the preparation of working drawings, the Sub-Contractor shall ensure complete co- ordination of services installed by all parties. Maximum headroom and minimum installation space shall be maintained at all points. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, the Architect shall be notified before proceeding with installation.

If directed by the Architect, the Sub-Contractor shall without extra charge; make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work other trades for the proper execution of work.

10.0 CO-ORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES

The Sub-Contractor shall liaise with the tradesmen who will be carrying out other services work on the Site, prior to the commencement of actual installations, so as to ensure that the work of all trades will be co-ordinated. Where works by other trades are to occupy the same pipe and duct space and ceiling void, care must be taken to leave clear access for sequential future provision of these services within builder's work shafts, plant rooms and false ceilings, etc.

Page 204: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

GENERAL

TS(FP)/6

11.0 SITE SUPERVISION

The Sub-Contractor shall engage sufficient qualified and experienced site staff to execute the works. Registered and licensed tradesperson shall be employed and under the direct employment of the Sub-Contractor and shall be full time on site to supervise the works. When requested by the Architect, sufficient draughtsmen shall be kept on site to facilitate prompt issue of shop drawings.

The services of Licensed Electrical Engineer and Professional Engineers (Mechanical and Electrical) shall be engaged to assume full responsibilities for all engineering matters including engineering design, submission to authorities, installation, switching. These personnel shall be available to attend meetings, discussions, inspections, and the like as requested by the Architect and for any activation of electrical equipment and switchboards.

Upon completion of the Contract works, the Licensed Electrical Engineer and Professional Engineers shall furnish Completion and Inspection Certificates for the respective parts of the Works to the Architect to certify that all the works are in full compliance with the Specification and Drawings.

12.0 SETTING TO WORK

As soon as practicable after the completion of any section of the installation, the Sub-Contractor shall, when so authorized by the Architect, to clean out all plant spaces, remove all rubbish under his control (rubbish etc caused by the Sub-Contractor or his Sub-Contractors must be removed) and generally leave the particular portion of the installation and the access ways thereto in a tidy and finished state.

The Sub-Contractor shall then set such portion of the installation to work, adjust all regulators, controls, etc. and set and adjust the system so that it complies with the Specification requirements.

In cases where the Construction Programme is such that the Sub-Contractor will need to return for the purposes of regulation, adjusting, etc. to portions of the buildings which by that time may be in the occupation of the Employer, the Sub-Contractor shall allow in his tender accordingly and shall take all necessary precautions against damage when working in such areas.

13.0 RESULTS OF TESTS

If the test results show that the plant and equipment is not functioning in a satisfactory manner or providing the requirements of this Specification, the Architect shall decide whether this is due to incorrectness or faulty work by this Sub-Contractor. If this were the case, the Sub-Contractor shall, when called upon, carry out at his own expense such alterations; replacements and adjustments as may be required, to the Architect's complete satisfaction. The Architect's decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory test shall be final.

Page 205: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

GENERAL

TS(FP)/7

14.0 COMPLETE CERTIFICATE AND ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE

The Sub-Contractor shall adhere to the sequence of operation and handover described below:

.01 The Sub-Contractor shall submit the details of the commissioning engineers whose qualifications must be to the satisfaction of the Architect/ Engineer. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to reject any unsuitable person.

.02 The installation shall be 'Practically Completed' following satisfactory commissioning and the submission of the completed final commissioning data, and the Sub-Contractor will be duly issued a Certificate of Completion. This in effect starts the Defects Liability Period and Maintenance Period.

.03 A joint inspection will be held between the Employer, Architect/Engineer and Sub-Contractor to establish an outstanding works and defects list. All outstanding works/defects, shall be completed within one month from the when the Certificate of Completion was issued.

.04 If, at the end of the one month's period from the date of issuing the Certificate of Completion, any defects/outstanding works mentioned in the list still exist, the Architect/Engineer is empowered to appoint a body to rectify all defects / outstanding works and deduct the cost involved from the retention money.

.05 One month before the end of the Defects Liability Period, a final defects inspection will be made and the Sub-Contractor has one month to clear the final defects before release of the retention money. The Sub-Contractor shall also refer to the relevant clauses in the Main Contract.

15.0 MAINTENANCE PERIOD

('Defects Liability' shall also mean 'Maintenance Period')

During the Maintenance Period, the Sub-Contractor shall provide a twenty-four (24) hour 'call out' service whereby at any time the Sub-Contractor shall despatch skilled personnel to repair any equipment that has broken down.

Immediately answering the breakdown calls, whether true or false, the Sub-Contractor shall attend to such calls within a maximum time limit of 6 hours during night and two (2) hours during daytime of receiving such calls.

During the Maintenance Period, the Sub-Contractor shall at his own cost remedy and make good with all possible speed any faults or defects in the Plant or Works, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, due to faulty materials, workmanship or design. The Sub-Contractor shall indemnify the Employer and/or the Main Sub-Contractor against any damage or injury to the Building contents and/or occupants arising as a result of such faults or defects.

Page 206: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

GENERAL

TS(FP)/8

If the Sub-Contractor fails to remedy such faults or defects within a reasonable time, the Employer may proceed to do so at the risk and expense of the Sub-Contractor and without prejudice to such other rights as the Employer may have under the Contract.

The Sub-Contractor shall also refer to the relevant clauses in the Main Contract.

16.0 AS-NEW CONDITION

At the time of handover of the Contract Works after the Period of Maintenance, the whole installation shall be in `as-new' condition. The Sub-Contractor shall, during the course of the Contract, protect all plant and equipment and shall restore / repaint as necessary before completion of the Contract.

17.0 REGULATIONS

Unless expressly stated to the contrary, all materials and equipment supplied and installed by the Sub-Contractor shall comply with the applicable provisions of the Singapore Standards and Codes. In the absence of which, British Standards having authority in the country of installation shall prevail. Where a standard is referred to, that standard shall be the latest published edition thereof, unless otherwise stated.

Where the Sub-Contractor's standards differ from those specified but comply with the standards of the country of origin, the deviations shall be clearly indicated and the relevant published standards shall be included in the tendering documents. Such deviations shall be cross-indexed with the published standards.

The Sub-Contractor in carrying out the works described in this Specification shall comply in all respects with the requirements of:

(a) Development and Building Control Code on Fire Precautions for Building;(b) CP10: Code of Practice for Installation and Servicing of Electrical Fire Alarm

Systems (c) The Building Control Division, Public Works Department. (d) Public Utilities Board (e) Fire Shelter & Safety Bureau (f) The Ministry of Labour (g) The SISIR CP5: for the Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings (h) British Standard Codes of Practice (i) Singapore Standards (SISIR) (j) Singapore Standard Codes of Practice (SISIR) (k) Any other Local Authorities having jurisdiction over the installation of plant and equipment.

Page 207: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/9

1.0 GENERAL

The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install all pipe works in the positions generally as shown in the Specification Drawings. All pipe works shall be executed in a workmanlike manner, avoiding as far as possible any interference with the work of other trades.

Water supply piping systems including all related equipment, fittings, valves, etc. shall be suitable for the working pressure as indicated in the Specification Drawings.

Before delivery to site, all pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned, de-burred and free from scale, rust, etc. Old and damaged pipes shall be rejected, only new pipes shall be used. On site, all pipes shall be again checked and thoroughly wire brushed and prime coated prior to installation.

All pipe works shall be installed so that clearance of approximately 80 mm is left between the outside of the pipe and the nearest wall, ceiling or equipment surface, whenever possible. Pipes shall be run at such a distance apart to enable them to be individually painted. Pipe joints or fittings will not be permitted within the thickness of walls, floors, any partitions or below a beam.

All straight vertical runs of pipe more than 30 m in length shall have dirt pockets formed from equal tees and plugs at the low point of the risers.

For all pipe connections to valves, strainers and equipment, flanged or screwed joints shall be used.

All elbows, tees and other pipe fittings shall be purpose-made by recognised manufacturers and samples shall be submitted for review by the Architect before installation.

The minimum nominal pipe diameter to be used for all drain and air vent connections shall be 15 mm whether shown in the Specification Drawings or not. All drain pipes shall be terminated visibly over the floor grating provided for drainage purposes.

Pipe hangers on all pipes shall be provided and as specified in the Schedule of this specification.

Samples of each type of pipe hangers, supports and pipe guides shall be submitted for review before commencement of installation.

Pipes shall be installed so that the system can be thoroughly drained. Pipes must be laid to minimum slope of 1 in 500. All trapped sections of pipe work (except where single sprinklers are situated on drop pipes below suspended ceilings) must be fitted with drain valves and brass plugs or caps.

All pipe works shall be installed and tested in accordance with SS CP52 and SS CP29 and to the approval of the Local Authorities. All pipe works associated with the wet and dry riser system such as transfer pipes, breeching inlet pipes etc. shall be fire-rated (2-hours) where it is not installed within protected shaft/lobby.

Page 208: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/10

2.0 WELDING

Welding shall be done only by capable, skilled and experienced first-class welders. Any welder may be asked by the Architect to carry out a test weld. Should the test weld not meeting the required standard, the Architect shall have the authority demand the removal of the welder from the Site. Welds in steel pipes shall be ‘V’ butt welds and shall be prepared strictly in accordance with B.S. 2633.

All welds carried out shall bear the welder’s identification or code. The Sub-Contractor shall submit a list of names and identification or code of every welder employed and subsequently to revise the list whenever there is a change of welders working on the Site.

It shall be the Sub-Contractor’s responsibility to supervise the welding such that no unlisted welders shall carry out any welding at Site. Should the Architect have evidence to believe that unlisted welders are working at Site, he reserves the right to demand the removal of such welders from the site forthwith.

All welds shall be thoroughly wire brushed after each welding. Welding of galvanised steel pipes shall not be permitted.

For black mild steel pipes used in sprinkler system, welding shall not be permitted for pipes less than 80 mm diameter.

Immediately after the Architect is satisfied with the water testing of welded pipes, the pipe welds shall be cleaned, dried, and thoroughly wire brushed again before a layer of primer coating is applied.

3.0 PLUGS FOR OPEN PIPES

Any open ended pipe or pipe connection left over night or for any considerate period shall be protected from the entry of dirt, sand, etc. by the fixing of plastic or galvanised iron sheet cap securely held.

4.0 EXPANSION JOINTS AND ANCHORS

Wherever possible, advantage shall be taken of changes in direction of pipes to take up expansion and contraction due to temperature changes of the pipe and its contents.

All vertical pipe anchors shall be resiliently mounted with a layer of minimum 25mm thick neoprene impregnated duck pads such as Mason’s type HL or equivalent for loads up to 8.0MPa. For loads up to 0.35 MPa, two layers of 40 durometer, 8mm thick neoprene waffle pads should be used.

All rigidly joined vertical pipes shall be anchored as required to control the movement of pipes due to thermal changes. One anchor shall be provided for each vertical pipe not exceeding 50m in length or fitted in position as indicated in the Specification Drawings to resist movement due to expansion and the weight of the pipe and its contents. Expansion joints must be provided between anchors.

Page 209: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/11

5.0 PIPE GUIDES

The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install pipe guides in vertical pipe work as specified, shown in the Specification Drawings or as and when found necessary and as directed by the Architect.

For pipes 150mm diameter and under, pipe guides shall consist of a layer of min. 8mm thick, 40 durometer neoprene waffle pattern sleeve complete with steel frame for fixing to the walls, floor support and support bracket.

For pipes 200mm diameter and above, pipe guides shall be installed with a clearance around the pipe as shown in the drawings. Suitable steel frame with neoprene mounts shall be provided around the circumference to allow for expansion of the pipe column. Pipes shall be installed with be a physical clearance of 2mm between the pipe column and the neoprene pads.

.06 PIPE SLEEVES

Pipes passing through walls, floors or any other partitions shall be fitted with pipe sleeves. Sleeves for galvanised or black steel pipe shall be galvanised. Sleeves for copper pipe shall be of brass or copper. Cut edges of galvanised pipe sleeves shall be painted with zinc chromate paint.

Pipe sleeves fitted in walls or partitions shall end flush with the finished plaster or other surface finish.

Pipe sleeves fitted in floors shall generally end 15mm above the finish floor level except in Plant Rooms and other areas where ‘wet floors’ are expected. In these cases the sleeves shall end 50mm above the finished floor level, and shall be tightly caulked with ceramic fibre blanket of not less than 96 kg/m3 density.

Sleeves fitted on insulated pipes shall be over-sized to allow the insulation to be continued through them.

Where pipes pass through walls, plant rooms, fan rooms, fire brick walls, floors or other partitions, there shall be sufficient, subject to a minimum of 12mm clearance all round the pipe and the cast-in sleeve to cater for linear and lateral (in case of branch pipes) movement due to temperature changes. Ceramic fibre blanket of not less than 96 kg/m3 density should be inserted in between the clearance and both sides should be sealed and caulked airtight with a non-setting resilient caulking compound. The pipe shall be supported on both sides of the penetration to maintain uniform clearance between the pipe and the cast-in sleeve.

Generally, pipe sleeves shall be one nominal diameter larger than the service pipe concerned except for sizes 100mm bore and above where they may be specially constructed from not less than 4mm galvanised sheet steel. In this case, the pipe sleeve shall give 12mm clearance between the service pipes concerned including insulation sheathing.

Page 210: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/12

7.0 WALL PLATES

Where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings or any other internal partitions in areas where sprinkler pipes are exposed to view, heavily chromium plated split rolled steel or brass hinged wall plates shall be provided and fixed after the painting and/or interior decorations are complete; such wall plates are not required within false ceiling.

8.0 PIPE FIXINGS

Generally, hangers and supports shall be steel of adequate dimensions and designed to allow for expansion and contraction. All hangers and supports shall be primed and finish coated with black bituminous paint.

In all cases, cradles for pipes 150mm and larger and clamps for pipes below 150mm diameter shall support the pipe independently of any lagging. Special care shall be taken with vapour seals and lagging to ensure they are continuous at points of support. Clamps shall be lined internally with 15mm thickness neoprene strip.

All pipe works connected to pump sets shall be isolated from the building structure by using flexible pipe hangers, anchors and pipe guides as specified in the Schedule of Vibration Isolation Equipment. No direct connection between the building structure and any part of the pipe work shall be allowed. Where pipes pass through walls or floors a clearance of 12mm around the pipe shall be maintained. Where it is required to seal around the pipes vibration isolating package shall be used.

Generally, all horizontal steel pipes shall be supported on cradles, by clevis type hangers or clamp type hangers with steel rod hangers and support spacing in accordance with the table below:-

Nominal Pipe Diameter (mm) Max. Span (metres) Min. Rod diameter (mm)

Up to and including 50 2.0 10

63 to 89 3.0 13

100 to 150 4.0 20

200 to 300 3.0 20

350 to 400 3.0 22

450 to 600 2.0 22

Pipe hangers shall be placed not more than 600mm from each change of direction where possible.

Vertical runs of pipes shall be supported by anchors. Brass pipe clips for rings shall be used on all copper tube. Samples of pipe hangers and supports shall be submitted to the Architect for review.

Pipe vibration isolation shall be as shown on the Schedule of Vibration Isolation Equipment.

Page 211: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/13

9.0 AIR VENTS AND DRAINS

Adequate drain points shall be provided to drain water in the various systems, and isolating valves shall be provided at these locations. These isolating valves shall be provided with leather straps and suitable locks to prevent water draining of the system by unauthorised personnel. Two (2) nos. of master keys to these locks shall be handed over to the Employer when instructed by the Architect.

Automatic air vents where applicable shall be complete with isolating cock, and tail pipe arranged for visible discharge to the nearest suitable floor drain.

All portions of equipment and drip trays, pump wells, etc. in which water may collect shall be drained to waste with UPVC Pipe. Drain pipes shall be connected to equipment with unions to facilitate cleaning and removal.

10.0 TYPE OF PIPE WORK

The types and quality of all pipe works used shall comply with the following schedule unless otherwise shown in the Specification Drawings or specified elsewhere in these Specifications:

.01 Sprinkler Installation Pipe work - black mild steel to B.S. 1387, medium gauge or B.S. 3601, medium gauge.

.02 Air Vent Pipe work - copper to B.S. 2871 Part 1

.03 Drain pipe work - galvanised mild steel to B.S. 1387, medium gauge.

.04 Hose reel Installation Pipe work - galvanised mild steel pipe to B.S. 1387, heavy gauge.

.05 Wet Riser Installation - galvanised mild steel pipe to B.S. 1387, heavy gauge.

.06 Dry Riser Installation - galvanised mild steel pipe to B.S. 1387, heavy gauge. For all pipe connections to valves, strainers and equipment, flanged or

screwed joints shall be used. All screwed joints shall be made with Teflon or equivalent p.t.f.e. thread sealing tape; hemp or similar organic substances shall not be used.

11.0 STEEL PIPE JOINTING

For black steel pipe works, all joints up to and including 65 mm diameter shall be made by means of screwed connections. Pipes of 80 mm diameter and above shall be joined by means of welding unless otherwise indicated in the Specification Drawings.

For galvanised steel pipe works, all joints up to and including 65 mm diameter shall be made by means of screwed connections. Pipes of 80 mm diameter and above shall be joined by means of flanged or screwed connections. Welding of galvanised

Page 212: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/14

steel pipe work shall not be permitted. In all cases where pipes are joined to flanged equipment, appropriate mating flanges

shall be used. No screwed connections shall be allowed for vertical pipe risers.

12.0 FLANGES FOR STEEL PIPES

Flanges shall be of mild steel in accordance with BS 4504 Part 1. All flanged joints shall be flushed and aligned, and shall be made with corrugated jointing rings, coated on both sides with the recommended jointing compound. All bolts shall be hexagonal-headed steel in accordance with the provisions of B.S. 916 complete with washers and nuts.

13.0 STEEL PIPE FITTINGS

All elbows, tees and other pipe fittings shall be proprietary make by recognised manufacturers and samples shall be submitted for the Architect’s review before commencement of work.

For sprinkler pipe work, all pipe fittings for branching, e.g. ‘Tees’, ‘Crosses’, etc. shall have branch outlets one size larger in diameter than the branch pipes unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. Reducing sockets or bushings shall be used to connect the branch outlets and the branch pipes.

In all cases, galvanised pipe fittings shall be used on galvanised pipe work and black pipe fittings on black steel pipe work.

In general, all fittings shall be of the malleable iron type, but in all cases entirely suited to the working and testing pressures of the circuit concerned.

On all changes of direction, long radius elbows and sweep or ‘pitcher’ tees shall be used. Short elbow shall not be used unless otherwise agreed by the Architect. Bends, offsets and other pipe fittings formed by welding together segmented pieces will be rejected. Short fill-in sections of piping less than 150 mm long shall not be welded to any pipe run unless otherwise agreed by the Architect.

Reduction in diameter for through-flow pipes shall be made by means of reducing sockets for vertical pipes only; for horizontal connections to pump suction, eccentric reducing sockets shall be used.

14.0 VALVES, COCKS, etc.

All valves, cocks, etc. shall be suitable for the working and test pressure of the system concerned. Valve flanges shall be in accordance with B.S. 4504 as specified for their respective service pipe work. The nominal bore of any valve shall not be less than the bore of the pipe to which it is fitted.

Valves shall be fitted in accessible positions for operation and repair. The connection between each valve and the adjacent equipment shall be made either with a union or

Page 213: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/15

a flange for ease of dismantling.

Valve spindles shall be adequately lubricated with graphite, and all glands shall be freshly packed before installation. All valves shall be of the external spindle type. All valves must be ‘right-handed’ i.e. to shut valve the spindle must turn clockwise.

Valves supplied and fitted shall be of the same manufacture unless agreed by the Architect. Control valves shall be supplied only by manufacturer of control equipment.

All valves, cocks, etc. for the various services shall comply with the requirements of all Local Authorities including the Building & Construction Authority, The Fire Safety Bureau, Singapore Joint Civil Defence Forces, the Water Department of P.U.B. as well as SS CP52 where applicable. Where valves are located above 2 m from the floor level or in an inaccessible location they shall be operated by chain mechanism.

Valves used for working pressure above 19 bar shall be of the flanged cast steel type. The materials for valves and body as specified in the following Clauses shall apply to lower working pressure only.

15.0 ISOLATING VALVES

Gate valves up to and including 80 mm diameter shall be of gunmetal and shall have female screwed connections when fitted to steel pipe. Valves for copper pipe shall be of brass and shall have compression type connections for a size up to and including 40 mm diameter. Such valves shall be of the full way, split wedge disc pattern and with non-rising spindles made of high tensile steel and fitted with detachable cast iron hand wheel.

Valves of 100mm diameter and above when fitted to steel pipes shall be of the flanged cast iron type, with inside screws solid wedge and with high tensile steel spindles fitted with detachable cast iron hand wheel.

Valves of 80 mm diameter and above when fitted to copper pipe shall be flanged and the flanges shall be similar to those detailed for steel pipe work.

16.0 GLOBE VALVES

Globe valves shall be supplied and so fitted for proper balancing and water flow control. They shall be of the globe pattern, screwed gunmetal type for sizes up to and including 80 mm diameter. Globe valves of 100 mm diameter and above shall be of the flanged cast iron type.

For copper pipe work, the relevant details specified earlier for isolating valves shall be applicable.

17.0 DRAIN COCKS

Gunmetal drain cocks shall be provided as and when necessary to ensure that all

Page 214: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/16

sections of pipe works and plant can be effectively drained. The sizes of drain cocks shall be as follows:

.01 Tanks, Plant and Pipes above 150mm diameter ... not less than 25mm diameter.

.02 Pipes up to 125mm diameter ... 15mm

Drain cocks of 15 mm diameter and above shall be complete with hose unions for draining down.

18.0 RELIEF VALVE

Relief and safety valves when fitted to pipe work shall be of the ‘Enclosed Spring Loaded’ gunmetal type with outlet pipes terminating at 150 mm above floor level.

19.0 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

Pressure reducing valves shall be provided where shown in the Specification Drawings, and shall be suitable for operation under both static and dynamic conditions.

All valves shall have a minimum rating suitable for the maximum working pressure at the installation. The downstream shall be set for pressure as shown in the Specification Drawings.

The Sub-Contractor shall submit to the Architect their selection of the pressure reducing valves before proceeding with the equipment order.

20.0 CHECK VALVES

Check valves shall be of the spring-loaded non-slamming gunmetal type. Female screwed connection shall be used for sizes up to and including 50 mm diameter. For sizes of 65 mm diameter and above they shall be of the screwed or flanged cast iron or cast steel type with bronze discs.

The Sub-Contractor is required to select these valves in relation to the velocity of flow of the water in the pipes. In all cases valves are required to shut silently on reversal of water flow.

21.0 BALL FLOAT VALVES

All ball float valves shall be supplied and fitted complete with back-nuts, ball float and arm. Ball floats may be of soldered copper or brass or stainless steel. The arm shall be of stainless steel and all bolts and nuts shall be of stainless steel or bronze. They shall be of the equilibrium type, suitable for the working pressure and comply with B.S. 1212 Part 1.

Page 215: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/17

22.0 STRAINERS

Strainers shall be the ‘Y’ type complete with removable stainless steel screen not greater than 56 mesh. Strainers up to and including 80 mm diameter shall be of the screwed end bronze type. Strainers of 100 mm diameter and above shall be of the cast iron type and flanged. All strainers shall be fitted with integral ball valves for draining.

23.0 PRESSURE GAUGES

Pressure gauges shall be of the 100 mm diameter brass cased type. They shall be designed for pipe mounting and be calibrated in mbar. All pressure gauges shall be of the Bourdon tube type and selected for normal operating point to be at about mid-point of the scale and with maximum scale value of the order of 150 per cent of the maximum working pressure. All pressure gauges shall be provided with suitable gauge cocks and snubbers to prevent vibration of the needles.

24.0 WATER LEVEL GAUGES

All water storage tanks shall be provided with water level gauges. Water level gauges shall be of the capillary glass tube in stainless steel casing to show the depth and quantity of water in the respective water tanks. The entire water level gauge shall be of standard proprietary make designed to give reliable service.

25.0 FIRE BRIGADE INLETS Pumping-in breeching inlets shall be provided to enable the Fire Brigade to pump

water into the Sprinkler Main, Wet Riser Transfer Tank, Dry Risers, etc. by the use of their own equipment. The Fire Brigade inlets shall be complete with inlet boxes (glass fronted) all to the requirements of the Fire Safety Bureau, Singapore Joint Civil Defence Forces. The breeching inlet shall have polished aluminium bodies with gunmetal connections.

26.0 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION VALVES Each group of sprinklers (maximum 1000 for Ordinary Hazard group) shall be

controlled by one set of installation valves comprising a main stop valve, an alarm valve and a water motor alarm and gong all to SS CP52. The main stop valve shall be secured open by a padlock strap. A location plate with appropriate letterings shall be provided.

The alarm valve must be to SS CP52 and installed immediately above the main stop valve. The alarm valve shall have all necessary connections to pressure gauges, water motor alarm, combined drain and test valve, etc.

Water motor alarm shall be to SS CP52 and shall comprise a fire alarm gong with a water turbine. The water motor alarm shall be suitably mounted on the wall above the alarm valve and all pipe connections shall be 20 mm diameter. The pipe work

Page 216: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/18

shall be galvanised and shall drain through a stainless steel orifice plate. Drain lines shall be connected to the nearest floor waste.

27.0 FACILITIES FOR PROVING OF WATER SUPPLIES

Complete facilities for the ‘Proving Tests’ of water supplies shall be supplied and installed. These facilities shall fully comply with the SS CP52. The water supply proving facilities shall include, inter alias, pressure gauges, approved and listed direct flow metering devices, valves, drains, etc. Details of these facilities shall be submitted for review prior to installation.

28.0 SPRINKLER HEADS The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install all sprinkler heads as shown in the

Specification Drawings. The Sub-Contractor shall also supply to the Employer, a stock of spare sprinkler heads after completion of the installation. The stock of spare sprinkler heads shall be not less than 1% of the number of sprinkler heads installed or 6 sprinkler heads whichever is greater for each type of sprinkler head installed.

The cost of supply of these spare sprinkler heads shall be included in the Tender Price.

Sprinklers shall be of approved makes and types. Sprinklers shall be of conventional pattern designed to produce a spherical type of discharge with a proportion of water being thrown upwards to the ceiling; sidewall pattern type shall be used where appropriate. Sprinklers shall be designed with universal type deflector enabling the sprinkler to be erected in either the upright or pendent position.

For exposed sprinkler heads (i.e. installed below the suspended ceiling) and concealed pipe work installations (i.e. installed within false ceiling space), sprinklers installed shall be pendent type complete with ceiling plate flush to the suspended ceiling. Sprinklers shall be of satin chromed finish to Architect’s requirements. The Sub-Contractor should allow for fixed deflectors type and not retracted deflectors. Ceiling plates shall be of steel construction and either chromed or painted to Architect’s requirements.

For exposed sprinkler heads and exposed pipe work installation, where no suspended ceiling is used, sprinklers shall be installed preferably pendent position and shall be of the bronze finish.

Sprinklers orifice sizes shall comply with SS CP52 and the requirements of the Fire Safety Bureau, Singapore Joint Civil Defence Bureau.

Generally, sprinklers temperature ratings shall be 68 Degrees Centigrade and shall be colour coded according to the SS CP52. Where sprinklers are exposed to direct sunlight (e.g. under glazed roof), the sprinkler temperature ratings shall be increased accordingly in accordance with SS CP52.

Page 217: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/19

29.0 HOSEREEL INSTALLATIONS Hose reels shall be of the recess swing type complete with all accessories including

stop valves, reels, hose, hose guides and shut-off nozzle assembly. Hose reels shall comply with all bye-laws, regulations and requirements of the Fire Safety Bureau, Singapore Joint Civil Defence Forces and the Building & Construction Authority, Public Works Department.

Rubber Hose

The rubber hose shall be 25 mm internal diameter hose and shall have a minimum working pressure of 7 bars (100 psi) and shall be of the non-kinking type.

Rubber hoses shall be manufactured with an inner tube, a reinforcement of braided textile lining and an abrasion resistance rubber cover. The reinforcement shall consist of a single rayon braid or a double braid of cotton.

The length of rubber hose on the reel shall be not less than 30 metre. There shall be no joints in a length of hose.

30.0 ANTI-VIBRATION COUPLING

Piping connections to all pumps and all equipment shall be by means of stainless steel flexible connections. Limiting bolts shall be provided to limit excessive movement of pipes.

31.0 ORIFICE PLATES

Orifice plates shall be complete with matching flanges properly spaced, drilled and gasket and complete with flange bolts. Tapping points shall be provided at both upstream and downstream of the orifice plates and shall be made in strict accordance with B.S. 1042 Part 1 and associated amendments.

Orifice plates shall be fitted as necessary in order to assist hydraulically balancing the system or to meet pump characteristic curve. The orifice plates shall be installed in accordance with SS CP52.

32.0 EARTHING BOSS

Earthing bosses shall be provided at the top and bottom of each and every pipe riser.

Earthing bosses shall be of the same material as the pipe and shall be welded to the pipes in an accessible location suitable for connection to the earthing system. Bosses shall be 50 mm diameter with 10 mm diameter clear hole and 7 mm deep.

All rising mains shall be electrically earthed. Earthing shall generally be carried out in accordance with Singapore Standard CP16: Code of Practice on Earthing.

All connections to earth electrodes shall be by means of 70 sq. mm PVC insulated

Page 218: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/20

cables and final connections to all rising mains shall be by 25 mm x 3 mm copper tapes.

Earthing connections shall be run in a workmanlike manner generally in square and symmetrical lines using Furze No. 44 gunmetal saddles of appropriate size of securing tapes or equivalent at intervals not exceeding 900 mm and the copper tapes shall be supplied in long unbroken lengths to avoid unnecessary jointing.

The mating surfaces of all tapes at joints etc. shall be tinned before clamping and all the joints shall be tinned, riveted and soldered. All connections to rising mains shall be made by bolted connection in a visible and accessible position.

All joints in exposed sections shall be protected against corrosion by the application of two coats of anti-corrosion paint.

The combined resistance of the earth electrodes shall be less than one ohm.

Tenderers are advised to carry out earth resistively tests on Site, before making an offer of any brand of earth electrode in their Tender and to ascertain the locations and number of earth points required, and allowance for the cost of such tests shall be deemed to have been made in the Sub-Contract Price.

Electrode chambers and chequer plates covers shall be provided under this sub-contract. The sub-contract shall include the driving of all earth electrodes, connecting them to the main earth bar and testing them to the satisfaction of the Architect with a ‘Megger’ earth tester.

Where two or more electrodes are driven to form a group, the heads of the electrodes in the group shall be bonded to each other by means of a 25 mm x 3 mm insulated copper tape, laid at a depth of 600 mm in the ground.

Where ground conditions are favourable for the use of rods in parallel to form a group, the distance between rods should be at least equal to twice their driven length.

33.0 FLOW METERS

Flow meters shall be supplied and installed as shown in the Specification Drawings and/or as and when required by the Architect. Flow meters shall be of direct reading type, approved and listed by the Loss Prevention Council, London and acceptable to the Local Authorities. Notwithstanding the above, every wet rising main and every water supply pipe to sprinkler water tank shall each be provided with one flow meter.

Each flow meter shall be complete with sensing elements in the pipe, appropriately calibrated (in cu. dm/min) gauge, isolating valves, tubing, mounting brackets etc. Full details of flow meters shall be submitted for Architect’s review.

Page 219: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

TS(FP)/21

34.0 LABELLING

Directional arrows and symbols consisting of 25 mm black lettering on yellow background or as approved by the Architect, shall be used on all pipe work throughout the installations. All arrows shall indicate the direction of flow of water in the pipe. Such arrows and symbols shall be painted on each pipe between each floor level and throughout pump rooms in positions to the approval of the Architect.

Symbols used shall be approved by the Architect.

All valves larger than 100 mm diameter shall be fitted with engraved brass labels indicating the valve duty. The label shall be mounted on top of the valve and screwed onto the hand wheel or level nut.

Page 220: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (ADDRESSABLE)

TS(FP)/22

1.0 GENERAL

The entire automatic fire alarm system shall be of microprocessor based for individual addressable function and with data communication capability to enable centralised monitoring and controlling of the system from the Fire Command Centre. The system shall comprise smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual call points, interfacing modules, alarm bells, fire indicating board (FIB), sub-fire indicating boards (SIB), batteries and chargers, relays, all necessary wirings and software for a complete operable system as shown in this Specification and Drawings.

All equipment/components to be used for this system shall be listed and approved by a recognised institution. Documentary proof of such listing/approval shall be submitted to the Architect for review.

All main equipment and devices shall be produced by the same manufacturer. This applies particularly to detectors, manual call points, inter-facing modules, control units and central data processing equipment. System formed by equipment from different manufacturers will not be accepted.

The automatic fire alarm system shall be installed in accordance with the latest edition of Singapore Standard CP10: Code of Practice for the Installation and Servicing of Electrical Fire Alarm Systems and comply with all regulations, orders and requirements of the relevant Local Authorities. The Sub-Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the entire installation to meet these requirements.

The Sub-Contractor shall also be responsible for making necessary applications and arrangements with the Authorities concerned for the provision of a direct telephone line for alarm signal transmission to an approved monitoring station and all costs connected therewith for one full calendar year commencing from the date the telephone connection is provided are deemed to have been included in the Sub-Contract Sum.

2.0 SYSTEM OF OPERATION The smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual call points and interfacing modules for

sprinkler flow switches in the building are divided into zones and connected directly to the respective Class A individual addressable loops from the Fire Indicator Board (FIB).

The system of operation shall be such that a fire alarm shall be initiated by actuating any of the manual call points, smoke/heat detectors or sprinkler flow switches, etc. Such actions shall then energise the buzzer at the FIB and the related SIB. The corresponding LED indicators at the Fire Mimic Board and the related SIB shall be lighted and the zone location as well as the point location of the device which activated the fire alarm shall be indicated on the LCD of the FIB in plain text form. At the same time, all the fire alarm bells in the building shall sound simultaneously and all interlocking control functions such as lift homing, fans control, etc. shall perform as required automatically.

Page 221: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (ADDRESSABLE)

TS(FP)/23

The operation of fire alarm silencing switch at the FIB shall mute the buzzers and the alarm bells. However, the operation of the fire alarm silencing switch shall not cancel the visual indications on the FIB, Fire Mimic Board and related SIB.

Visual indications shall be cancelled only when the circuit has been reset by a reset key switch on the FIB. In the event of receipt of a second or subsequent fire alarm during this period, the fire alarm bells and buzzers shall be energised again and the origin of the second and subsequent fire alarm shall be registered visually on the boards as before.

The entire fire alarm system shall be of the close circuit electrically supervised type so that should fault develops in any of the circuit, it will be detected immediately whereupon the fault warning buzzers and corresponding LED indicators at the FIB, Fire Mimic Board and the related SIB shall be energised. The zone location as well as the point location of the fault and the type of fault shall be indicated on the LCD of the FIB in plain text form. A fault buzzer muting switch shall be incorporated at the FIB and the related SIB to enable the audible fault warning buzzer to be silenced but the visual fault indication shall persist until the fault is cleared.

A fire alarm silencing switch shall be provided at the operator’s console in the Fire Command Centre and linked to the FIB for silencing all the fire alarm bells in the building when the Voice Communication System (provided by the Electrical Sub-Contractor) is in use; however the switch shall be effective only after the bells have operated initially for not less then one minute. Visual flashing signal shall be provided to indicate when this switch is operated.

A pre-setting time shall be incorporated in the FIB to automatically restore the sounding of the fire alarm bells after a pre-determine time period of between 0 - 3 minutes has elapsed.

Operation of the fire alarm silencing switch during ‘alarm’ condition shall not cancel the visual indications of the alarm, nor shall it prevent the proper registration of subsequent alarms at the FIB.

Any changes of status, namely alarm, fault or abnormal mode occurred in the system shall be processed by the FIB and printed on the system logging printer as well as displayed in plain text form at the LCD in addition to all the abovementioned functions.

3.0 SMOKE DETECTORS Smoke detectors shall be of addressable solid state ionisation type suitable for

installation in the intended environment. All smoke detectors shall meet the requirements of EN54 Pt.7 and have a sensitivity sufficient to be classified as ‘B’ or better in EN54 Pt.9.

The smoke detector shall be neat and compact in appearance, finished in light colour, suitable for ceiling mounting. It shall be installed in such a way that each may be readily withdrawn from the base for service or testing or replacement without affecting the effectiveness of the remaining detectors and installation. All smoke detectors shall be suitable for operation on 24 volt D.C. power supply.

Page 222: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (ADDRESSABLE)

TS(FP)/24

All smoke detectors shall fit into a common standard type base and have a built-in LED which shall flash upon activation.

The type of smoke detector used shall be acceptable to Fire Safety Bureau.

The smoke detector shall be of analogue addressable type suitable for automatic compensation of signal deviation caused by contamination and aging so that the detector shall be able to maintain its response behaviour for a long period of time.

4.0 HEAT DETECTORS Heat detectors shall be of addressable solid state type with combined rate-of-rise and

fixed temperature response and be suitable for installation in the intended environment. The response sensitivity of the heat detector shall conform to EN54 Pt.5 as Grade 1 for normal application and EN54 Pt.8 for high temperature application.

The heat detector shall be neat and compact in appearance, finished in light colour, suitable for ceiling mounting. It shall be installed in such a way that each may be readily withdrawn from the base for service or testing or replacement without affecting the effectiveness of the remaining detectors and installation. All heat detectors shall be suitable for operation on 24 volt D.C. power supply.

All heat detectors shall fit into a common standard type base and shall have a built-in LED which shall flash upon activation.

The type of heat detector used shall be acceptable to Fire Safety Bureau.

The heat detector shall be of analogue addressable type suitable for automatic compensation of signal deviation caused by contamination and aging so that the detector shall be able to maintain its response behaviour for a long period of time.

5.0 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACING MODULES

Addressable Interfacing Module shall be used for the interfacing of external signal, i.e. flow switches, pressure switches, etc. with the individual addressable loop.

It shall be able to connect directly along the individual addressable loop.

The Addressable Interfacing Module shall have a built-in LED which shall flash upon activation.

6.0 ISOLATOR MODULES

Isolator modules shall be used to isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on an addressable loop to limit the number of devices/detectors that are incapacitated by the short circuit fault. Upon correction of the short circuit, the isolator modules shall automatically re-connect the isolated section of the addressable loop.

Page 223: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (ADDRESSABLE)

TS(FP)/25

Isolator modules shall be provided in the addressable loops such that the failure or short circuit in one alarm zone shall not affect another alarm zone.

Isolator modules shall also be provided before the first device and after the last device on the addressable loops to protect the module card from being damaged by power surge due to short circuits in the addressable loops.

The indicator module shall have a built-in LED which shall flash upon activation.

All activation of isolator module shall generate a fault alarm at the FIB and respective SIBs.

7.0 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL CALL POINTS Manual call points shall be fixed at a height of 1,400 mm above floor level and shall

be of individual addressable type suitable for direct connection to the Class A individual addressable loop. It shall be neat and compact in appearance suitable for flush and/or surface mounting and finished in signal red colour with bold lettering inscribed ‘FIRE ALARM - IN CASE OF FIRE BREAK GLASS’.

All addressable manual call points shall comply with the requirements of BS5839 Pt.2.

It shall be able to test for alarm at the addressable manual call point without opening the call point cover or breaking the glass.

Manual call points to be installed at positions which are exposed to outdoor climate shall be of weatherproof type.

8.0 ALARM BELLS Fire alarm bells shall be the weatherproof type suitable for wall mounting at ceiling

height and shall comprise a gravity cast aluminium base with tapped 20 mm E.T. entry containing a single bobbin movement, having enamelled copper wire wound for continuous operation on 24 volt D.C. supply and provided with phosphor bronze armature and contact springs, heavy duty silver contacts, two pole terminal block and 150 mm diameter harden steel strident tone type gong painted to signal red in accordance with SS CP10.

The sounding of bell shall be of a general alarm basis. Push button for actuation of bells shall be provided in the Fire Command Centre.

9.0 TESTING UNIT One set of portable testing unit shall be provided to enable any detector to be tested.

The testing unit shall be designed and calibrated to suit the detectors installed.

Page 224: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (ADDRESSABLE)

TS(FP)/26

10.0 WIRING SYSTEM

All wirings shall be enclosed in conduit run in the following manner:

.01 Wiring within false ceiling spaces, riser ducts, electrical switch rooms, sub-stations, and mechanical plant rooms shall be in surface mounted G.I. conduits.

.02 Wiring for all other areas shall be in heavy duty UPVC concealed conduits to be chased in wall cast in columns/concrete slabs, etc.

.03 Where part of the conduit run is on surface and part concealed, then the entire run shall be of G.I. conduit to assure electrical continuity.

� Fire alarm circuits shall be separated from other circuit runs and conduit/trunking for fire alarm system shall not in any circumstances contain wiring other than that associated with the fire alarm system. Wiring shall be multi-strand of sizes to suit the system but shall not be less than 1.5 sq. mm section, of high conductivity copper wire insulated with 450/750 volt grade PVC to B.S. 6004 or SS 50.

Page 225: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION

TS(FP)/27

1.0 GENERAL

This section covers the general requirements for electrical work to be installed under this Specification.

The Contractor shall supply and install all electrical wiring, switchgear etc., necessary for the complete, safe and satisfactory operation of the plant covered by the Specification.

In case the permanent supply is not available, the Contractor shall be responsible for the supply and installation of all temporary power required for the operation of all fire fighting equipment, automatic alarm system etc., during the inspection period.

All equipment provided shall be selected of 'tropicalized' designed for use in conditions up to 40 C ambient air temperature and 100% relative humidity. All equipment, materials, workmanship and fittings shall comply with the appropriate BS or local Authorities' requirements as listed in the relevant paragraphs of this section, or an approved equivalent international standards.

The electricity supply will be 400/230 Volt, 50 Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire. All equipment shall be designed to operate with a ± 10% voltage tolerance without a loss of rated output and frequency tolerance shall be ± 4%.

2.0 REGULATIONS AND STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

.01 The entire electrical installation shall be in accordance with the regulation and requirement of the local Authorities having jurisdiction.

.02 The requirements of the latest local Electrical Authority Standard shall be taken as the minimum standard for this installation.

.03 All electrical installation inside the fuel oil tank room shall be in accordance to BS 4345.

.04 All related British Standards Specification.

3.0 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Miniature circuit breaker distribution boards are to be provided to serve circuits as indicated in the drawings.

All wiring terminations and busbars within distribution boards shall be shrouded and an insulating front shield of a flame retardant type, minimum 1.6 mm thickness, shall be provided to completely screen the distribution unit interior. Only the MCB operating dolly and insulated surround shall project through the shield.

Neutral bars are to be of approved cross sectional area, mounted on insulators and drilled to receive circuit wiring. Clamping screws are to be provided for each circuit way. Screws are to be brass with round heads.

Page 226: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION

TS(FP)/28

A link of approved cross section shall be provided in the neutral bar between the incoming neutral and the final sub-circuit neutral conductors.

Distribution board enclosures are to be galvanised sheet metal constructed and finished in enamel of a colour to approval. The sheet metal for the enclosure and the door shall be not less than 1.2 mm thick. Hinged enclosure doors are to be fitted with ball catch locks.

Space shall be provided for the future accommodation for 20% additional circuit breakers in all distribution boards. All necessary busbars, studs and neutral bar ways shall be allowed.

Wiring schedules shall be provided and installed inside a clear plastic envelope on the inside of distribution board doors, giving the following information:

• Distribution board designation;

• Rating of all circuit breakers;

• Size of all cables;

• Type and location of circuit load.

4.0 CABLING

.01 PVC Insulated Copper Cables

PVC insulated copper cables shall comply with BS 6004:1975. Cables are to be 600/1000 or 250 Volt grade depending on size.

.02 Fire Resistant Cable

FR call shall be of high fire resistance low make non-toxic gas emission flame retardant halogen free complying IEC 331, IEE 383 and BS 4066 similar to HUBER & SUHNER RADOX or approved equivalent.

5.0 WIRING

All wirings, unless otherwise specified, shall be pvc insulated and heathered or pvc insulated of approved manufacture conforming to BS 6004. "PVC insulated cables (non armoured) for electrical power and lighting". Only cables which have passed SISIR's type test and have PUB approval shall be used. It shall have the manufacture's identification clearly marked on it.

All wirings shall be so selected to ensure that the current carrying capacity is sufficient and the voltage drop shall not be exceeded the requirements of the local Electrical Authority.

Page 227: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION

TS(FP)/29

The following cable code shall be strictly maintained:

Red Phase - Red Yellow Phase - Yellow Blue Phase - Blue Neutral - Black Earth - Yellow/Green Strip (or it not available, use Green) Controls - Any suitable colour combination.

All wiring shall be carried out on the loop-in system. For conduit wiring systems, wiring shall be drawn into the conduits after the whole of the conduit installation has been completed. No joints or connectors will be allowed in any such cables, except that connectors may be used in accessible positions within lighting fittings or device outlet boxes.

Cable shall be terminated with suitable cable lugs recommended by the cable manufacturers.

The fire alarm system cable shall be tinned copper conductors of not less than 1 mm² cross sectional area.

All small wiring shall be colour coded to acceptable standard and be identified by moulded ferrules or sleeves both a the terminal strips and at the remote ends. Wiring for one primary circuit shall be run separately from another. It shall be neatly cleated and bunched according to their function for easy identification. Each wire shall be terminated with tinned approved crimped lugs.

The maximum number of cables that may be accommodated in a given size of conduit or trunking is not to exceed the number given in the local Electrical Authority.

Wherever any electrical wiring, riser, conduit, cable trays and trunking penetrate the fire wall or floor slab, a fire resistance caulking of the same fire resistance period of the adjacent building structure shall be provided. Such caulking shall be of dry construction, easy for future addition of cables and making good, of material accepted for electrical installation work and approved by the local authorities as a fire stopping material.

Busbars, busbar connections and bare conductors shall comply with the requirement of IEC 439 with regards to current - carrying capacity and limits of temperature.

All FR cables shall be install in hot dipped galvanised iron conduit or MS trunking or cable tray supported on walls, ceiling or structural steelwork.

Cables in trunking or cable tray shall be laid flat and clipped together insets with brass clips or saddles. No surface mounted cable is allowed.

6.0 CONDUIT

All conduit/trunking/cable tray shall be made of galvanized steel and shall be adequately sized to house the cables with at least 20% spare capacity. All conduits

Page 228: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION

TS(FP)/30

shall be heavy gauge galvanised steel complying with BS SS100 and 4568:Part I & II Class 4. No conduits shall be less than 20 mm nominal diameter.

Unless otherwise approved by Architect/Engineers conduit shall be concealed in concrete as construction proceeds, and so arranged as to drain naturally to outlet boxes. Sealing caps shall be placed on all conduits before concrete pouring commences to ensure no water enters the conduit. Expansion couplings shall be fitted at all building expansion joints. Surface conduits shall in no circumstances be fixed to floor slabs. All conduit systems are to be installed fully in accordance with the requirements of the local Electrical Authority.

All conduits shall be swabbed through to clean all dirt, free from burrs and internal roughness. The screw connections shall be made in such a manner as to ensure good electrical and mechanical conductivity throughout when assembled and be earthed with heavy capper wiring. All conduits not cast in concrete shall be securely fixed by means of hot-dip galvanised saddles with spacer at not more not 1 m centres for 20 mm conduits and 1.2 m centres for larger diameter conduits.

Manufacturer's standard fittings all be used for bends, angles, tees, intersections and other non-standard runs. Distortion of conduits due to bending is not acceptable. Conduit terminations at switches, distribution boards etc. shall be made with coupler and male brass bushes.

Connections to motors and other equipment subject to vibration shall be made with a length of heavy water tight PVC coated metallic flexible conduit set into suitable screwed conduit adaptors. The metal frame or other parts of the equipment so connected shall be earthed through the conduit system independently of the flexible conduit.

Unless otherwise specified or accepted by the Architect, all conduits below ceiling line shall be concealed in walls, partitions or floor.

Runs between draw-in boxes are not to have more than two right angle bends or their equivalent and the length of such runs shall be limited to 12 m to permit easy drawing-in of cables. Flexible conduit shall be used for final connections to equipment subject to vibration.

Flexible steel conduit and solid type adaptors shall comply with BS 731 Part 1. The conduit shall be watertight with the provision of separate earth wire enclosed for earth continuity. All flexible steel conduit shall be PVC sheathed. Make good any damage to the finish of all conduits, including threads cut at site, by painting damaged areas with two coats of aluminium primer paint.

7.0 CONDUIT BOXES

All conduit junction boxes are to be hot-dip galvanized malleable iron (surface mounted) or mild steel (concealed) and of standard pattern.

Standard pattern boxes are to be used with conduits up to and including 25 mm diameter. Rectangular pattern boxes are to be used for conduits of 25 mm diameter

Page 229: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION

TS(FP)/31

and larger. For the drawing-in of cables, standard pattern through boxes are to be used. All conduit boxes are to be galvanised finish.

Adaptor boxes are to be of galvanised mild steel not less than 3 mm thick. Boxes are to be not less than 50 mm deep and of such dimensions as will enable the largest size cable for which the conduit run is suitable to be drawn in without excessive bending of the cables. Covers of approved material with fixing screws are to be provided. All boxes are to be drilled for holes according to the conduit entries required.

All conduit entries to adaptor boxes, outlet boxes and switchgear are to be made with couplings and hexagonal male bushes.

The protective coating of the boxes shall be heavy both inside and outside in accordance with BS 4662.

8.0 CABLE TRUNKING

Metal trunking shall comply with BS 4678 and shall be manufactured in minimum lengths of 2 m from 1.5 mm thick zinc sprayed sheet steel finished with rust resisting primer and sprayed two coats enamel paint to colour agreed by Architect. Covers are to be held in place by screws. Trunkings are to be terminated with end flanges bolted directly to switch or distribution boards. Connecting pieces are to be used and bolted with cadmium plated mushroom head steel screws, nuts and shake-proof washers. Each joint is to have a copper link to ensure electrical continuity.

Conduit entries to trunking shall be made with couplings and brass male bushes. Knockouts will not be required and trunkings may be drilled on site.

Trunkings shall not contain more cable than allowed by the space factors described in the local Electrical Authority.

Each joint shall have a copper bond bolted to each adjacent trunking to ensure electrical continuity. All frayed and sharp edges shall be removed from trunking before installation.

Conduit entry to trunking shall be by coupling and male bush. Knock-outs shall not be provided, and trunking shall be drilled on site.Where trunking crosses expansion joints, a trunking system which will allow for expansion and maintain earth continuity shall be used. The system used shall be endorsed by the Architect prior to manufacture.

Where the trunking passes through floors or fire compartments, fire resisting barriers shall be provided both internally and externally.

All supports and hangers shall be of hot-dipped galvanized mild steel construction to BS 729:1971 Part 1 with minimum coating thickness of 85 and 210 for indoor and outdoor installation respectively. All bolts and nuts shall be electroplated with zinc or cadmium to BS 3382:Parts 1 and 2 with minimum plating thickness of 25.

Page 230: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION

TS(FP)/32

Unless all the trunking to be continuously interlinked, a 25 mm x 2.5 mm thick copper tape shall run continuously throughout the whole length of trunking to provide earth continuity.

9.0 EARTHING

All metalwork associated with the electrical installation but not forming part of a phase or neutral circuit shall be bonded together and solidly and effectively earthed.

Metal conduit, ducts and cable armour shall be earthed at the switch-board at which they originate by means of locknuts, screwed connection or cable gland.

The electrical resistance of metallic enclosures or framework to earth shall be low enough to permit the passage of current necessary to operate the device protecting the associated circuit.

The size of all earth continuity and bonding conductors shall be in accordance with the CP 5 1988.

10.0 SPARES

The Contractor shall supply the following items as spares :

(a) 3 fuse cartridges for TP fuse switch or switch fuse for each rating.

(b) 20% indicating lamps of all colours and sizes.

(c) 20% control fuses of all rating.

Page 231: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

TS(FP)/33

1.0 GENERAL

The location and quantity of the fire extinguishers shall be installed in accordance with the architectural drawings.

Every fire extinguisher shall be manufactured to comply with the following appropriate British Standards and shall be approved for use by the Fire Authority:

• BS 3326 - Portable Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguisher;

• BS 3465 - Portable Dry Powder Type of Fire Extinguisher;

• BS 1721 - Portable Fire Extinguisher of the Halogenated Hydrocarbon type.

All fittings and safety features necessary for the fire extinguishers to be approved for use as a complete unit shall be incorporated.

2.0 INSTALLATION

Each fire extinguisher shall be suitably installed for upright instantaneous operation.

Wall extinguishers shall be mounted 1.2 m above the floor level. Suitable hangers or brackets shall be provided.

The necessary operation, maintenance and reloading instructions shall be clearly displayed permanently on the body.

All fire extinguishers installed other than inside electrical and mechanical plant rooms, shall be complete with metal cabinets. The metal cabinet shall be painted signal read and be complete with glass front and master key lock.

Page 232: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

TS(FP)/34

1.0 GENERAL

This section of the Specification covers the supply, delivery, installation and testing of noise and vibration control equipment to be used in the isolation of the various mechanical equipment as called for in this Specification.

The Contractor must furnish and install vibration and noise control devices, materials and related items. They are expected to perform work as shown on the drawings and described in the specifications for the job.

The Contractor must co-ordinate with other trades to avoid through their related activities any rigid contact with the building that will degrade the noise and vibration with 'following-work', such as plastering or electrical to avoid any contact which would adversely affect the vibration isolation.

The Contractor shall bring to the Architect's attention prior to installation any conflicts with other trades works which will result in unavoidable transmission contact with their equipment due to inadequate provision of space or other unforeseen conditions.

Prior to installation, the Contractor shall bring to the Architect's attention any discrepancies between the specifications and the actual site conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies discovered after installation shall be at the Contractor's expense.

The Contractor shall correct, at no additional cost, to the employer all anti-vibration installations which are deemed defective in workmanship or materials.

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing vibration isolators of the appropriate size and capacity to meet the specified deflection requirements and are required to follow the instructions from the manufacturer or vendor of these products.

The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval product data, including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions.

The Contractor shall submit samples of vibration isolators (each type) to the Architect's approval.

2.0 STEEL SPRINGS IN SERIES WITH NEOPRENE PADS

Unless specified otherwise, spring type isolator shall be unhoused, free standing, laterally stable with levelling bolts rigidly bolted to inertia blocks/base frames. In general, diameter shall be comparable with compressed height and shall not be less than 0.8 of compressed height at rated load, and horizontal spring stiffness shall be approximately equal to vertical stiffness.

Spring shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of rated deflection, and in this condition, shall not exceed elastic limit of spring.

All springs shall be mounted with adequate clearance from brackets and shall be clearly in view for critical inspection.

Page 233: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

TS(FP)/35

3.0 STEEL SPRINGS IN SERIES WITH NEOPRENE PADS

The following spring types will meet this Specification on unhoused springs:

(a) Mason Type SLF/H; (b) Kinetics Type FDS; (c) Korfund Type WSC; (d) VMC Series AWH;

Other makes/types of isolators with known load/deflection curves may be used, subject to approval by the Architect.

Where restrained mounts are specified, a housing shall be used that includes vertical limit stops. A minimum clearance of 10 mm shall be maintained around the restraining bolts and between the housing and spring so as not to interfere with spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operations.

All spring type (whether free or restrained type) mounts used outdoors or exposed to weather or wet conditions shall be hot dipped galvanised.

Typical selection : Kinetic FLS (restrained type) Korfund WSCL

Mason SLR VMC AWR

All steel springs shall be installed in series with two layers of neoprene ribbed or waffle pattern pads (minimum 8 mm thickness) as described below.

The springs shall be selected to support the calculated loads with the minimum spring deflections as specified without being compressed solid, or bridged out, or exceeding the Manufacturer's maximum rated loads under any operating condition. In the selection of the springs the Sub-Contractor shall also take into account the weight distribution of the equipment under normal operating conditions, weight of unsupported pipes/ducts and any large dynamic forces due to fluid movement, torque reaction and starting/stopping. The Contractor shall show, on the shop drawings submitted, the make and model number of the isolators selected and their individual calculated loads.

4.0 INERTIA BLOCKS

Inertia blocks shall be installed where specified. The mechanical equipment shall be bolted directly on to the integral concrete inertia blocks. All concrete referred to in this Specification should have a density of at least 2240 - 2400 kg/m3.

In general, the length and width of the inertia block should be at least 50% greater than the length and width of the supported equipment, except where otherwise specified.

The weight of the inertia block generally determined by thickness, shall be as specified.

Page 234: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

TS(FP)/36

The base shall consist of a concrete slab cast into a welded steel base frame assembly. Frames shall be welded steel channels, of minimum 150 mm thickness or the same thickness as the inertia block and shall be reinforced with welded-in 12 mm steel reinforcing rods or angles at 150 mm centres each way. Anchor bolts shall be fixed into positions, and housed in steel bolt sleeves to allow minor bolt location adjustments or alternatively, pocket shall be cast into inertia block to permit the later insertion of anchor bolts.

A suitable base formed of minimum 10 mm plywood or equivalent shall be included for forming the slab. Steel channel isolator bracket shall be welded directly to channel frames, and suitably located to accommodate the height of the deflected springs and inertia block clearance with plinth.

There shall be adequate clearance (minimum 20 mm) all round the springs to assure that there is no contact between any spring and any part of the mounted assembly for any possible alignment or position of the installed inertia block. The clearance between inertia block and floor/plinth shall be at least 75 mm.

The Contractor shall supply and install all welded structural steel, reinforcement and concrete required for the inertia blocks and shall co-ordinate his installation with the main Contractor. All installation work concerning these items are included in this contract.

5.0 RIBBED OR WAFFLE PATTERN NEOPRENE PADS

To be used where specified - 18 mm to 10 mm thick 40 durometer pads as normally supplied by the manufacturers.

For typical applications, 40 durometer type neoprene pads should be loaded to a surface weight to approximately 35000 kg/m2 (50 lb/in2).

Where two or more layers of neoprene pads are used, individual layers shall be separated by 20 g thick steel shims.

6.0 RESILIENT HANGARS

Resilient hangers are to be used for resilient suspension of pumping mains pipes.

For specified deflections in excess of 12 mm, use spring in series with neoprene type and for deflections less than 12 mm use neoprene in shear type hangers.

e.g. - Masons type PC 30N (spring/neoprene) and type WHD (neoprene);

- Kinetic type SFH, SRH (Spring/neoprene) and type FH, RH (neoprene);

- VMC series SH (spring/neoprene) and RHD (neoprene).

Page 235: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

TS(FP)/37

7.0 RESILIENT HANGARS

During installation, inspection shall be made to ensure that no hangers are compressed, solid or bridge out, and that the stipulated minimum deflection are achieved.

8.0 PIPING

The first three hangers/supports from all mechanical equipment shall be spring in series with neoprene types as specified.

All other supports/hangers beyond the first three pipe hangers shall incorporate an isolation medium of 8 mm thickness such as waffle pattern neoprene, felt or high density fibreglass between pipe and hanger/support or between hanger/ support and wall. This applies to all piping installed on this project, whether in horizontal runs or vertical pipe risers, unless otherwise allowed by the Architect.

All pipe penetrations through walls, floors and ceiling shall be isolated from direct contact with the structure, with a fibreglass or asbestos fibre isolated sleeve and caulked with a non-setting resilient compound on both sides of the penetration similar to Thioflex 600 from `Expandite' or approved equivalent.

9.0 AIR COMPRESSOR

All air compressors shall be isolated with unhoused steel springs in series with neoprene in accordance with the Schedule of Vibration Isolation. Limit stops shall be installed with a normally operating clearance of 15 mm to minimise cyclic and starting/stopping transients. Air compressors shall be fitted with reactive multi-chamber type silencers of 'residential' grade of minimum 25 dB at 125 Hz octave band.

10.0 PUMPS AND MOTOR DRIVERS

All pumps shall be selected for the highest efficiency consistent with the specified duty, and all pump impeller diameters shall not exceed 0.9 times the maximum pump impeller diameter capability of the pump housing to reduce the possibility of tonal effects.

Pump impellers, shafts and drive couplings shall be statistically and dynamically balanced to the best commercial standards and vibration and amplitudes shall not exceed 0.028 mm at 1,000 rpm, 0.02 mm at 1,500 rp, and 0.01 mm at 3,000 rpm peak to peak displacement when measured on the machine structure, with the pumps/motors mounted on the inertia blocks specified.

The pump and motor assembly shall be mounted on a concrete filed inertia block and completely isolated as specified in the Schedule of Vibration Isolators. Pump inertia blocks shall be sized to support the weight of elbows, valves and other fittings without creating undue stress on the pump assembly.

Page 236: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

TS(FP)/38

11.0 PUMPS AND MOTOR DRIVERS

Noise Limits

(a) All pump electric motor drivers shall meet the following noise limits at maximum design operating load:

Maximum Sound Pressure Level at 1 m Motor Power from the cooling fan measured on axis(kW) axis under free field condition, in dBA

Up to 10 74 10 to 50 80 50 to 150 84 Above 150 85

(b) The Contractor shall submit noise data for all types of electric motor proposed to show general compliance with the above limits.

12.0 TESTING AND COMPLETION

.01 Sound level and vibration measurement shall be made by a testing authority approved by the Architect. Should the tests show that noise or vibration is in excess of those specified, or that balancing of equipment is incorrect, or that vibration transmission through mountings, hangers, etc., is excessive, the Contractor shall correct the installation at his own cost.

.02 Further test shall then be carried out at the Contractor's cost to show that the noise and vibration levels have been reduced to the limits specified.

.03 Sound level readings shall be taken at times when the building is unoccupied or when activity in surrounding areas and background noise levels in areas tested, are at a minimum and relatively free from sudden changes. Readings shall be taken with all plants, capable of transmitting sound to the space tested in operation.

.04 All apparatus used for sound and vibration measurements shall be approved by the Architect.

.05 A sound level meter fitted with an octave band analyzer and conforming to

International Organisation for Standardization IEC-179 and IEC-225 shall be used. Readings shall be reported in 'A' weighted sound pressure levels and linear octave band sound pressure levels from 63 Hz to 4 kHz. This sound level meter shall be handed over to the Employer before the expiry of the maintenance period.

Page 237: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PAINTING, COLOUR CODING AND LABELLING

TS(FP)/39

1.0 MATERIAL

All metal parts of the work installed in accordance with this Specification shall be painted with first quality enamel paints.

All metal parts of the work installed in accordance with this Specification shall be painted with first quality enamel paints, colours and brands as approved by the Architect, except for those items exempted from painting as more particularly described in this section of the Specification.

Paint shall be selected to withstand the temperature of the surface which it is to be applied, and shall be suitable in all respects for the environmental conditions in which it shall be located.

All paints used shall be of one manufacturer and finishes shall be full gloss unless otherwise instructed.

Before ordering any primer, undercoat and finishing paint, the Contractor shall submit the colour scheme for approval.

The Contractor shall select all finishing and painting materials from types suitable for the surfaces to which they are applied and for the environmental conditions in each area.

2.0 PLANT, MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT

All items of plant, machinery and equipment supplied painted ex factory shall be given one finishing coat of full gloss enamel, except where the manufacturer's standard finish shall be approved.

3.0 EXPOSED METALWORK

All exposed metalwork shall be wire-brushed and cleaned from rust, scale, dirt and grease, and shall then be given one priming coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat of full gloss enamel.

4.0 CONCEALED METALWORK

All galvanised iron surfaces concealed in false ceilings, building ducts and the like shall not be painted.

All black iron and steel surfaces shall be wire brushed and given one coat of zinc chromate or red lead.

Page 238: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PAINTING, COLOUR CODING AND LABELLING

TS(FP)/40

5.0 PIPEWORK IDENTIFICATION

All pipes and the like shall be identified in accordance with British Standards 1710:1984.

Circumferential bands of standard ground colours shall be not less than 100 mm wide on pipes up to 50 mm nominal diameter, and not less than 150 mm wide on pipes greater than 50 mm nominal diameter.

Supplementary colours shall be displayed as bands not less than 25 mm wide in the centre of the ground colour bands.

Where lettering is required it shall be painted in contrasting colours in accordance with the BS 1710, 1984, in block letters not less than 15 mm high for pipes up to 50 mm nominal diameter, and in block letter not less than 40 mm high for larger pipes.

Identification bands shall be located where they are clearly visible in each room or compartment through which the pipe runs, and shall be placed at centres not exceeding 6 m.

Direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow painted on the pipe adjacent to each colour band. Arrows shall be 75 mm long on pipes up to 50 mm nominal diameter, and 150 mm long on large pipes.

6.0 COLOUR SCHEME

The whole of the piping installation shall be painted in accordance with BS 1710:1984 systems. Colours code shall be to BS 4800:1981.

Equipment shall be painted and colour coded to BS 381C:1980 as follows:

Equipment Colour No.

Switchboard & Electric Orange - Control Panels White Interior

Electric Motors Primrose 310

Electrical conduits Light Orange 557

Pumps and tanks As for respective - piping service

All other equipment As directed -

Page 239: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PAINTING, COLOUR CODING AND LABELLING

TS(FP)/41

7.0 LABELLING

All plant and equipment provided under this Specification shall be labelled in both English and Chinese as to duty or services, all such labelling to correspond to schedules, diagrams, and the like to be provided as part of the as-fitted drawings. Labels shall be of traffolyte with black engraved lettering not less than 20 mm high or as otherwise required and approved by the Architect.

Manufacturers' nameplate shall generally be provided for all plant and equipment and shall show serial and model numbers and date of manufacture.

The following refer to specific items (but not be limited to) requiring labelling:

• All valves, motor starters, distribution board, gauges, contactors, cable terminals in switchboards, circuit breakers.

• Labels shall be attached to valves (or pipe adjacent thereto) with a light gauge metal band or alternatively to be screwed to the insulated valve boxes where provided. These labels shall state the valves number.

• Distribution boards, starters and the like shall be labelled to indicate the circuit number, phase and item controlled.

• Labels shall be screwed or riveted to sheet metal. Adhesive fixing is not acceptable.

• Details of exact lettering shall be agreed with the Architect prior to manufacture.

• A complete valves schedule shall be incorporated in the as-built drawings and this schedule shall clearly indicate the valves numbers, duty, function, size, flow rate and any other relevant information necessary to allow the Employer's plant operators to safely operate each valve and to subsequently maintain or replace the valves as required.

• The valves schedule shall clearly be related to various system schematics to enable the entire operating sequence and circuitry to be followed.

8.0 APPLICATION OF PAINTING

All paints shall be prepared and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

All galvanised metal surfaces shall be properly etch-primed to ensure correct adhesion of the paint to the surface. Materials for etch-priming shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturers. Subsequent painting of galvanised surfaces shall comply with this Specification.

Page 240: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

PAINTING, COLOUR CODING AND LABELLING

TS(FP)/42

Prior to painting, all metallic surfaces except galvanised surfaces shall be thoroughly scraped and wire brushed as necessary to remove scale, rust and swarf. Surfaces shall then be solvent cleaned to remove all oil, grease and dirt.

When the surfaces to be painted are clean and dry, one coat of primer shall be evenly applied over the entire area. After surfaces have been primed, the Contractor shall notify the Architect so that an inspection of the primed surfaces can be made prior to the application of the undercoat and the finishing coats.

When the priming coating has been completed, one coat of an approved paint undercoat shall be applied. Before applying the finishing coats, the Contractor shall ensure that the undercoated surface is rubbed flat and smooth. Finally, two coats of a high gloss finishing paint shall be applied when all dust has been removed.

Each successive coating shall be completely dry prior to the application of the next coat. The minimum thickness of each layer of paint shall be 50 u.

Page 241: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

TESTING & COMMISSIONING

TS(FP)/43

1 .0 GENERAL

The entire works included in this contract shall be fully tested in stages as the work proceeds and on completion of work as applicable.

The Contractors shall provide during normal working hours, all necessary labours, instruments, equipment, materials, fuel, power and maker's representatives, to carry out such tests as may be necessary to satisfy the Architect that the installation meets the requirement and intent of the specification as well as such tests required by BCD and the Fire Safety Bureau.

All tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect or his representative or any inspecting authority. At least five working days notice in writing shall be given to the inspecting parties before performing any test.

Three copies of all test results shall be submitted to the Architect in A4 size sheet paper within two weeks after completion of the tests.

Tests described hereinafter and including all tests prescribed by the Authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out. Any tests proved unsatisfactory shall be repeated to the satisfaction of the inspecting parties.

The Contractor shall provide skilled technicians/engineer to commission the plant and associated controls to the satisfaction of the Architect. The technicians/ engineers will be required to demonstrate the correct procedures in starting and stopping the plant, running the various items of equipment under automatic and manual control and the correct maintenance of the plant.

Water flow rates of all equipment shall be adjusted to design conditions. Complete results of adjustments shall be recorded and submitted.

2.0 FACTORY TESTS

The following items of equipment shall be tested at the manufacturer's works or elsewhere as appropriate. `Type-Test' certificate may be occupied as stipulated in the following sub-clauses. In all cases, factory test certificates or type test certificates shall be submitted in triplicate to the Architect.

.01 Fire Anunciators Panels, Smoke and Heat Detectors

`Type-Test' certificate from approved authorities such as LPC/FOC, UL or FM.

Page 242: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

TESTING & COMMISSIONING

TS(FP)/44

3.0 ON-SITE TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Two months prior to completion of the Contract Works, the Contractor shall liase with the Main Contractor and the Electrical Contractors and submit for the Architect's approval a detailed programme for conducting on-site acceptance tests and commissioning. The Contractor shall start up, operate, test and adjust the systems in accordance with the agreed programme. The setting shall be supervised by the manufacturer's representative, who shall remain on site until the equipment is operating satisfactorily and accepted by the Architect. The Contractor shall advice and co-ordinate with the manufacturer's representatives so that all testing is carried out according to the agreed programme.

The whole installation shall be given the following tests to bring the plant into running order. The Architect shall be given reasonable notice together with a copy of recorded test results, generally not less than seven (7) days, regarding the nature of tests, the time and location. Acceptance tests will only be witnessed by the Architect when the submitted tests results are found satisfactorily.

All instruments, tools, material and labour required to perform these tests shall be provided by this Contractor.

Before the tests are carried out, the Contractor shall remove connected equipment and components which are liable to damage under test, and shall provide and fix all the necessary gauges, blanking flanges, etc.

During system erection, the following tests shall be carried out:

i. Fire Detection and Alarm System

Alarm bells shall be adjusted and tested such that every corner of the building shall be suitably alarmed by the bells.

Other alarm functions and control functions such as fuel trip when emergency generator room is in fire shall be tested to confirm satisfactory provision of the requirements in the "Fire Detection and Alarm System" Section.

As the DC circuitry is monitored, simulation tests shall be performed for all possible fault conditions.

Battery charger tests, battery inspections and the like shall be performed.

4.0 STATUTORY AUTHORITIES' TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

As and when notified in writing or instructed by the Architect, the Contractor shall submit shop drawing and attend all tests and inspections carried out by Local Fire Authority, Water Authority and other Statutory Authorities, and shall forthwith execute free of charge any rectification work ordered by the Architect as a result of such tests and inspections which determine non-compliance with Statutory Regulation. Some of these tests may take place after the issue of Practical

Page 243: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

TESTING & COMMISSIONING

TS(FP)/45

Completion of the Main Contract and the Contractor shall make all allowances in this respect.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the submission of all necessary forms and shop drawings to the Statutory Authorities which shall conform in layout to the latest architectural plans submitted kept by these Authorities. The submission shall comply with the requirements set forth in the current Codes of Practice and circular letters of the Statutory Authorities. The shop drawings to be submitted shall be forwarded to the Architect for checking before submission.

The Contractor shall ensure that his submission shall not delay the subsequent FSB inspection and test, otherwise he shall be fully responsible for any consequence due to his delay. The Contractor shall allow for at least two Fire Authority Submissions of complete sets of shop drawings, one to be made within six months after the award of the Contract and shall not be less than six weeks before the inspection. The Architect may at his discretion instruct the Contractor for additional submissions to Fire Department whenever necessary. The Contractor shall notify the Architect at least seven days in advance of his application for local Fire Authority tests and inspections. On receipt of a confirmed date for test and inspection the Contractor shall inform the Architect without delay.

5.0 PRELIMINARY COMMISSIONING CHECKS

Ensure that all equipment is thoroughly cleaned, lubricated and checked for serviceability before setting to work. Particular attention is drawn to the removal of building debris from the pipe work systems.

Special attention is drawn to the need for thoroughly flushing out all pipe work systems to ensure that all foreign matter is removed.

All automatic controls and safety devices shall be inspected and checked for service ability before the working fluid or electricity is applied to the system.

6.0 COMMISSIONING

When the various installations have been completed and the preliminary commissioning checks carried out, the Contractor shall set to work, regulate and calibrate all system in the entire installation. Special attention shall be paid to the following items:

6.0 COMMISSIONING (continued)

That all valves, switches, controls, etc. are regulated and capable of proper operation and in the case of isolation valves that they are capable of tight shut off.

All apparatus is silent in accordance with the requirements of this Specification.

All instruments are correctly calibrated and read accurately.

Page 244: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

TESTING & COMMISSIONING

TS(FP)/46

All services are tested in accordance with the details in the relevant clauses of this Specification.

Operate pumps, pressure reducing sets, etc. to ensure that all control systems are functioning correctly and are properly set, sequenced or interlocked.

7.0 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS

Following the commissioning of the entire installation, and prior to issue of the Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall carry out final acceptance tests in accordance with a programme to be agreed with the Architect.

Should the results of the acceptance tests show that plant, systems and/or equipment fail to perform to the efficiencies or other performance figures as given in this Specification, the Contractor shall adjust, modify and if necessary replace the equipment without further payment in order that the required performance be obtained.

Where acceptance tests are required by the relevant Authorities having jurisdiction, these tests shall be carried out by the Contractor prior to the issue of Completion Certificate to the acceptance of the Authorities.

8.0 REJECTION OF PLANT

Any item of plant or system or component which fails to comply with the requirements of this Specification in any respect whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at site may be rejected by the Architect either in whole or in part as he considers necessary/appropriate adjustment and/or modification work as required by the Architect so as to comply the Authority's requirement and the intent of the specification shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the Authority/Architect.

After works have been accepted, the Contractor may be required to carry out assist in carrying out additional performance tests as reasonably required by the Architect/Employer.

9.0 WARRANTY AND HANDOVER

The Contractor shall warrant that all plant, materials and equipment supplied and all workmanship performed by him to be free from defects of whatsoever nature before handover to the Employer.

10.0 POST CONTRACT DRAWINGS

Supply prior to practical completion (which will not be granted until such have been supplied) four copies of all installation drawings which have been correctly brought

Page 245: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

TESTING & COMMISSIONING

TS(FP)/47

up to date to reflect all field changes and are a true and accurate representation of the actual installations. Three copies of these drawings shall be folded and inserted in plastic envelopes in the installation manual and one copy shall be laminated into plastic. In addition supply two sets of microfilm aperture cards of all drawings. These drawings shall include the following:

.01 Complete ducting and layout drawings showing the actual sizes and locations of all ducts, dampers, supply outlets, return inlets, fresh air intakes, etc. and the final measured air flow rates at all relevant locations.

.02 Complete plant room and/or equipment layout drawings with full identification of each and every item of equipment.

.03 Complete piping layout drawings, showing the actual sizes and locations of all refrigerant, water, instrument air, steam, fuel oil, gas and any other lines applicable to the system.

.04 Complete schematic flow and control diagrams of all air, water, refrigerant, instrument air and any other systems incorporated in the installation.

.05 The drawings shall show all motorised automatic and hand-operated controls such as dampers, valves, relief valves, cut-outs, thermostats, expansion valves, solenoid valves, bleeds, vents, drains, strainers, gauges, thermo wells ,by-passes, sight glasses, and all similar items pertinent to the functioning of the installation.

Where applicable the drawings shall also include the settings and differential bands of all controls, cut-outs and other variable or adjustable items. All items must be clearly identified as to type and functioning of the installation.

.06 Complete control wiring diagrams showing all electrical controls, relays, cut-outs, timing devices, inter-locks, fuses, over-loads, contactors, solenoids, starters, etc. with all items clearly identified as to type and function, and "as installed" switchboard layout drawings.

If the quantity of drawings involved is too large to conveniently bind in the installation manual, then a separate matching cover shall be supplied for each of the three drawing sets.

Page 246: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

TS(FP)/48

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall guarantee against fault or defect all materials and works under this contract for a period of twelve months from the date of issue of the Certificate of Practical Completion.

The Contractor shall at his own expense pay for spare parts, tools and other items necessary for the proper operation of the system.

A maintenance schedule setting out the proposed programme of maintenance, inspection and servicing together with advice of arrangement of prompt attention to emergency call shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect.

2.0 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

The Defects Liability Period will commence from the date of Practical Completion. Immediately after Practical Completion, the Contractor shall supply all labour to run the plant for a period of 4 weeks. The Contractor shall also be responsible for providing adequate training of two (2) plant attendants for duration of not less than two weeks. During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall carry out regular preventive maintenance in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturers of equipment installed under this Specification, or otherwise as directed, and shall provide a fast, efficient and comprehensive breakdown service.

Upon completion of the Defect Liability period, the contractor shall renew any certificates as required by Local Authorities for the project.

3.0 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

.01 The Contractor shall within 14 days of reaching Practical Completion handover to the Architect three (3) copies of the Maintenance Instruction Manual.

.02 Manuals shall comprise the following:

• A cover giving: - name of the development - title of the document - name and address of the Installation Contractor - name and title shall also be printed on the spine of each

manual

• Inside page giving the similar information to the cover but including contact telephone numbers for normal and emergency use.

• Contents page.

• Description of the installation.

Page 247: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

TS(FP)/49

• Scheduled details of all equipment and plant.

• Operating instructions including details of any automatic control system.

• Maintenance and fault finding instructions including composite schedule for routine maintenance.

• Test reports and commissioning records.

• Recommended spare parts and lubricants.

• List of equipment and plant with manufacturer's name and address and local agent, if applicable.

• Manufacturer's literature suitably indexed to include shop drawings, wiring diagrams, performance curves, and the like.

• List of as-fitted drawings.

.03 Manuals shall be produced on A4 size paper, all sections shall be suitably separated and readily identifiable with pages numbered consecutively and page numbers included in the contents page.

.04 Finally, approved manuals should be submitted in loose-leaf ring binders with hard covers to facilitate storage.

.05 As-installed drawings may be folded and accommodated in the manual if appropriate.

.06 As-installed drawings should include a diagrammatic layout of the complete installation with major items of plant suitably referenced to the schedules and combined services drawing (item e above).

.07 A set of the as-installed drawings should be provided for each copy of the O&M Manual required to be provided. In addition one set of copy negatives should be provided.

.08 Where indicated in Schedule AA, Manuals shall also be provided in diskette or microfilm format.

4.0 SERVICE

The Contractor shall provide and submit to Architect for prior approval a maintenance program and 24 hours emergency call out service during the Defects Liability Period.

At the option of the Employer, the Contractor shall also enter into a separate Maintenance Agreement for maintenance of the equipment beyond the Defects Liability Period.

Page 248: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

TS(FP)/50

5.0 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall undertake the comprehensive maintenance and routine servicing of the fire services installation during the Defects Liability Period.

The Contractor shall carry out routine maintenance as described herein. The Contractor shall also perform all additional maintenance work not listed herein which he considers necessary to ensure that all the various systems installed to operate satisfactorily and that maximum availability of the Fire Services installation is maintained at all times.

The Contractor shall immediately repair any defect in any part of the installation noticed during the maintenance period.

The Contractor shall at his own expense pay for spare parts, tools and other items necessary for the proper maintenance of the system.

A maintenance schedule setting out the proposed programme of maintenance, inspection and servicing together with advice of arrangement of prompt attention to emergency call shall be submitted for acceptance by the Architect.

Breakdown maintenance shall be attended to promptly on call from the Employer and details shall be reported immediately to the Employer.

The Contractor shall give the Employer at least seven days' prior notice of when each maintenance visit is due so that the Employer can nominate a representative to be present.

The Contractor shall report to the Employer prior to commencing each service and before leaving. A comprehensive report shall be compiled by the Contractor for all the work which has been carried out during each visit, including comments on any improper functioning of various systems, and comments on any items requiring detailed examination at or before the next scheduled visit.

The service report shall also state the date when the next regular routine service visit is due to take place.

A copy of this report shall be submitted to the Employer for record.

The minimum maintenance requirements shall be as follows:

.01 Monthly

- Carry out all lubrication necessary; - Check and adjust as necessary all drives; - Check all bearings for correct operation; - Check all connections for tightness; - Check all sump and drains, and clean as necessary; - Prove and test correct operation of all safety controls; - Prove and operation of all automatic controls and alarm detection

system;

Page 249: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

TS(FP)/51

- Check all glands, packing, and the like and adjust or replace as necessary. Record drip rate after replacement.

.02 Half Yearly Routine

- Clean and re-grease all bearings as indicated on approved maintenance plan;

- Inspection and clean as necessary all items of plant and equipment; - Clean and adjust all switchgear, contactors and starters, vacuum

clean all cabinets; - Prove operation of all thermal overloads record all settings of

readings; - Prove operation of all thermal overloads; - Carry out all necessary repair work as result of the above checking; - Touch up all paint and replace lost or damaged labels.

.03 Annual Routine

To provide all labour, material tools and transports to carry out annual inspection and tests to ensure system operating satisfactorily and submit certificate to FSB accordingly. The Contractor shall also undertake to provide a comprehensive breakdown service whereby qualified technicians shall attend to each breakdown as soon as practicable after a breakdown is reported, and carry out immediate remedial work at a reasonable speed according to the nature of the breakdown. Any faulty equipment or components shall be quickly replaced.

In circumstances such that the Contractor fails to attend to the breakdown within four normal working hours after notification of a breakdown, and where remedial work is interrupted during normal working hours for purposes other than obtaining replacement parts, the Employer reserves the right to order such action as may be necessary to expedite completion of remedial work which shall be at the Contractor's expense without abrogation of the Contractor's responsibilities.

6.0 SPARE PARTS

Spares Parts Contractor shall keep sufficient spare parts during the Defects Liability Period to ensure that replacement work for defects can be carried out immediately.

The following spare parts are required by the FSB and shall be handed over to the Employer in suitable fitted galvanized boxes with padlocking facilities:

Item Quantity

Sprinkler head To meet LPC/FOC Rules Pendent/upright type (68

oC) Para 4040

Hose reel nozzle 5 nos. Spare glass for break glass unit 10 nos. Spare glass for hose reel nozzle 10 nos. cabinet

Page 250: Tender Documents

PART III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FIRE PROTECTION)

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

TS(FP)/52

Fuse cartridges for each rating 3 nos. each of TP fuse switch or switch fuse Indicating lamps 20% of all colour and size. Spanner and special tools 1 set

The above spare parts and a test record book shall be kept in a signal red baked enamel steel cabinet of 1.6 mm thickness. The cabinet shall be complete with a padlock.

7.0 SERVICE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

The owner shall have the option to enter into an annual service maintenance agreement after the Contractor has fulfilled the contract maintenance and guarantee obligation.

The annual service maintenance cost which shall include emergency service and regular maintenance shall be quoted together with the tender and be valid for a period of three years.

A competent engineer shall be provided by the Contractor to investigate the fundamental cause of a fault. Temporary quick fix solutions will not be accepted.

The Employer shall at his discretion, take action to recover all losses incurred arising from the failure of the Contractor to perform the duties either wholly or in part as detailed in this section.

Page 251: Tender Documents

PART IV OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

DECLARATION / UNDERTAKING

(Appendix A)

Page 252: Tender Documents

DC/1

DECLARATION/UNDERTAKING

I)

PERSON EMPOWERED TO ACT

The following persons are empowered to sign contract documents and act on the firm's/company's behalf for this project:

Name NRIC No Position Held

II)

GST STATUS OF FIRM (IF ANY)

*Non-taxable under the GST Act / Taxable under the GST Act

The GST Registration No. is _____________________________________ A photocopy of the Certification of Registration for Goods and Service Tax shall be enclosed.

*Delete whichever is inapplicable

Page 253: Tender Documents

DC/2

III)

PROJECTS CURRENTLY UNDERTAKEN BY TENDERER

Contract No/

Name of Project

Client

Contract

Sum

Contract Period

Value

of Work Completed

From To

I declare that the information given above are correct and complete. (Please use separate sheet if space is insufficient).

Page 254: Tender Documents

DC/3

IV)

INFORMATION ON MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS

Person, Company or Corporation which owns, whether directly or indirectly, at least 50% of the total number of shares in the tenderer.

Details of shares held by such person, company or corporation

Name Address Number of Shares

% of Shares

Class of Shares

* Delete where not applicable

Page 255: Tender Documents

DC/4

V) UNDERTAKING TO SAFEGUARD OFFICIAL INFORMATION

1. The attention of the Party, whose particulars are set out below, has been drawn to the Official Secrets Act (Chapter 213, 1985 Revised Edition) and in particular to Section 5 thereof which relates to the safeguarding of official information.

Name of Party:

NRIC/Passport/ACCRA No:

2. The Party understands and agree that all official information acquired by him/her/them in the course of his/her/their duties is of a strictly secret and confidential nature, and is not to be published or communicated by him/her/them to any other person in any form whatsoever except in the course of his/her/their official duties, whether during or after his/her/their service.

3. The Party undertakes to:

(a) Ensure that any other person who is authorised by him/her/them to have access to any official information shall similarly sign an undertaking to safeguard such official information; and

(b) Return any Employer Document received from the Employer, any other copies made or reproduced from such document or part thereof whenever required by the Employer.

4 The Party further understands and agrees that any breach or neglect of this undertaking may render him/her/them liable to prosecution under the Official Secrets Act.

__________________ ____________________ ___________________

Authorised Signature Full Name in BLOCKS NRIC/Passport No.

__________________ ____________________ ___________________

Designation Name of Company/Entity Date

___________________

Seal where the Party is a body corporate

__________________ ____________________ ___________________

Signature of Witness Full Name in BLOCKS NRIC No & Date

Page 256: Tender Documents

DC/5

VI) Company/Business Background Information

1. Name of Company/Business: ________________________________

2. Registered Address in Singapore: ___________________________

________________________________

__

3. Type of Ownership: ________________________________

4. Company/Business

Registration Date: ________________________________

5. Nature of Company/Business: ________________________________

6. Total number of employees

in Singapore: ________________________________

7. Company's Financial Status

a. Authorised Capital: ________________________________

as of end of Financial Year 2009

b. Paid-up Capital: ________________________________

c. Profit before tax: ________________________________

d. Profit after tax: ________________________________

Please attach a copy of the latest audited financial statement of the company.

Page 257: Tender Documents

PART IV OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

CONTRACTOR’S DECLARATION - LIST OF TRADE SUB-CONTRACTORS

(Appendix B)

Page 258: Tender Documents

Page 1

CONTRACTOR’S DECLARATION - LIST OF TRADE SUB-CONTRACTORS Project Title: Contract No.:

Name of Trade Sub-contractor

CPF A/C No.

SLOTS or CIDB Reg. No.

Trade or Workhead

Period* Start Date End Date Sum ($)

Submitted by Name : Designation : (Project Manager & Above) Signature : Company’s Stamp :

*Update of this declaration must be furnished to the Ministry of Manpower whenever a new-sub-contract is awarded. Please note that no work permit application can be accepted until this declaration is submitted to the Ministry of Manpower. Please direct enquiries to Work Permit Section, 200 Braddell Road. Tel. 1800 2581756 (toll free)

Page 259: Tender Documents

PART IV OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

DECLARATION THAT PRICES IN INVOICES ARE NETT – FORM D9

(Appendix C)

Page 260: Tender Documents

Page 1

FORM D9 CONTRACT NO: EE/ITT/10/022 PROJECT : ____________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________ I/We* declare that to my/our* best knowledge and belief, the prices stated in the below-listed vouchers and invoices are the nett prices paid to the suppliers after deducting all trade discounts, and that I/We* have not suppressed any information to the disadvantage of the Government. Name of Supplier Invoice No.

Date

_________________________ Signature of Contractor _________________________ _____________________ Name of Contractor in Company Stamp BLOCK letters Date: _________________ * Delete where inapplicable

Page 261: Tender Documents

PART IV OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

RISK ASSESSMENT FORM

(Appendix D)

Page 262: Tender Documents

1. Hazard Identification 2. Risk Evaluation 3. Risk Control 1a. 1b. 1c. 1d. 2a. 2b. 2c. 2d. 3a. 3b. No. Activity Hazard Possible Accident

/ lll Health & Persons-at-Risk

Existing Risk Control

SEV LLH Risk Risk Control Measure

Action Officer (Follow-up date)

Likelihood

Severity Remote

(R) Occasional

(O) Frequent

(F) Major (Ma) MR HR HR Moderate (Mo) LR MR HR Minor (Mi) LR LR MR

HR = High Risk, MR = Medium Risk, LR = Low Risk

Page 1

RISK ASSESSMENT FORM

Company: Conducted by: (Names, designations) (Date)

Process/ Location: Approved by: (Name, designation) (Date)

Last Review Date: Next Review Date:

Page 263: Tender Documents

PART IV OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

MICA HOUSE RULES

(Appendix E)

Page 264: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

1

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES AT MICA BUILDING

PURPOSE

This document sets out the procedures for carrying out fitting-out and alteration works to tenanted premises and states the responsibilities of the tenants and their consultants/contractors in such undertaking. The purpose is to ensure that all concerned parties comply with the building’s requirements and all relevant Authorities’ requirements to enable works to be expedited smoothly and safely

DEFINITIONS

Landlord Ministry of Information, Communications and the Arts 140 Hill Street MICA Building 5th Storey, Corporate Services Department Singapore 179369

Contact person: Mr.Alan Yong Tel : 68379470 Fax : 68379430

Building Manager CPG Facilities Management Pte Ltd c/o 140 Hill Street

MICA Building 1st Storey Facilities Management Office (next to FCC) Singapore 179369 Tel : 68379473 Fax : 68379474

Contact person: Ms Oona Gan Huey Yenor Mr. Ang Bok Heng

Page 265: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

2

MICA Building

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

1 REQUIREMENT OF AUTHORITIES

Tenants are responsible to ensure that all work and installations are executed in compliance to statutory requirements and in accordance with good sound design practice and relevant CPs where applicable.

2 APPROVAL PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORKS

Tenants should ensure that their appointed Consultant/Contractor had obtained approval (where applicable) from the Authorities before they are permitted to commence work on site.

Application for permit to commence work on site shall be submitted to the Building Manager not less than two (2) working days in advance. The Building Manager’s approval does not in any way invalidate the requirement for Tenant to comply with all requirements of the Authorities. The permit to work application is as set out in APPENDIX 1A to 1F.

Appendix 1A : Particulars of Consultants and Contractors Appendix 1B : Application of Permit to Work (Builder’s work) Appendix 1C : Tenants Licenced Electrical Workers’ certification Appendix 1D : Application of Permit to Work (Airconditioning work) Appendix 1E : Application of Permit to Work (Fire Protection work) Appendix 1 F : Hot work/Welding Work

As mentioned above, Tenants’ contractors shall not commence work without obtaining prior approval from the Authorities and permit from the Landlord, and any entry without permit by the Contractor shall be construed as an act of trespass of private property.

3 Plumbing & Sanitary Works

In view of congested ceiling void space, it is advisable for tenants NOT to install wet pantry. If tenants are keen to provide wet pantry, they must appoint Licensed Plumber to study the site condition. If technically possible and agreeable by low floor tenants, the Landlord will give permission. Where permission is given for Tenant to install a wet pantry and/or internal toilet by the Landlord, Tenant must appoint the Building’s Structural Engineer, E2000 to study, design supervise and approve for any penetration or puncture to be made through the structural floor of the premises and installation of pipe works. Hacking of floor for vent or drain pipe must be carried after office hour or during Public Holiday subject to

Page 266: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

3

MICA Building

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

approvals and consent by the lower floor tenants. It must be closely supervised by the tenant’s consultant.

Tenant/contractor is to bear the overtime cost for affected lower floor tenants to standby after office hours to facilitate the hacking work.

Tenants must also engage an ENV Registered Plumber & PUB Water Service Plumber to carry out the said work. A letter of undertaking by Tenant to undertake regular maintenance of the plumbing & draining installation is necessary.

4 Hot Works

Prior approval from the Landlord must be obtained before any hot welding works can be carried out in the building. (Appendix 1F)

The Contractor must comply with the following conditions:-

Inform Landlord on the scope of works to be done and method intended to be used to carry out the works.

Ensure that proper equipment and skilled workers are employed for the works.

(1) Undertake to indemnify the Landlord from any accidents, damages and claims arising from the works.

(2) Furnish the names and identification number of the workers and the contact number of the authorised representative.

(3) Ensure that sufficient fire fighting equipment (e.g. fire extinguishers, sand boxed) are provided at the work site throughout the duration of work.

(4) Ensure that constant supervision is provided throughout the works.

The Landlord will not hesitate to stop the works immediately if the Contractor does not conform to any of the above conditions. The Landlord will not be responsible for any delay in the works resulting from this stoppage of works.

Page 267: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

4

5 Site Controls

Site Supervision / Fire Safety / Noise / Smells

Tenants are advised to exercise adequate site over the contractors / work progress so as not to cause inconvenience or endanger the other occupants and users of the building.

In this respect, frequent inspections should be undertaken to ensure that all fire exits are clear and that adequate fire extinguishers are provided during the isolation of the fire protection system and rubbish properly disposed off daily. Work which generate and excessive noise, dust, smell such as drilling, hacking and spray painting and varnishing, must be carried out after the normal office hours, weekends and public holidays.

6 Entry Permits for Construction Workers

Tenants’ contractors shall furnish particulars of all their workers employed for fitting-out program to the Landlord for Entry Permit to the building.

7 Debris

Tenants shall ensure that their contractors regularly remove all construction debris from the building premises. Debris left unattended for more than one (1) day shall, after written notification, be removed and all expenses incurred in so doing shall be borne by tenants / contractors and deducted from the security deposit. (A Letter of Undertaking for Removal of Debris shall be submitted by the contractor. (Appendix 2)

8 Restricted Areas

The common areas (especially the lift lobbies and common corridors) and car parks should not be used as construction work zones.

9 Obstruction to common Passage, Fire Escape etc

The Tenant’s contractors shall ensure that their stock , goods or parts are kept within their employer’s premises as many obstruction to common corridors, fire escape routes etc shall be immediately cleared away by the Landlord and all cost so incurred shall be chargeable to the contractor responsible.

Page 268: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

5

10 Illegal Use of Premises

The tenant’s contractors shall ensure that their workmen do not use the premises or any part of the buildings as temporary accommodation or for any illegal purpose.

11 Temporary Protection

Tenants shall provide temporary protection to all finishes in the common areas (such as lift car interiors, lift lobbies, corridors) to prevent any possible damage and dirtying the common areas.

12. Restriction On Working Hours

There is no general restriction on the times of work but all works involving heavy hacking, knocking and drilling, as well as painting and varnishing work which generates noise and air pollutions are to be carried out after office hours as follows:-

a) Monday to Fridays : after 6.00 p.m.

b) Saturdays : after 2.00 p.m.

c) No restrictions on Sundays and

Public Holidays [Except on requests

by the Landlord]

13. Car parking Facilities

No car parking facilities will be provided to the Tenants’ contractors. Tenants’ contractors are allowed to use the loading & unloading bay for loading and unloading purpose.

14. Workmen Using Toilets

Contractors’ workmen are not allowed to use the toilets for washing tools and equipment, bathing, disposal of wet debris etc., which may cause choking of sewage system and inconvenience to other occupants in the building. The tenant/their contractors shall bear the cost for clearing chokages, washing and mopping up operation should the workers be found abusing the facilities.

Page 269: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

6

15 Portable Petrol/Diesel Engine Driven Equipment – Prohibited

No petrol / diesel engine driven equipment such as portable generator, air compressors are allowed to be used in the building.

16 Use of Service Lift

Tenants shall arrange with Landlord through Building Management Office on the use of the service lift during the period of renovation.

As there is only one (1) service/fire lift per tower, no reservation of the lift will be permitted although arrangement or registration must be made for use after office hours. Tenants are to advise their Contractors not to jam the service lift during load/unloading for sole individual’s use as the lift also serves as the fire lift.

Tenants are advised that construction workers are NOT permitted to use the passenger lifts.

The service lift has a maximum capacity loading of 1600KG. If heavy items/equipment are to be transported via service lift, the tenant shall inform the Landlord in advance for the arrangement of lift contractor’s technicians in attendance. The tenant shall pay all costs for the services of the lift contractor.

17 Insurance

Tenants are required to take up:

(i) Workmen’s compensation for their workers (ii) An all risk, including third party liability cover in the joint names

of Landlord and Tenants for a minimum of S$ * (refer to table below) for any one claim.

Contract Value * Value to be coveredUp to $100,000 $200,000 $100,000 to $250,000 $500,000 $250,000 to $500,000 $1,000,000

Page 270: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

7

18 Employment of Illegal Immigrant / Workers

All workers contracted to carry fitting out works must be in legal employment of the contractor/s. Tenants and contractors must ensure that no illegal immigrants are employed for the said works.

For the purpose of this clause, “the illegal immigrant” shall mean any person who enters or stays in the Republic of Singapore in contravention of the provisions of the immigration Act or such statutory modification or re-enactment thereof for the time being in force.

19 CORRESPONDENCE

All correspondence relating to the works shall be address to the Facilities Management Office.

Page 271: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

8

APPENDIX 1A

MICA

MICA BUILDING

TENANTS FITTING-OUT WORKS

- PARTICULARS OF CONSULTANTS AND CONTRACTORS

(This form is to be completed by the Tenants and their contractor/s)

Please return the completed form to: The Building Manager

140 Hill Street, MICA Building

1st Storey Facilities Management Office

Singapore 179369

Tenant:

Fitting-out Units/s:

Commencement Date:

Expected Completion Date:

Particulars of Tenant’s Consultants/Contractors**:-

1. Architect:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No: 2. Design Consultant:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No:

Page 272: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

9

APPENDIX 1A

3. M&E Consultant:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No:

4. Main Contractor:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No:

5. Electrical Contractor:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No:

6. Plumbing Contractor:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No:

7. Air-Con Contractor:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No:

Page 273: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

10

APPENDIX 1A

8. Fire Protection Contractor:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No:

9. Security System Contractor:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No: 10. Vertical Blinds Suppliers:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No: 11. Wall Paper Suppliers:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No: 12. Carpet Suppliers:

Address: Contact Person:

Telephone No:

13. Others:

Page 274: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

11

APPENDIX 1B

CPGFM Pte Ltd

c/o MICA Building

140 Hill Street

1st storey Facilities Management Office

Singapore 179369

MICA Building

LETTER OF AUTHORISATION AND APPLICATION FOR PERMIT TO WORK

- BUILDERS’ WORKS ( MAIN CONTRACT )

Premises : Unit No. #_________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

Part 1 AUTHORISATION

Dear Sirs

We hereby authorized our contractor M/s _________________________________________

to undertake the proposed Builders’ Works at the abovementioned premises. Such works shall be

commenced from ______________________ to ______________________________

We understand that the Contractors would have to abide by your terms and conditions. In

consideration of our application for permit for execution of Builders’ Works, we hereby undertake to

keep you fully indemnified in respect of all claims, losses, liabilities or damages made against,

suffered by you, as a result of a breach by our contractor, its employees or agents of your terms and

conditions or as a result of any of the works undertaken by our Contractor for fitting-out the said

premises.

Tenant’s Representative

Name : ___________________________

Signature:_________________________

Designation :_______________________

Date :_____________________________

__________________________________

Company Stamp

Page 275: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

12

APPENDIX 1B

Part II LANDLORD’S IN-PRINCIPLE APPROVAL

Note: Tenants’ / or their consultants / or their contractors shall ensure that works shall

Only commence upon receipt of Approval from the Relevant Authorities.

In-Principle Approve By:-

Name: _______________________________ Signature: ______________________________

Designation: __________________________Date:___________________________________

Remarks: _____________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Page 276: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

13

APPENDIX 1C

TENANTS’ LICENCED ELECTRICAL WORKER’S CERTIFICATION

(To be completed upon completion of installation)

I,_____________________________________PUB Licence No._________________________ Certify that the installation is completed according to the approved drawings and are fit to be connected to the existing electrical system.

Stamp & Signature of Tenant’s Licenced Electrical Worker :_____________________________________________

BUILDING LEW’S CERTIFICATION

(To be completed by LEW (Building) & The Building Manager prior to turn-on)

I,____________________________________PUB Licence No.__________________________ Action in the capacity of LEW for the Building is satisfied with the above installation and is fit for connection to the existing electrical system. I also certify that the Tenant’s protective relaying schemes have been properly discriminated from the Landlord’s supply system.

Building LEW Name :_________________________Signature:________________________

Company Name :___________________________________________________________

Company Stamp :__________________________________________________________

VERIFIED BY (THE BUILDING MANAGER)

Name :_________________________________Signature :_____________________________

Designation:____________________________Date :__________________________________

Page 277: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

14

APPENDIX 1D

CPGFM Pte Ltd

c/o MICA Building

140 Hill Street

1st Storey Facilities Management Office

Singapore 179369

MICA BUILDING

LETTER OF AUTHORISATION AND APPLICATION FOR PERMIT TO WORK

-AIR-CONDITIONING WORKS

Premises: Unit No.#______________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

Part 1 AUTHORISATION

Dear Sirs

We hereby authorized our contractor M/s__________________________________________ To undertake the proposed Air-conditioning Works at the abovementioned premises. Such works shall be commenced from_______________________to_________________________

We understand that the Contractors would have to abide by the terms and conditions set out in the attached notes to contractors. In consideration of our application for permit for execution of Air-conditioning Works, we hereby undertake to keep you fully indemnified in respect of all claims, losses, liabilities or damages made against, suffered by you, as a result of a breach by the Contractor, its employees or agents, of your terms and conditions or as a result of any of the works undertaken by the Contractor for fitting-out the said premises.

Tenant’s Representative

Name :____________________________

Signature :____________________________

Designation :__________________________

Date :__________________________

_____________________________________

Company Stamp

Page 278: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

15

APPENDIX 1D

Part II SCOPE OF AIR-CONDITIONING WORKS

(To be completed by appointed Air-con Contractor)

(Please tick the appropriate boxes)

*Type of Work / Service Required:

Relocation of Return Slot Access to Air Handling Unit New Return Slot Isolation of Chilled Water Relocation of Air-con Diffuser Co-ordination of BAS contract New Air-con Chilled Water Tap-off from existing Seal off Air-con Installation of Flow Meter Other Services (Please specify)__________________________________________________________

*Quantity to be indicated *All new installation to be provided with necessary technical information

Part III ATTACHEMENT TO BE SUBMITTED

Endorsed Air-conditioning Layout Plan Details of Proposed Installation Schedule of Air-conditioning Equipment including details on size and capacity

Name of Contractor :_____________________________________________________

Name of Representative :__________________________Signature:_________________

Company Stamp :_____________________________________________________

Date :_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________

Part IV THE BUILDING MANAGER IN-PRINCIPLE APPROVAL

(To be completed by the Building Manager)

Note: Tenants’ / or their consultants / or their contractors shall ensure that works shall Only commence upon receipt of Approval from The Relevant Authorities.

In-Principle Approval By:-

Name :______________________________Signature:________________________________

Designation :_________________________Date: ____________________________________

Remarks:_____________________________________________________________________

Page 279: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

16

APPENDIX 1E

CPGFM Pte Ltd

c/o MICA Building

140 Hill Street

1st Storey Facilities Management Office

Singapore 179369

MICA BUILDING

LETTER OF AUTHORISATION AND APPLICATION FOR PERMIT TO WORK

-FIRE PROTECTION WORKS

Premises: Unit No.#______________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

AUTHORISATION

Dear Sirs

We hereby authorized our contractor M/s__________________________________________ To undertake the proposed Fire Protection Works at the abovementioned premises. Such works shall be commenced from_______________________to_________________________

We understand that the Contractors would have to abide by the terms and conditions set out in the attached notes to contractors. In consideration of our application for permit for execution of Fire Protection Works, we hereby undertake to keep you fully indemnified in respect of all claims, losses, liabilities or damages made against, suffered by you, as a result of a breach by the Contractor, its employees or agents, of your terms and conditions or as a result of any of the works undertaken by the Contractor for fitting-out the said premises.

Tenant’s Representative

Name :____________________________

Signature :____________________________

Designation :__________________________

Date :__________________________

_____________________________________

Company Stamp

BUILDING MANAGER’S

(To be completed by the Building Manager if permit is granted)

Date/Time of issue of Permit :____________________________________________________ Date/Time of expiry of Permit :___________________________________________________ Name of Person Issuing Permit :_________________________ Signature:_________________________

Page 280: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

17

APPENDIX 1F

CPGFM Pte Ltd

c/o MICA Building

140 Hill Street

1st Storey Facilities Management Office

Singapore 179369

MICA BUILDING

LETTER OF AUTHORISATION AND APPLICATION FOR PERMIT TO WORK

HOT WORKS / WELDING WORKS

(To be completed by Hot Works Contractor)

Nature of Work (include exact location, equipment and enclose method statement).

______________________________________________________________________________

DECLARATION OF SAFETY OFFICER

I,___________________________NRIC No.__________________in the capacity

of_____________________(safety officer designate) and on behalf of____________________

(Hot Works Contractor) have inspected and taken all necessary precautions at the site to

ensure that the work area(s) and their adjacent area are rendered safe for execution of the

nature of work described above.

Duration of Permit Required is:

From_____________________________to________________________________________ (Date & Time) (Date & Time)

___________________________________ Signature & Date

BUILDING MANAGER’S

(To be completed by the Building Manager if permit is granted)

Date/Time of issue of Permit :____________________________________________________

Date/Time of expiry of Permit :___________________________________________________

Name of Person Issuing Permit :_________________________Signature:_________________

Name of Person to Whom Permit is Issued :_________________________Signature:_________________

Page 281: Tender Documents

FITTING-OUT PROCEDURES

18

Appendix 2

CPGFM Pte Ltd

c/o MICA Building

140 Hill Street

1st

Storey Facilities Management Office

Singapore 179369

MICA BUILDING

LETTER OF UNDERTAKING TO REMOVE ALL RENOVATION DEBRIS FROM THE SITE

TO GOVERNMENT’S APPROVED DUMPING GROUND

Dear Sirs

This is to confirm that we, M/s___________________________________________________

the authorized contractor for renovation works at unit #___________________MITA Building shall

clear and cart away all renovation debris at our own cost to government’s

approved dumping ground.

We will be accountable for paying a levy of S$800.00 per lorry for the immediate disposal

of debris by your appointed contractors.

Yours faithfully

Name of Authorised Person :____________________________________________________

Signature :____________________________________________________

Name of Company :_____________________________________________________

(Contractor)

Telephone No. :____________________Fax No:___________________________

Company Stamp :_____________________________________________________

Date :_____________________________________________________

Page 282: Tender Documents
Page 283: Tender Documents
Page 284: Tender Documents

Record retention period: 2years

For Minor Project / A&A Works At MICA (Please Circle Where Applicable)

Company Name : _______________________________________

Project title :___________________________________________________________________ from __________________________to _________________________(Date)

I _________________________________________(Name) with NRIC no. ___________________have

read Minor Project Procedure Guide and regulations mentioned in IMS-SP-01-R-01 and IMS-SP-02-R-01 and understand that it my duty to ensure that all regulations and safety requirements are abided at all

time to prevent the following or any other hazards.

1. Slip and Fall Hazards - i.e. slipping on slippery or oily floor 2. Chemical Hazards - i.e. burns, inhalation, ingestion of chemicals 3. Mechanical / Machinery Hazards - i.e. getting injured or cuts from machinery parts 4. Fall from Height Hazards - i.e. falling from a higher place 5. Electrical Hazards - i.e. coming into contact with electricity or static 6. Falling Object Hazards - i.e. objects falling from above 7. Lifting Hazards - i.e. injuries to body due to personnel lifting heavy material 8. Fire and Explosive Hazards - i.e. dealing with substances that can give rise to fires and

explosions 9. Confined Space Hazards - i.e. unconsciousness or being trapped or burnt in a small and

inaccessible place 10. Physical Hazards - i.e. excessive noise, heat, radiation in workplace environment 11. Biological Hazards - i.e. bacterial, fungi and viruses infection

12. Ergonomic Hazards - i.e. repetitive work, awkward postures, prolonged standing 13. Psychosocial Hazards - i.e. overwork, poor supervision

Any damages arise in the event of work will be reinstated at no cost to MICA.

We noted that all hacking and drilling works is only allowable on weekend or after office hour. All tools use at MICA must be tested and calibrated.

We will inform the Managing Agent CPGFM at least 3 working days in advance to access to statutory board area (Prior to the Ministry approval). My hand phone no is :___________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

(Official used only) To be filled by EITA on contractor PPE 1 Access to height of greater than 2.0m?

Safety harness provided? Yes/ No

Helmet provided ? Yes/ No

2 Access the generator/chiller plant rooms? Ear plugs provided ? Yes/ No

3 Any storage for chemicals and cleaning solutions at site?

MSDS submitted? Yes / No

4 Any hot work?

Yes / No

If yes gloves and goggle provided: Yes / No

Can the contractors proceed with the proposed work? Yes / No

Escort By _______________________________(Technician Name)

Date:__________________

Acknowledge by __________________________(CPG FM)

Page 285: Tender Documents

PART V OF THE INVITATION TO TENDER

LIST OF DRAWINGS

Page 286: Tender Documents

PART V LIST OF DRAWINGS

DWG/1

Tenderers shall refer to the list of drawings as specified in the Drawing Specifications in the Architectural and M&E drawings.